Series 90-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheets Manual

Series 90-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheets Manual
Î
GE Fanuc Automation
Programmable Control Products
t
Series 90 -70
Programmable Controller
Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
November 1999
GFL–002
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that
hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other conditions that
could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be
associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or
damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is
not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to
understanding and operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While
efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not
purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for
every possible contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance.
Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software
systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this
document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or
statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness,
sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of
merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply.
The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Alarm Master
CIMPLICITY
CIMPLICITY 90-ADS
CIMSTAR
Field Control
GEnet
Genius
Helpmate
Logicmaster
Modelmaster
Motion Mate
PowerTRAC
ProLoop
PROMACRO
Series Five
Series 90
Series One
Series Six
Copyright 1991 - 1999 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
Series Three
VersaMax
VersaPro
VuMaster
Workmaster
Preface
t
The Series 90 -70 Programmable Logic Controller and its associated modules have been
tested and found to meet or exceed the requirements of FCC Rule, Part 15, Subpart J. The
FCC requires the following note to be published.
NOTE
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not
installed in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a
Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which
are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user at his own expense will
be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
The Canadian Department of Communications requires the following note to be published.
NOTE
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
The following statements are required to appear for Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.
GFK-0600F
1.
EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D,
DIV. 2 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2,
GROUPS A, B, C, D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
3.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT
UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS.
4.
ALL UNUSED SLOTS IN ALL BASEPLATES SHOULD BE POPULATED WITH A
BLANK SLOT INTERRUPT JUMPER, IC697ACC722, OR EQUIVALENT WHEN
THERE ARE MODULES INSTALLED TO ITS RIGHT WHICH MAY INTERRUPT
THE CPU.
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
iii
Preface
How to Find a Data Sheet in This Manual
To find the location of a data sheet in this manual:
(A). If you know the product name look for it in the
Table of Contents. Its page number (at bottom of page)
is listed (for example, page 5-1 is the first page of the
VME Integrator Rack data sheet).
(B). Use the Index to search for a data sheet by either
product category and name, product catalog number
(IC.........), or by data sheet number (GFK-....).
For more information on finding data sheets in this
manual, go to the next page.
iv
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
GFK-0600F
Preface
This manual includes all currently available hardware data sheets for the Series 90-70
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) under a single GE Fanuc publication number:
GFK-0600F. On a module-by-module, and a unit-by-unit basis, this manual provides a
complete hardware description of the Series 90-70 PLC product line.
➪ How Data Sheets are Arranged in this Manual
The data sheets in this manual are arranged in categories by type. They can easily be found
by looking in the Table of Contents or the Index.
➪ Look in the Table of Contents
You can find a data sheet by looking in the Table of Contents under the heading (General
Information, PLC CPUs, etc.) for the product type; each data sheet is then listed by product
name (type of module), catalog number (IC. . .), and number (GFK) of the data sheet.
Following is an example Table of Contents entry.
Product Type ➪
PLC CPUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Data Sheet ➪
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte, Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
data sheet GFK-0159J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 12-1
12-1
The page numbers for the data sheets, as listed in the Table of Contents, are sequential in
this manual and are located at the bottom of each data sheet page. Note that each data
sheet is numbered according to its location in the manual. The first data sheet starts with
1-1, the 12th data sheet starts with 12-1, etc.). The page numbers for individual data sheets
remain intact at the top of the data sheet (that is, 1 through 4, 1 through 8, etc.).
➪
Look in the Index
You can also find a particular data sheet in the index. The index lists data sheets by product
type and name, catalog number (IC697XXXYYY), data sheet number (GFK-XXXX), and the
page number in this manual. Following are example index entries for the CPU listed above
CPUs
12 MHz 32 Kbyte IC697CPU731, 12-1
GFK-0159, CPU 12 MHz 32 Kbyte, 12-1
IC697CPU731, CPU 12 MHz 32 Kbyte, 12-1
Content of Data Sheets
A data sheet is a user-oriented document, packaged with each Series 90-70 PLC module,
which contains information specific to the module it accompanies. The format of the
data sheet is standardized and includes the following sections (if applicable):
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
GFK-0600F
Features
Functions
General Description
Installation
Field Wiring
Calibration and Data Format
Specifications
Ordering Information
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
v
Preface
A data sheet only provides information for hardware installation of the module in the Series
90-70 system. Operation and programming of the modules is discussed in other Series 90-70
documents (see Related Publications). The audience for these documents is assumed to
include electricians, technicians, engineers and those who are familiar with digital electronics
and industrial control equipment.
Revisions to This Document
This version of the Series 90-70 Data Sheet manual has been revised to include all current
versions of applicable Series 90-70 data sheets. It contains new data sheets and revisions that
have been made to data sheets that were in the previous version of this manual
(GEK-0600E). A data sheet (GFK-0867) - GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General
Specifications, which is at the front of the manual, lists and describes the standards to which
GE Fanuc products comply.
For those installations having more stringent installation requirements where compliance to
standards or directives from the Federal Communications Commission, the Canadian
Department of Communications, or the European Union is necessary - refer to GFK-1179,
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards.
References have been made on applicable data sheets to state that programming and/or
configuration can be done either by MS-DOSr (Logicmaster 90-70), or Windowsr
(Control) software products. A note has been added, where applicable, after module
specifications regarding availability of Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature
Testing option.
New and Revised Data Sheets
The following data sheets are new or have been revised since the previous version of
this manual was printed.
Data Sheet
Number
GFT-102H
Title of Data Sheet
Catalog
Number
Page
Number
ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System) . . . . . . . . . . Allproducts . . . . . . . . . 1-1
GFK-0867F GE Fanuc ProductAgencyApprovals,Standards,
GeneralSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Productslisted . . . . . . . 2-1
GFK-0079K Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount . . . . . . . . . . IC697CHS750/790/7914-1
.
GFK-0684G VME Integrator Racks, 17-Slot Front and
Rear Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CHS782/783. . . . 5-1
GFK-0637G Rack FanAssembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697ACC721/724/744
. 6-1
GFK-1120D 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM925 . . . . . . . 18-1
GFK-1429F 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbyte
(Slow) Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX772 . . . . . . . . 19-1
GFK-1431F 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX782 . . . . . . . . 20-1
GFK-1433E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte
(Medium) Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX928 . . . . . . . . 21-1
GFK-1435E 96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Fast Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPX935 . . . . . . . . 22-1
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.
vi
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
GFK-0600F
GFK-1437C 96 MHz, 32-Bit, FP, 512 Kbyte Memory CPU . . . . . . . IC697CGR772 . . . . . . . 23-1
for CPU redundancy Applications
GFK-1439C 96 MHz, 32-Bit, FP, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory CPU . . . . . IC697CGR935 . . . . . . . 24-1
for CPU redundancy Applications
GFK-1215B 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
for Triple Modular Redundancy Systems . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM790 . . . . . . . 27-1
GFK-1167C 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte
Memory CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM790 . . . . . . . 31-1
GFK-1002E FIP Bus Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697BEM742/744. . . . 62-1
GFK-1309E Ethernet Interface (Type 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CMM742 . . . . . . 71-1
GFK-0834D RedundancyCommunicationsModule . . . . . . . . . . . IC697RCM711 . . . . . . . 72-1
GFK-1663E RS-485 Port Isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC690ACC903 . . . . . . . 78-1
Removed Data Sheets
The following data sheets which were in the previous version of this manual were
removed due to the following: (1) product discontinued, (2) product has been replaced
by a new version of the product, (3) a new data sheet created, or (4) information in the
data sheet has been added to the applicable user’s manual. Note that even though a
data sheet is no longer in this manual, it may still be ordered. Consult your local GE
Fanuc PLC distributor or GE Fanuc sales office for details.
Data Sheet
Number
GFK-0600F
Title of Data Sheet
Catalog
Number
GFK-0802C
32 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM914
replaced by IC697CPM915, described in GFK-1119
GFK-0857B
64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC697CPM924
replaced by IC697CPM925, described in GFK-1120
GFK-0550E
RS-422/RS-485toRS-432Converter(IC690ACC900) . . . . . . IC690ACC900
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
vii
Preface
Related Publications:
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
GFK-0255 - Series 90t Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User’s Manual
GFK-0256 - MegaBasict Programming Language ReferenceManual
GFK-0262 - Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Installation Manual
GFK-0263 - Logicmastert 90-70 Programming Software User’s Manual
GFK-0265 - Series 90t-70 Reference Manual for Logicmastert USers
GFK-0398 - Series 90t-70 GeniusR Bus Controller User’s Manual
GFK-0401 - Workmaster IIR PLC Programming Unit Guide to Operation
GFK-0413 - GEnett System Manager Software User’s Manual
GFK-0448 - User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party VME Modules
GFK-0487 - Series 90t PCM Development Software (PCOP) User’s Manual
GFK-0499 -CIMPLICITYR 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual
GFK-0529 - Series 90t SNP Communications User’s Manual
GFK-0579 - Series 90t-70 Remote I/O Scanner User’s Manual
GFK-0582 - Series 90t PLC Serial Communications User’s Manual
GFK-0585 - Series 90t PLC SNP Communications Driver User’s Manual
GFK-0641 - CIMPLICITYR 90-ADS Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
GFK-0644 - Series 90t-70 I/O Link Interface Module User’s Manual
GFK-0685 - Series 90t Programmable Controllers Flow Computer User’s Manual
GFK-0727 - Series 90t-70 PLC State Logic Processor User’s Guide
GFK-0730 - Series 90t-70 PLC OnTOP User’s Guide
GFK-0731 - Series 90t-70 PLC ECLiPS User’s Manual
GFK-0787 - GeniusR Modular RedundancyUser’s Manual
GFK-0827 - Series 90t-70 Hot Standby CPU RedundancyUser’s Guide
GFK-0854 - Series 90t Sequential Function Chart Programming LanguageUser’s Manual
GFK-0870 - Host Communications Toolkit for C/C++ Applications User’s Manual
GFK-1004 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90t-70 PLC User’s Manual
GFK-1026 - Host Communications Drivers for MicrosoftR Windowst User’s Manual
GFK-1029 - Logicmastert 90-70 Ethernet TCP/IP User’s Manual
GFK-1062 - Series 90t-70 High Speed Counter User’s Manual
GFK-1179 - Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards
GFK-1192 - Series 90-70 System Manual for Control Software Users
GFK-1295 - Control User‘s Manual
GFK-1527 - Series 90-70 Enhanced Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User‘s Guide
GFK-1541 - TCP/IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User’s Guide
We Welcome Your Comments and Suggestions
At GE Fanuc Automation, we strive to produce quality technical documentation. After
you have used this manual, please take a few moments to complete and return the
Reader ’s Comment Card located on the next page.
Henry A. Konat
Technical Writer
viii
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
– November 1999
GFK-0600F
Contents
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration)
datasheet GFT-102H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
datasheet GFK-0867F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet (Part No: 44A724534-001)
datasheet GFK-0638A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLC Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791 (Standard Racks - Front and Rear
Mount)
datasheet GFK-0079K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount (IC697CHS782/783)
datasheet GFK-0684G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721/724/744)
datasheet GFK-0637E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1-1
2-1
3-1
4-1
4-1
5-1
6-1
7-1
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724)
datasheet GFK-1047F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748)
datasheet GFK-1061D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-1
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR710/712)
datasheet GFK-1388A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-1
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC (IC697PWR711/713)
datasheet GFK-1448B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-1
Power Supply Adapter Module (IC697PWR720)
datasheet GFK-0626D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-1
PLC CPUs
.............................................................
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
datasheet GFK-0159J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU771)
datasheet GFK-0349F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU772)
datasheet GFK-0588E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU781)
datasheet GFK-0766D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
(IC697CPU782)
datasheet GFK-0767D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
(IC697CPM915)
datasheet GFK-1119B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
(IC697CPM925)
datasheet GFK-1120D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK-0600F
Table of Contents
12-1
12-1
13-1
14-1
15-1
16-1
17-1
18-1
ix
Contents
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX772)
datasheet GFK-1429F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX782)
datasheet GFK-1431F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX928)
datasheet GFK-1433E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX935)
datasheet GFK-1435E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications (IC697CGR772)
datasheet GFK-1437C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23-1
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications (IC697CGR935)
datasheet GFK-1439C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPU788)
datasheet GFK-0806D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPU789)
datasheet GFK-0807D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
(IC697CPM790)
datasheet GFK-1215B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot Standby CPU Applications (IC697CPU780)
datasheet GFK-0837C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
28-1
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE784)
datasheet GFK-1035C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE924)
datasheet GFK-1036B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30-1
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit 1 Mbyte Memory, State
Logic (IC697CSE925)
datasheet GFK-1167C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31-1
Expansion Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM713/715/717/719)
datasheet GFK-0160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32-1
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM731/732/733/735)
datasheet GFK-0531E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33-1
Coprocessor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Coprocessor Module (IC697PCM711)
datasheet GFK-0164G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x
t
32-1
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual–November 1999
34-1
34-1
GFK-0600F
Contents
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) (IC697ADC701)
datasheet GFK-0521E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discrete Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35-1
36-1
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL252)
datasheet GFK-0756D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36-1
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL253)
datasheet GFK-0757C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37-1
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL254)
datasheet GFK-0784C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38-1
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL250)
datasheet GFK-0084J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39-1
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL240)
datasheet GFK-0375E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40-1
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL251)
datasheet GFK-0718C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41-1
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL241)
datasheet GFK-0376G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42-1
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL652)
datasheet GFK-0378F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43-1
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL653)
datasheet GFK-0379F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44-1
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL654)
datasheet GFK-0380G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45-1
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL640)
datasheet GFK-0719D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46-1
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL651)
datasheet GFK-0377D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-1
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic (IC697MDL671)
datasheet GFK-0880C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48-1
Discrete Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49-1
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL350)
datasheet GFK-0081H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49-1
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module (IC697MDL340)
datasheet GFK-0082H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50-1
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module (IC697MDL341)
datasheet GFK-0382J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51-1
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL753)
datasheet GFK-0383F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52-1
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL752)
datasheet GFK-0381E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53-1
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL750)
datasheet GFK-0085G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54-1
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module (IC697MDL740)
datasheet GFK-0086G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55-1
Relay Output, 16 Point Module (IC697MDL940)
datasheet GFK-0384E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56-1
GFK-0600F
Table of Contents
xi
Contents
Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57-1
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels Base Converter Module IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module - IC697ALG440
Voltage Expander Module - IC697ALG441
datasheet GFK-0385F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57-1
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module (IC697ALG320)
datasheet GFK-0388G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58-1
Special Applications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed Counter (IC697HSC700)
datasheet GFK-1057D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59-1
State Logic Processor Module (SLP) (AD697SLP711)
datasheet GFK-0734C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60-1
Bus Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Controller Module (IC697BEM731/734)
datasheet GFK-0165G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIP Bus Controller (IC697BEM742/744)
datasheet GFK-1002E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713)
datasheet GFK-0161H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bus Receiver Module (IC697BEM711)
datasheet GFK-0162F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote I/O Scanner (IC697BEM733/735)
datasheet GFK-0539C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Link Interface Module (IC697BEM721)
datasheet GFK-0645C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Interface Module for the IC600 PLC (IC697BEM761)
datasheet GFK-0096F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Controller (IC697CMM741)
datasheet GFK-0532K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Interface (Type 2) (IC697CMM742)
datasheet GFK-1309E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Communications Module for State Logic CPU (IC697CMM712)
datasheet GFK-1039B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Coprocessor Module (CMM) (IC697CMM711)
datasheet GFK-0370F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Redundancy Communications Module (IC697RCM711)
datasheet GFK-0834D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmer Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Station Interface (XT, AT) (IC640WMI910/310)
datasheet GFK-0166F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work Station Interface (PC/2) (ICIC640WMI920/320)
datasheet GFK-0281D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xii
t
59-1
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual–November 1999
61-1
61-1
62-1
63-1
64-1
65-1
66-1
67-1
68-1
68-1
69-1
70-1
71-1
72-1
73-1
73-1
74-1
GFK-0600F
Contents
Accessories
............................................................
Cables - I/O
datasheet GEK-83517E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable - Power Supply Extension (IC697CBL700/713)
datasheet GFK-0153G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables - PCM to Programmer (IC690CBL701/702/705)
datasheet GFK-0359F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS-485 Port Isolator (IC697ACC903)
datasheet GFK-1663A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miniconverter Kit (IC690ACC901)
datasheet GFK-0682C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blank Slot Interrupt Jumper (IC697ACC722)
datasheet GFK-0589A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Shield Clamping Assembly (IC697ACC736)
datasheet GFK-1187A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VME Option Kit (IC697ACC715)
datasheet GFK-0552C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GFK-0600F
Table of Contents
75-1
75-1
76-1
77-1
78-1
79-1
80-1
81-1
82-1
xiii
9
General Information
2
Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration
GFT-102H
April 1998
General Information
ISO 9000 Registration (Quality System – ISO 9000 Registration)
datasheet GFT-102H
1
Quality System - ISO 9000 Registration
GE Fanuc Automation was one of the first
manufacturing companies in the United States to be
registered to ISO 9001 Quality Standards. ISO 9001 is
the most comprehensive in a series of standards in the
ISO 9000 Series which assures customers of a sound
quality system in Marketing, Design, Manufacturing,
and Service.
ISO 9000 is a series of quality standards which define
how you can establish, document and maintain an
effective quality system which demonstrates to your
customers your ability to supply them high quality
products. The standards provide a framework for
implementing a working quality management system.
The International Organization for Standardization
(ISO) has published ISO Quality System standards (ISO
9000 Series) using submissions from its member
countries. These standards have been so widely
accepted that most industrialized countries have
replaced their national standards with ISO 9000 series.
The equivalents for ISO 9001 in the United States and
United Kingdom are ANSI/ASQC Q9000-9004 and
BS5750 part 1-4, respectively.
GE Fanuc has embraced the concept of ISO quality system
management and registration. Ultimately the adoption of
ISO 9000 standards will spread throughout the United
States, resulting in our suppliers and customers gaining
registration status as well. Our supplier involvement is
particularly significant since it will promote a common
understanding of quality and continuous improvement
throughout the process/product chain. GE Fanuc will
accept ISO 9000 registration in lieu of a quality system
audit. We have also modified our Supplier Quality System
survey to include ISO 9000 series criteria.
The ISO 9000 Series includes a guidance document ISO
9004, and ISO 9001, 9002, and 9003 which address
contractual requirements for quality systems and are
used for external quality assurance assessment. ISO
9001 is the most comprehensive standard and it is
defined as: ”Quality Systems - Model for Quality
Assurance in Design/Development, Production,
Installation, and Servicing”. This most comprehensive
and stringent standard assesses the producer’s ability
to design as well as manufacture and test good product.
GE Fanuc completed the registration process successfully
in June, 1991, being one of the first automation companies
in this country to do so. In order to assure international
acceptance of the registration, GE Fanuc is jointly
registered by UL (USA) and BSI (UK). On-going
surveillance visits by the above agencies will continue
annually at a minimum to assure compliance to the
standards.
The ISO 9001 registration numbers for GE Fanuc are:
A2003 for UL and FM 13400 for BSI.
If there are any questions or inquiries about ISO, please call (804) 978-5000 and ask for the ISO Program Manager
or the Business Quality Engineer.
Or write to either of the above at:
GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
P.O. Box 8106
Charlottesville, VA 22906
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1-1
1
General Information
2
GFK-0867F
August 1998
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
Geniusr I/O Products, Series 90t-30, Series 90t-70, & VersaMax PLC Products
Field Controlt Distributed I/O & Control Products
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
datasheet GFK-0867F
The products supplied by GE Fanuc are global products which are designed and manufactured with ISO9001
quality assurance for application in industrial environments throughout the world. They should be installed and
used in conformance with product specific guidelines as well as the following agency approvals, standards and
general specifications:
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
AGENCY APPROVALS OVERVIEW 1
Comments
QualityAssuranceinDesign/Development,
Production, Installation, & Servicing
ISO9001
Safety for Industrial Control Equipment
C-UL5 , CSA22.2, or
142-M1987
UL1604
with C-UL5
FM3611
CSA22.2, 213-M1987
Safety for Hazardous Locations
Class I, Zone 2, A, B, C, D
QualityAssurance
Certification by UnderwritersLaboratories
UL508
Safety for Hazardous Locations
Class I, Div II, A, B, C, D
Certification4 by Underwriters Laboratories and BSI
CENELEC
prEN50021
Certificationby Underwriters Laboratories [C-UL5]
or Canadian Standards Association for selected
Series 90, Genius, VersaMax, and Field Control
modules
Certification by UnderwritersLaboratory for
Versa Max, Field Control, and selected Series 90 andGenius modules
Certification by Factory Mutual for selected
Genius and Series 90-70 modules
Certification by Canadian Standards Association
for selected Genius modules
Certification by DEMKO through Underwriters
Laboratory for selected Series 90-30 and Field Control
modules, and VersaMaxproducts
UL2279
IEC 79-15
Certification by UnderwritersLaboratory for VersaMax products, and selected Series 90-30 and Field
Control modules
CE Mark
Certification by Competent Body for EMC
Directive for selected modules
European EMC and Low VoltageDirectives
6 STANDARDS OVERVIEW2, 4
.
5
Conditions
ENVIRONMENTAL
Vibration
IEC68-2-6
1G @57-150Hz, 0.012in p-p @10-57Hz
Shock
IEC68-2-27
15G, 11ms
Operating Temperature3
0_C to 60_C: Series 90 [inlet], Genius [ambient], VersaMax [ambient]
0_C to 55_C: Field Control [ambient]
Storage Temperature
–40 _C to +85_C
Humidity
5% to 95%, non-condensing
Enclosure Protection
IEC529
Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Steel cabinet per IP54:
protection from dust & splashing water
2-1
General Information
2
GFK-0867F
August 1998
GE Fanuc Product Agency Approvals, Standards, General Specifications
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Á
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
STANDARDS OVERVIEW2, 4
Conditions
EMC EMISSIONS
Radiated,Conducted
CISPR 11/EN 55011 “Industrial Scientific & Medical Equipment”
(Group 1, Class A)
CISPR 22/EN 55022
“Information Technology Equipment” (Class A)
referred to as FCC part 15, “Radio Devices” (Class A)
47 CFR 15
EMC IMMUNITY
ElectrostaticDischarge
RFSusceptibility
Fast Transient Burst
Surge Withstand
[applies to CE Marked modules]
EN 61000-4-3*
ENV 50140/ENV
50204
EN 61000-4-4*
ANSI/IEEE C37.90a
IEC255-4
EN 61000-4-5*
Conducted RF
8KVAir, 4KV Contact
EN 61000-4-2*
EN 61000-4-6*
10Vrms /m,80Mhz to 1000Mhz, 80% AM
VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
2KV: power supplies, 1KV:I/O,communication
DampedOscillatory Wave: 2.5KV:
power supplies, I/O [12V-240V]
DampedOscillatory Wave: Class II,
power supplies, I/O [12V-240V]
Field Control and VersaMax: 2 kV cm(P/S); 1 kV cm (I/O)
VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
10Vrms, 0.15 to 80Mhz, 80%AM: comm. modules w/ cables >30m
VersaMax: All power supply,I/O, and communication modules
ISOLATION
Dielectric Withstand
UL508, UL840,
IEC664
1.5KV for modules rated from 51v to 250v
EN 61000-4-11*
During Operation: Dips to 30% and 100%, Variation for AC
Ç 10%, Variation for DC Ç 20%
POWER SUPPLY
Input Dips, Variations
* EN 61000-4-x series of tests are technically equivalent to the IEC 1000-4-x and IEC 801-x series.
Note 1:
Module specific approvals are listed on the GE Fanuc Electronic Bulletin Board Service [BBS].
The BBS can be reached at 804-978-5458 with the following modem settings: 14400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, no stop
bits. After accessing the BBS, select the BBS File area (PLC:AGENCY STATUS) and the file (AGENSTDS.XLS).
Note 2:
Refer to module specific data sheets & installation guidelines in the following publications:
GFK-0600, Series 90-70 PLC Data Sheets Manual; GFK-0262, Series 90-70 PLC Installation Manual;
GFK-0356, Series 90-30 PLC Installation Manual; GFK-0898, Series 90-30 I/O Specifications Manual;
GEK-90486-1, Genius I/O System User’s Manual; GEK-90486-2, Genius I/O Discrete and Analog Blocks User’s Manual;
GFK-0825, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - Genius Bus Interface Unit User’s Manual;
GFK-0826, Field Control Distributed I/O and Control System - I/O Module’s User’s Manual;
GFK-1179, InstallationRequirements for Conformance to Standards; GFK-1503, VersaMax System PLC Reference Manual;
GFK-1504, VersaMax System I/O and Option Modules; GFK-1535, VersaMax System Network Communications User’s Manual.
Selected modules may be derated.
Applies to GE Fanuc products designed and built in Charlottesville.
Modules comply with applicable CSA Standards as evaluated by UL. The C-UL mark is accepted throughout Canada.
Note 3:
Note 4:
Note 5:
Genius
is a registered trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
Series 90, VersaMax, and Field Control are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.
General Information
2-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
General Information
3
Part No: 44A724534-001
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet
GFK-0638A
May 1993
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet (Part No: 44A724534-001)
datasheet GFK-0638A
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET
Material Safety Data Sheet
U.S. Department of Labor
May be used to comply with
OSHA’s Hazard Communication Standard.
29 CFR 1910.1200. Standard must be
consulted for specific requirements.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(Non–Mandator y Form)
Form Approved
OMB No. 1218–0072
IDENTITY (As Used on Label and List)
Note: Blank spaces are not permitted. If any item is not applicable, or no information is available, the
space must be marked to indicate that.
Lithium Battery BR–2/3A
Section I
Manufacturer ’s Name
Emergency Telephone Number
Matsushita Micro Battery Ind. Co. Ltd.
Not Applicable
Address (Number, Street, City, State, and ZIP Code)
Telephone Number for Information
One Matsushita–cho Moriguchi, Osaka
201–348–7499
T. Kuwamura
Date Prepared
570 JAPAN
7–15–87
Signature of Preparer (optional)
Telephone # 06-991-1141 (Japan)
Section II – Hazardous Ingredients/Identity Information
Hazardous Components (Specific Chemical Identity: Common Name(s))
OSHA PEL
ACGIH TLV
Other Limits
Recommended
% (optional)
Lithium Metal = < 0.5 Grams Lithium
Weight of lithium per cell = 0.44g
(Approx. percent of total weight = 3.3 wt. %)
Section III – Physical/Chemical Characteristics
Boiling Point
N/A
Specific Gravity (H2O = 1)
Vapor Pressure (mm Hg.)
N/A
Melting Point
180 _C
N/A
Evaporation Rate (Butyl Acetate = 1)
N/A
Vapor Density (AIR = 1)
N/A
Solubility in Water
N/A
Section IV – Fire and Explosion Hazard Data
Appearance and Odor
Flash Point (Method Used)
Operating Temperature Range: –40_ to +85_ C/ –40_ to +185_F
Storage Temperature Range: –40 _ to +85_C/ –40_ to +185 _F
Flammable Limits
N/A
LEL
N/A
UEL
N/A
N/A
Extinguishing Media
Dry chemical or dry sand
Special Fire Fighting Procedures
N/A
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazards
Fire and explosion is present only when battery is abused.
THIS IS A REPRODUCTION OF THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PROVIDED BY THE BATTERY VENDOR.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
3-1
General Information
2
GFK-0638A
May 1993
Programmable Control Products:
Lithium Battery Material Safety Data Sheet
Section V – Reactivity Data
Stability
Unstable
Conditions to Avoid
N/A
Stable
Incompatibility (Materials to Avoid)
N/A
Hazardous Decomposition or Byproducts
N/A
Hazardous
Polymenzation
May Occur
Conditions to Avoid
N/A
Will Not Occur
Section VI – Health Hazard Data
Route(s) of Entry:
Inhalation?
Skin?
Ingestion?
Health Hazards (Acute and Chronic)
N/A
Carcinogenicity:
NTP?
IARC Monographs?
OSHA Regulated?
N/A
Signs and Symptoms of Exposure
N/A
Medical Conditions
Generally Aggravated by Exposure
N/A
Emergency and First Aid Procedure
Eyes/Skin: Wash out the eyes/skin with water promptly. Inhalation: Rest, expose person to fresh air, use oxygen
if available. Ingestion: Not toxic per tests with laboratory animals (rats). Note to Physician: Not toxic to the
body, however it is best to wash out the solution with water promptly in an emergency.
Section VII – Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
Steps to Be Taken in Case Material is Released or Spilled
If the battery is accidently broken and organic electrolyte (gama–butyrolactone and LiBF4 as a solute) leaks out, wipe
it up with a cloth, and dispose of it in a plastic bag and put into a steel can. No outgasses during normal operation
or at normal temperature because we use: Solvent: gama–butyrolactone, 204_C boiling point, not toxic.
Solute: LiBF4, neutral acid, not toxic.
Waste Disposal Method
It is recommended to discharge the battery to the end, to use up the metal lithium inside the battery, and to
bury the discharged battery in soil.
Precautions to Be Taken in Handling and Storing
Unusual Fire and Explosion Hazard: In the abnormal case, example: Charge to higher than 5 volts at high
amperage, the top may pop up.
Section VIII – Control Measures
Respiratory Protection (Specify Type)
N/A
Ventilation
Local Exhaust
Special
N/A
N/A
Mechanical (General)
Other
N/A
N/A
Protective Gloves
Eye Protection
N/A
N/A
Other Protective Clothing or Equipment
N/A
Work/Hygienic Practices
N/A
THIS IS A REPRODUCTION OF THE MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET PROVIDED BY THE BATTERY VENDOR.
3-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC Racks
Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount
4
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
GFK-0079K
November 1999
PLC Racks
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791 (Standard Racks - Front and Rear Mount)
datasheet GFK-0079K
CPU and I/O configurations. Each rack has provision
for one power supply at the leftmost module position;
and either nine additional slot locations (nine-slot
rack) or five additional slot locations (five-slot rack).
Features
H
H
Accepts all IC697 PLC module types
H
Front mount rack mounts in a standard 19I (480
mm) rack (fans normally not required)
H
H
Accepts plug-in AC or DC IC697 power supply
Rear mount racks mount in a 10I (254 mm) deep
enclosure (fans normally not required)
Overall rack dimensions are 11.15IH x 19IW x 7.5ID
(283mm x 483mm x 190mm) for the Nine-Slot Rack
and 11.15IH x 13IW x 7.5ID (283mm x 320mm x
190mm) for the Five-Slot Rack. Slots are 1.6I wide
except the power supply slot which is 2.4I wide.
Provision for two rack operation from single power supply
Two racks can be interconnected to share a single
power supply for applications having extendedI/O
requirements. A Power Supply Extension Cable kit
(IC697CBL700) is available for such applications.
NOTE: For Power Supply compatibility see page 5.
Functions
Each rack provides slot sensing for rack-type I/O modules designed for the IC697 PLC. No jumpers or DIP
switches on the I/O modules are required for module
addressing.
The Standard Nine-Slot Racks and the Five-Slot Rack
for the IC697 programmable controller are used for all
a44732
ÎÎ
01
9
8
4
2
SLOT
1
SLOT
2
SLOT
SLOT
3
1
4
SLOT
5
SLOT
6
SLOT
7
SLOT
8
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
4-1
PLC Racks
2
GFK-0079K
November 1999
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
Rack Outline Drawings
a42139
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
WITH OPTIONAL VME J2
BACKPLANE KIT
1.00
(25.4)
* * 6.00
(152.4)
9.14
(232)
7.25
(184)
CONNECTOR
FOR
POWER
SUPPLY
SPACER
(QTY.4)
SIDE VIEW
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÏÏÎÎ
CABLE
ENTRANCE
FROM
BOTTOM
I/O TERMINAL
RESTRAINING
STRAP
.75
(19)
6.75
(172)
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
18.11 11.71
(460) (297)
17.04 10.64
(433) (264)
*
REMOVABLE
I/O
TERMINAL
BLOCK
19.00 12.60
(483) (320)
.45
(11)
GROUND
STUD
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
POWER
SUPPLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
*
9
GROUND
STUD
11.50
(292)
11.15
(283)
.25 DIA.
(TYPICAL)
2.24
(57)
HINGED
DOOR
FRONT VIEW
* ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
* * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
* * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE ).
= DIMENSIONS FOR 5 SLOT RACK
Figure 1. Outline Drawing for Standard Rear (Panel) Mount Rack
a45171
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
WITH OPTIONAL VME J2
BACKPLANE KIT
1.00
(25.4)
9.14
* * 6.00
(152.4)
(232)
7.25
(184)
REMOVABLE
I/O
TERMINAL
BLOCK
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÏÏÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÏÏ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÏÏÎÎ
CONNECTOR
FOR
POWER
SUPPLY
SPACER
(QTY.4)
SIDE VIEW
I/O TERMINAL
RESTRAINING
STRAP
CABLE
ENTRANCE
FROM
BOTTOM
HINGED
DOOR
.45
(11)
*
1.48
(38)
11.50
(292)
7.50
(191)
2.25
(57)
3.00
(76)
2.25
(57)
1.48
(38)
19.00 12.60
(483) (320)
18.34 11.94
(466) (303)
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
17.04 10.64
(433) (270)
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
GND
STUD
*
GND
STUD
11.15
(283)
.265 x .437
(TYPICAL)
FRONT VIEW
.33 (8.38)
* ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
* * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
* * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
= DIMENSIONS FOR 5 SLOT RACK
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE).
Figure 2. Outline Drawing for Standard Front (Rack) Mount Rack
4-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
3
GFK-0079K
November 1999
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
Rack Mounting
The rack must be mounted in the orientation as
shown in Figures 1 and 2. Sufficient space must be
left around the rack as shown to allow air flow for
module cooling. The mounting requirements (either
front or rear mount) must be determined according to
the application and the proper rack ordered. Mounting flanges are an integral part of rack side panels and
are installed at the factory.
A Rack Fan Assembly is available for mounting on the
Nine-Slot Racks when required for installations where
heat buildup could be a problem. The Rack Fan Assembly is available in three versions:
H
H
H
IC697ACC721 for 120 VAC power source
IC697ACC724 for 240 VAC power source
IC697ACC744 for 24 VDC power source
Refer to GFK-0637C, or later for detailed information
about the Rack Fan Assembly.
I/O Connector
These racks accommodate rack-type IC697 high-density I/O modules, which use a detachable field wiring
terminal board. Each I/O module will accept up to
forty AWG #14 (2.10mm2) wires. The wire bundle is
routed out the bottom of the terminal board cavity
where a cleat is provided for a tie wrap to secure the
bundle to the terminal board housing.
Mechanical Keying
IC697 I/O modules are mechanically interlocked by
means of a key to prevent inadvertent interchange of
one module type for another (for example, AC type
for DC type). A key unique to each module type is
included with the module.
When the module is inserted into the rack, the key
automatically latches onto the center rail of the rack,
where it remains when the module is extracted. Only
the correct module type can then be inserted into that
rack slot.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Note
The power supply slot is unique - only the
power supply can be installed in the leftmost rack position.
Power Supply Extension Cable
For many applications, one power supply can provide
the power requirements of two racks. Such dual-rack
operation from a single power supply can be implemented if only 5 volt power of 5.2 amperes or less is
required in the second rack.
A 3-foot (1 meter) Power Supply Extension Cable is
available (see the Ordering Information on the last
page of this data sheet) which provides the necessary
interconnection. In addition to +5 volt power, the
extension cable includes power sequencing signals
necessary for proper system operation.
The Power Supply Extension cable attaches to a 9-pin
D type connector located on the backplane. Access to
the connector is via a hole in the left side of the rack as
shown in the outline drawing. Adequate clearance
(approximately 6 inches 152.4mm) ) must be provided
on the left side of the rack for access to the connector.
The Power Supply Extension cable must be secured
before power is applied. It must not be disconnected
during system operation.
Slot Addressing
The IC697 PLC system allows user configuration of
I/O point references for modules in a rack without the
need for board address DIP switches or jumpers. The
address structure is described in the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual. Configuration
is done with the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming software configurator function. For more information on configuration, see the applicable Programming Software User’s Manual.
Rack Number
Multiple racks in a system must be assigned a rack
number from 0 to 7; the CPU rack is always Rack 0.
The PLC determines the number of each rack in the
system from four binary-encoded jumpers on the
rack’s backplane. These jumpers are located on the
backplane directly behind the power supply, which
must be removed to gain access to the jumpers.
4-3
PLC Racks
4
GFK-0079K
November 1999
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
To set the rack number, move the jumpers correSystem Noise Immunity
sponding to 1, 2, 4, and 8 bits to either the 0 or 1 position. The sum of the digits in the 1 position equals the
Three easy steps must be taken to properly ground
desired rack number. For example, rack number 2
the IC697 programmable controller system to reduce
would have the 1, 4 and 8 bit jumpers in the 0 position
the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
and the 2 bit jumper in the 1 position as shown below.
1. Make sure that the power supply mounting
screws, especially the bottom two, are properly
secured.
a42823
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
2. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of
the rack using AWG #12 (3.33 mm2) wire. Use of a
ring terminal and star washer is recommended.
01
3. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
to a good earth ground.
8
4
RACK NUMBER =2
2
1
Module Retention
IC697 I/O modules have molded latches that automatically snap onto the upper and lower rails of the rack
when the module is fully inserted. Optionally, M2.5x8
screws may be used to secure the modules to the rack
for high vibration applications.
Figure 3. Rack Number Jumpers
Warning
Safety Ground
The ground lug on either side of the rack must be connected to earth ground with not less than an AWG
#12 (3.33mm2) wire. The ground lugs are #8-32.
Warning
If the ground lug is not connected to earth
ground, the rack is not grounded. The
rack must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard which may result in
severe personal injury.
Shield Ground
The bottom rail of the rack is used for module shield
grounding. Some IC697 I/O modules have a ground
clip that contacts the conductive bottom rail when the
module is fully inserted. Shield connections in the
user connectors are routed to this ground clip via conductors on the module.
4-4
Do not remove (or insert) modules when
either the programmable controller power
supply or any externally-connected power
sources are on. Hazardous voltages may
exist. Personal injury, damage to the module or improper operation of the device or
process being controlled may result.
To remove an IC697 module, first remove the field
half of the terminal board (if it is an I/O module), then
grasp the top and bottom of the module to depress
the latch releases while pulling the module out. For
more detailed information on removing I/O terminal
boards, refer to the applicable Programmable Controller
User’s manual or individual data sheets for I/O modules.
If M2.5x8 screws have been used to secure modules to
the rack, remove the screws before removing the
modules.
A blank faceplate is available to cover unused slots in
the rack. See the Ordering Information on page 5.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
5
GFK-0079K
November 1999
Five Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS750
Nine Slot, Rear Mount - IC697CHS790
Nine Slot, Front Mount - IC697CHS791
Table 1. Specifications for Standard Racks, IC697CHS750/790/791 [
Number of Slots
5 or 9, plus power supply slot
Maximum 5 Volt Current
20 amps (100 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
11 amps (55 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
18 amps (90 watt 24 VDC power supply)
18 amps (90 watt 48 VDC power supply)
Current Required from I/O Bus
0.5 amps
I/O References
User configurable without the use of module jumpers or DIP switches.
Rack Identification
Four jumpers behind rack power supply
Dimensions
Nine Slot Rack
Height
11.15”
283mm
Five Slot Rack
VME
Width
19.00”
483mm
Depth
7.5”
190mm
11.15”
12.6”
7.5”
283mm
320mm
190mm
All modules for the IC697 I/O system extend 1.7” (43mm) beyond the front of the rack.
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Rack , Five-Slot, rear mount
IC697CHS750
Rack, Nine-Slot, rear mount
IC697CHS790
Rack , Nine-Slot, front mount
IC697CHS791
Power Supply Cable Kit (includes cable and faceplate for vacant power supply slot)
IC697CBL700
Blank Faceplate Slot Filler (quantity 6)
IC697ACC720
Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC (optional)
IC697ACC721
Rack FanAssembly, 240 VAC (optional)
IC697ACC724
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC (optional)
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, Low Temperature Testing option, or Severe Vibration option please consult the factory for
price and availability. Racks for use in Severe Vibration environments include heavy duty side mount plates.
Power Supply Compatibility With Rack Versions
The IC697 standalonepowersupplies can only be mounted on the IC697 racks having the catalog numbers listed
below.
H
IC697CHS790D (Nine-Slot, rear mount) and IC697CHS750C (Five-Slot, rear mount)
The catalog numbers for the standalone power supplies affected by this restriction are:
H
H
H
H
IC697PWR721 (24 VDC, 90W Power Supply with Power Supply Adapter)
IC697PWR722 (24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module)
IC697PWR731 (125 VDC, 60W Power Supply with Power Supply Adapter)
IC697PWR732 (125 VDC, 60W Power Supply Module)
All plug-in IC697 power supplies can be installed in any version of the IC697 racks.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
4-5
1
PLC Racks
IC697CHS782/783
5
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount (IC697CHS782/783)
datasheet GFK-0684G
Features
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Functions
Accepts 3rd Party VME modules which require 0.8”
spacing.
Accepts all IC697 PLC module types.
Rear mount rack mounts in a 10” (254 mm) deep
enclosure.
Front mount rack mounts in a standard 19” (483
mm) rack.
Accepts plug-in AC/DC and DC IC697 power supplies, or can use external supply (Power Supply
Adaptor module required).
Provision for two rack operation from single power supply.
Provision for power supply for high-current configurations.
Optional accessory kit available for adding J2 backplane or making ribbon cable connections to J2
backplanes.
Optional fan assembly (for high-power modules).
The VME Integrator Rack for the IC697 Programmable Logic Controller can be used for 3rd party
VME modules and all IC697 CPU and I/O configurations, except redundancy applications. This rack has a
17-slot backplane and is designed to provide easy
integration of 3rd party VME modules into an IC697
PLC system. Integration of 3rd Party VME modules
must be in accordance with guidelines which are described in the User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party
VME Modules.
Backplane connectors are spaced on 0.8 inch centers
to accommodate 3rd party VME modules. IC697
modules each use two of these slots. Standard IC697
racks have slots spaced on 1.6 inch centers for IC697 modules. VME modules that require 0.8 inch spacing for
installation in a rack may not fit in the standard IC697
racks(IC697CHS750/790/791).
a44958
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
01
0V
1
2
3
4
8
4
2
5
6
7
8
9
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
1
-12V
ÎÎ
+5V
+12V
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
5-1
PLC Racks
2
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
Each rack configuration will accept one power supply
in the leftmost module position, and either:
positions. The exact jumper configuration depends on
the requirements of each 3rd Party VME module.
1. seventeen (17) 3rd Party VME modules (with no
IC697 modules installed),
Two racks can be interconnected to share a single power
supply for applications having extended I/O requirements. A Power Supply Extension Cable kit
(IC697CBL700) is available for such applications. There
are also four power cube screw connections (+ 5V, +12V,
-12V, 0V) on the backplane. These connections are not
intended for direct connection to a 3rd Party power supply.
Each rack provides slot sensing for rack-type I/O modules. No jumpers or DIP switches on the I/O modules
are required for addressing of these modules. Overall
rack dimensions are 11.15” H x 19” W x 7.25” D
(283mm x 483mm x 184mm). Slots are 0.8” wide except the power supply slot which is 2.4” wide. The following figures show mounting dimensions for the rear
mount (Figure 1) and the front mount (Figure 2) racks.
2. nine (9) IC697 modules, or
3. a combination of IC697 and 3rd Party VME modules.
The power supply capacity may limit the number of
modules in a rack. No more than three VME modules can
be used in a rack with IC697 modules.
The flexibility of these racks to allow both 3rd party
VME and IC697 modules is accomplished through the
use of jumpers on the backplane to configure slots. The
VME Integrator rack is factory configured to accept
standard IC697 modules. Integration of 3rd party VME
modules is done by moving these jumpers to different
a44989
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
WITH OPTIONAL VME
J2 BACKPLANE KIT
1.00
(25.4)
9.14
(232)
7.25
(184)
6.00
**(152.4)
19.00
(483)
.45
(11)
18.11
(460)
* .75
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
6.00
***(152.4)
17.04
(433)
(19)
6.75
(172)
CONNECTOR
FOR
POWER
SUPPLY
GROUND
STUD
3.00
(76)
SPACER
(QTY.4)
Î
1.50
(38)
2.24
(57)
SIDE VIEW
IC697 MODULES
EXTEND 1.7 IN. (43MM)
BEYOND FRONT OF RACK,
VME MODULES MAY FIT FLUSH
WITH FRONT OF RACK.
*
**
***
.25 DIA.
(TYPICAL)
11.15
(283)
Î
GROUND
STUD
.34 (8.64)
Î
Î
*
FRONT VIEW
ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE.
6.00
***(152.4)
Figure 1. VME Integrator Rack Dimensions for Rack (Rear) Mount
Rack Mounting
The rack must be mounted in the orientation shown
above. Sufficient space must be left around the rack
as shown in Figure 1 to allow air flow for module
cooling. A Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721 or
IC697ACC724) is available for installations requiring
forced air cooling (see data sheet GFK-0637 for de5-2
tailed information on the fan assembly). The mounting requirements (either front or rear mount) must be
determined according to the application and the
proper rack ordered. Mounting flanges are an integral part of rack side panels and are installed at the
factory.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
3
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
These racks accommodate two module types. First,
rack-type IC697 high-density I/O modules, which use
a detachable field wiring terminal board. Each I/O
module will accept up to forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 )
wires. The wire bundle is routed out the bottom of
the terminal board cavity where a cleat is provided for
a tie wrap to secure the bundle to the terminal board
housing. The second type of modules are VME modules which may have varying methods of connecting
to field devices.
a45219
WITH OPTIONAL VME
J2 BACKPLANE KIT
DIMENSIONS IN INCHES, MILLIMETERS ARE IN PARENTHESIS
1.00
(25.4)
* * 6.00
(152.4)
9.14
(232)
7.25
(184)
19.00
(483)
.45
(11)
18.34
(466)
*
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
17.04
(433)
*
1.48
(38)
2.25
(57)
CONNECTOR
FOR
POWER
SUPPLY
GROUND
STUD
7.50
(191)
11.15
(283)
3.00
(76)
2.25
(57)
SPACER
(QTY.4)
GROUND
STUD
.265 x .437
(TYPICAL)
1.48
(38)
SIDE VIEW
FRONT VIEW
.33 (8.38)
IC697 MODULES
EXTEND 1.7 IN. (43MM)
BEYOND FRONT OF RACK,
VME MODULES MAY FIT FLUSH
WITH FRONT OF RACK.
* ALLOW SUFFICIENT HORIZONTAL CLEARANCE FOR ACCESS TO GROUND STUDS
AT EACH END OF THE RACK.
* * IF THE EXTENSION CABLE IS USED, ALLOW APPROXIMATELY 6 INCH HORIZONTAL
CLEARANCE ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE RACK FOR ACCESS TO THE CONNECTOR.
* * * 6.00
(152.4)
* * * ALLOWANCE FOR COOLING (IF REQUIRED FOR ADDITIONAL COOLING, RACK FAN
ASSEMBLY (IC697ACC721 OR IC697ACC724) IS AVAILABLE.
Figure 2. VME Integrator Rack Dimensions for Panel (Front) Mount
Configuring the VME Integrator Rack
A series of jumper positions are located on the backplane near each slot. These jumpers provide for flexibility in the types of modules to be installed, either
VME modules in single slots (0.8 inch spacing between centers) or IC697 modules, which require two
slots (1.6 inch spacing between centers). IC697 module slots are indicated by a number and an arrow: also
these slots are marked 1A through 9A.
Table 1 on page 5 shows the relationship of the slot
numbers to the jumper numbers. The functions and
signals which are configurable by these jumpers are:
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
H
select a rack ID for multiple rack systems (IC697
feature).
H
configure SYSFAIL signal to be enabled or disabled
(per slot).
H
configure LWORD signal in slot 1 to be inactive.
H
configure IRQ1/ - IRQ4/ signals for VME slots 12PL
to 19PL.
H
configure Bus Grant signals for VME slots 12PL to
19PL.
5-3
PLC Racks
4
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
The following figure is an example of the location of these jumpers on the backplane. The jumpers shown are
referenced in the text following the figure.
a44988
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
1
2
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
0V
8
JP43
JP38
JP57
JP56
4
2
JP44
1
–12V
SP1
JP5
JP40
JP39
JP42
JP8
JP41
+12V
1A
1PL
1B
12PL
2PL
Figure 3. Example of Jumper Locations on Backplane
5-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
5
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
Default Jumper Configurations
The following table describes the jumper configuration for each of the configurable VME rack signals. The default
configuration for each of these signals is shown following the table. Table 2 on the next page lists all of the jumpers
and their associated slots.
Table 1. Jumper Descriptions
Signal Name or Function
See
ApplicableJumpers
Description
Rack ID Select
-
JP1 to JP4
Selects rack ID number 0 -7, see text for settings
(default rack ID = 0)
SYSFAIL/
A
See Table 1 for jumper numbers.
Enabled or disabled for each slot (default = enabled).
LWORD/
B
JP44
Slot 1 only, set to active or inactive (default=inactive).
IRQ1/toIRQ4/(Interrupt lines)
C
See Table 1 for jumper numbers
Select for IC697 module slots 1PL to 9PL. If VME module in slot uses
these signals, install jumpers (default = no jumpers).
Bus Grant 0 - 3/ and IACK/
D
See Table 1 for jumper numbers
If VME modules are installed that pass daisy chain signals, jumpers
must be removed in VME slots 12PL to 19P (default = jumpers).
A configuration selection consists of a jumper plug which is placed over two adjacent pins. In some cases (such as LWORD jumper),
this pin is placed over 2 of 3 in-line pins; other selections require the jumper plugs to be present or not be present. Factory default
jumper positions are shown below with shaded areas representing a jumper that is present. The configuration example shown below is
for slot 12PL. The physical arrangement for the other connectors is the same, only the jumper numbers (JPxx) are different.
Sysfail/ (See Table 1 for
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
1
2
3
LWORD/ (JP44)
jumper numbers
for all slots.)
o  enabled
o  
disabled
o
ÉÉ
É
ÉÉÉ
o o o
A
B
inactive
active
Bus Grant 0-3 (See Table 1 for jumper numbers
for slots 12PL to 19PL.)
and IACK
IRQ1/ to IRQ4/ (See Table 1 for jumper
numbers for slots
1PL to 9PL.)
JP5
IRQ4/
o o
IRQ3/
o o
IRQ2/
o o
IRQ1/
o o
BG0/
NOTE
BG jumpers are
to the right of the
12PL connector;
IACK jumper is
to the left of the
12PL connector.
JP8
C
t
o 1
JP60
If VME modules
are installed in a
slot and the Bus
o 1
JP59 Grant and IACK
o 2
signals must be
passed - remove
o 1
these jumpers. If
JP58 signals are not
o 2
needed, leave
jumpers in place.
o 1
o 2
A jumper plug, when
installed, allows IRQ1/ IRQ4/ to be active. If
a VME module in a
slot uses these signals
install jumpers; otherwise
remove the jumpers.
(default is no jumpers).
* shaded boxes represent default positions
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
D
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
o 1
IACK/
o 2
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
BG1/
BG2/
BG3/
JP62
o 2
o 1
JP57
o 2
JP61
(This jumper is for
Sysfail which is
described above.)
5-5
PLC Racks
6
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
The following table is a list of the slots and jumpers
associated with each slot. Multiple jumpers listed in a
column under a signal are shown in the same numer-
ical order as they appear on the backplane (that is, left
to right or top to bottom).
Table 2. Jumper Location and Function
Bus Grant 0→3
Jumpers
IACK
Jumper
Sysfail
Jumper
1VME-12PL(1B)
JP60,59,58,62
JP57
JP61
-
2VME-13PL(2B)
JP53,54,55,51
JP56
JP52
-
3VME-14PL(3B)
JP66,65,64,68
JP63
JP67
-
4VME-15PL(4B)
JP72,71,70,74
JP69
JP73
-
5VME-16PL(5B)
JP78,77,76,80
JP75
JP79
-
6VME-17PL(6B)
JP84,83,82,86
JP81
JP85
-
7VME-18PL(7B)
JP90,89,88,92
JP87
JP91
-
8VME-19PL(8B)
JP96,95,94,98
JP93
JP97
-
SlotNumber
IRQ1/ to IRQ4/
Jumper
1GEF-1PL(1A)
-
-
JP43
JP39,40,41,42
2GEF-2PL(2A)
-
-
JP38
JP8,7,6,5
3GEF-3PL(3A)
-
-
JP99
JP12,11,10,9
4GEF-4PL(4A)
-
-
JP45
JP16,15,14,13
5GEF-5PL(5A)
-
-
JP46
JP20,19,18,17
6GEF-6PL(6A)
-
-
JP47
JP24,23,22,21
7GEF-7PL(7A)
-
-
JP48
JP28,27,26,25
8GEF-8PL(8A)
-
-
JP49
JP32,31,30,29
9GEF-9PL(9A)
-
-
JP50
JP36,35,34,33
Standard Configuration Jumper Positions
There are three basic configurations of modules that
can be accommodated by the VME Integrator rack: (1)
Standard (IC697 modules only), (2) IC697 controller
and IC697 modules and/or 3rd party VME modules,
or (3) 3rd party VME modules only. Refer to Table 2
for jumper numbers and their functions.
(1) Standard Configuration
This configuration consists of an IC697 CPU or Bus
Receiver in slot 1PL and IC697 modules in the remaining applicable slots (2PL to 9PL).
Note
Do not install IC697 modules in VME slots
12PL to 19PL.
5-6
Refer to Figure 2 which is an example of jumper positions and numbers per slot.
H
H
H
H
JP1 through JP4 (rack ID jumpers) jumpered to the
proper position for Rack ID, where applicable.
JP43 remains in its default position (as shipped
from factory). This allows the SYSFAIL signal to be
activated by the IC697 CPU.
JP44 remains in its default position. This jumpers
the LWORD signal in slot 1 to be inactive allowing
only 16-bit wide data transfers.
All other jumpers remain in their factory set default positions.
(2) IC697/VME Configuration
This configuration consists of an IC697 CPU or Bus Receiver module in slot 1P and a combination of IC697
modules and 3rd party VME modules in the remaining
slots. IC697 modules can be placed in slots 2PL to 9PL
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
7
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
only. 3rd party VME modules can use the VME slots
12PL to 19PL and slots 2PL to 9PL. Note that all slots
have a jumper that allows you to disable the SYFAIL/
signal to that slot by removing the appropriate jumper.
VME Jumper Positions
H
To configure slot 1 for a 3rd party controller, five
jumpers must be moved. There are four jumpers
behind the power supply (JP1 to JP4) that must be
moved to positions JP39 to JP42 and jumper JP44
must be moved from its default position to the
right.
H
If VME modules are installed in the IC697 module
slots (2PL to 9PL) and they use the IRQ1/ - IRQ4/
signals, then you must install four jumpers in the
positions that are located to the immediate left of
the IC697 module slots in use.
H
If the VME modules are installed in VME slots
(12PL to 19PL), and the board passes the Bus
Grant and IACK signals, you must remove five
jumpers for each slot being used. Leave these jumpers in if the board does not pass the Bus Grant and IACK
daisy chain signals. These jumpers are the top four
to the immediate right of the slot being used and
the lower (of two jumpers) to the immediate left of
the slot being used.
Note
Integration of 3rd Party modules must be
in accordance with guidelines described in
the User’s Guide to Integration of 3rd Party
VME Modules.
IC697/VME Jumper Positions
H
JP 1 through JP4 (rack ID jumpers) jumpered to
the proper position for Rack ID.
H
JP43 remains in its default position (as shipped
from factory). This allows the SYSFAIL signal to be
activated by the IC697 CPU (SYSFAIL required by
IC697 I/O modules).
H
JP44 remains in its default position. This jumpers
the LWORD signal in slot 1 to inactive (for IC697
modules) allowing only 16-bit wide data transfers.
H
VME modules can be installed in either the IC697
module slots (2PL to 9PL) or in the VME slots
(12PL to 19PL).
H
If VME modules are installed in the IC697 module
slots (2PL to 9PL) that use the signals IRQ1/ IRQ4/, then you must install up to four jumpers,
as appropriate, in positions that are located to the
immediate left of the IC697 slots in use.
H
If the VME modules are installed in VME slots
(12PL to 19PL), and the board passes the Bus
Grant and IACK signals, you must remove five
jumpers for each slot being used. Leave these jumpers in if the board does not pass the Bus Grant and IACK
daisy chain signals. These jumpers are the top four
to the immediate right of the slot being used and
the lower (of two jumpers) to the immediate left of
the slot being used.
GFK-0684G
November 1999
Power Supply Extension Cable
For many applications, one power supply is sufficient
for the power requirements of two racks. This tworack operation from a single power supply can be
implemented if only +5 volt power (±12 volts not
supplied through Power Supply Extension cable) of
5.2 amperes or less is required in the second rack.
A 3-foot Power Supply Extension cable is available
(see Ordering Information on the last page of this
data sheet) which provides the necessary interconnection. In addition to + 5 volt power, the extension
cable includes power sequencing signals necessary for
proper system operation.
(3) VME Configuration
The Power Supply Extension cable attaches to a 9-pin
D type connector located on the backplane. Access to
the connector is through a hole in the left side of the
rack as shown in the outline drawing (Figures 1 and
2). Adequate clearance (approximately 6 inches)
must be provided on the left side of the rack for access to the connector.
This configuration consists of a 3rd party Controller in
slot 1PL and 3rd party VME modules in the remaining slots (2PL to 9PL and 12PL to 19PL). Note that
each slot has a jumper that allows the SYSFAIL/signal
to be disabled to that slot since all VME modules may
not require access to that signal.
This connector can also be used to provide power to a
user installed 3rd party J2 backplane. An option kit
(IC697ACC715) is available for installing a J2 backplane or making ribbon cable connections. Maximum
power that can be supplied to the J2 backplane is 5
VDC at 5.2 amps.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
5-7
PLC Racks
8
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
The Power Supply Extension cable must be secured
before power is applied. It must not be disconnected
during system operation.
Slot Addressing
The IC697 PLC system allows user configuration of
I/O point references for modules in a rack without the
need for board address DIP switches or jumpers. The
address structure is described below. Configuration is
done with the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software configurator function. For more information on configuration, see the Programming Software
User’s Manual.
Note
In order to configure slots 12PL to 19PL,
you must have release 4.01 or later of MSDOS programming software.
These jumpers are located on the backplane directly
behind the power supply, which must be removed to
gain access to the jumpers.
To set the rack number, move the jumpers corresponding to 1, 2, 4, and 8 bits to either the 0 or 1 position. The sum of the digits in the 1 position equals the
desired rack number. For example, rack number 5
would have the 1 and 4 bit jumpers in the 1 position
and the 2 and 8 bit jumpers in the 0 position.
Shield Ground
The bottom rail of the rack is used for module shield
grounding. Some IC697 I/O modules have a ground
clip that contacts the conductive bottom rail when the
module is fully inserted. Shield connections in the
user connectors are routed to this ground clip through
conductors on the module.
Safety Ground
The ground lug on either side of the rack must be connected to earth ground with not less than an AWG
#12 (3.33 mm2) wire. The ground lugs are #8-32.
Rack Number
Multiple racks in a system must be assigned a rack
number from 0 to 7; the CPU rack is always Rack 0.
The PLC determines the number of each rack in the
system from four binary-encoded configurable jumpers on the rack’s backplane.
Warning
If the ground lug is not connected to earth
ground, the rack is not grounded. The
rack must be grounded to minimize electrical shock hazard which may result in
severe personal injury.
a42823
System Noise Immunity
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
01
Three easy steps must be taken to properly ground
the IC697 PLC system to reduce the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
8
4
RACK NUMBER = 2
2
1
Figure 4. Rack Number Jumpers
1. Make sure that the power supply mounting
screws, especially the bottom two, are properly
secured.
2. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of
the rack using AWG #12 (3.33 mm2) wire. Use of a
ring terminal and star washer is recommended.
3. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
to a good earth ground.
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
5-8
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
9
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
GFK-0684G
November 1999
Module Retention
Rack Fan Assembly
IC697 I/O modules have molded latches that automatically snap onto the upper and lower rails of the rack
when the module is fully inserted. 3rd party VME
modules do not have these latches. Optionally, M2.5x8
screws may be used to secure the modules to the rack
for high vibration applications.
An optional Rack Fan Assembly is available in three versions for installation on the bottom of the rack for additional cooling if forced air cooling is required when a
number of high-power VME modules are installed in
the rack and heat build-up could be a problem. The
Rack Fan Assemblies are:
H IC697ACC721 for 120 VAC power source
H IC697ACC724 for 240 VAC power source
H IC697ACC744 for 24 VDC power source
The fans have a low noise level and are assembled using ball bearings for extended life.
It is recommended that the fans be wired to the same
source of power as the IC697 PLC. This will ensure that
the fans are running when the PLC is active.
AC Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721/724): The three
fans are wired in parallel using a cable assembly (supplied
with the fan assembly) that plugs into the three fan wiring
connectors. When the cable assembly is installed, the fan
on the left (looking at front of rack) will have a three foot
lead with stripped ends for connecting to the applicable
120 or 240 VAC power source.
24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC744): The three
fans each have a pair of 12” (310 mm), 24 AWG leads.
Connect these leads in parallel, with all Red leads
connected to +24 VDC, and all Black leads connected to
24 VDC Common. Use wire ties to fasten leads down.
The following illustration shows the position of the fan
assembly mounted on a rack. Note that it is mounted
on the bottom of the rack with air flow from the bottom
towards the top of the rack. For detailed specifications
and installation instructions, refer to GFK-0637, which is
the data sheet for the Rack Fan Assembly.
To remove an IC697 module, first remove the field half
of the terminal board (if it is an I/O module), then grasp
the top and bottom of the module to depress the latch
releases while pulling the module out. For more detailed information on removing I/O terminal boards,
refer to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual or individual data sheets for I/O modules.
Warning
Do not remove (or insert) modules when either
the IC697 power supply or any externally-connected power sources are on. Hazardous voltages
may exist. Personal injury, damage to the module
or unpredictable operation of the device or process being controlled may result.
If M2.5x8 screws have been used to secure modules to
the rack, remove the screws before removing the modules. A blank faceplate is available to cover two consecutive unused slots in the rack.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
5-9
PLC Racks
10
GFK-0684G
November 1999
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
a45460
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 5. Typical Fan Assembly Mounted on VME Integrator Rack (AC Type Fan Assembly Shown)
Table 3. VME Integrator Rack Specifications [
Numberof Slots:
17 on 0.8” centers plus power supply slot
Maximum 5 Volt Current (from standard IC697
powersupplies):
20 amps (100 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
11 amps (55 watt 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC power supply)
18 amps (90 watt 24 VDC power supply)
18 amps (90 watt 48 VDC power supply)
Maximumcurrent (user supplied (not IC697) Power
Supply, slot J1 only)
3.3 amps (+ 5 VDC)
1.1 amps (± 12 VDC)
I/O References:
User configurable with IC641 programming software configurator software
RackIdentification:
Four jumpers (JP1 - JP4) behind rack power supply
VME/IC697SlotConfiguration:
Configure jumpers on backplane (refer to text)
Dimensions:
Height
VME
Width
Depth
(Note that all IC697
11.15”
19.00”
7.5”
modules extend 1.7” (43 mm)
283mm
483mm
190mm
beyond front of rack.)
System designed to support VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
5-10
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
11
VME Integrator Racks, 17 Slot Front and Rear Mount
GFK-0684G
November 1999
Table 4. Ordering Information
Description
CatalogNumber
VME Integrator Rack - 17 slots, rear mount
IC697CHS782
VME Integrator Rack - 17 slots, front mount
IC697CHS783
Power Supply Cable Kit (includes cable and faceplate for empty power supply slot)
IC697CBL700
Option Kit for J2 backplane installation (backplane not included)
IC697ACC715
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 120 VAC
IC697ACC721
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 240 VAC
IC697ACC724
Rack Fan Assembly (optional), 24 VDC
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
5-11
1
PLC Racks
IC697ACC721/724/744
6
Rack Fan Assembly
GFK-0637E
October 1999
Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC721/724/744)
datasheet GFK-0637E
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
Provides additional rack cooling
Three fans per assembly
Easy installation
120 VAC, 240 VAC, or 24 VDC models
Used with IC697 standard nine-slot racks and
17-slot VME Integrator racks.
Includes optional mounting brackets for earlier
versions of IC697 racks
Functions
The Rack Fan Assembly is an easily installed accessory
for use with IC697 standard nine-slot racks and VME
Integrator 17-slot racks. The fan assembly consists of
three fans. This fan assembly provides additional rack
cooling for installations where heat buildup could be a
problem. The fans have a low noise level and use ball
bearings for extended life.
It is recommended that the fans be wired to the same
source of power as the IC697 PLC. This will ensure that
the fans are running when the PLC is active.
AC Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721/724): The three
fans are wired in parallel using a cable assembly (supplied
with the fan assembly) that plugs into the three fan wiring
connectors (see Figure 1). When the cable assembly is
installed, the fan on the left (looking at front of rack) will
have a three foot lead with stripped ends for connecting
to the applicable 120 or 240 VAC power source.
24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly (IC697ACC744): The three
fans each have a pair of 12” (310 mm), 24 AWG leads (see
Figure 6). Connect these leads in parallel, with all Red
leads connected to +24 VDC, and all Black leads
connected to 24 VDC Common. Use wire ties to fasten
leads down.
The rack fan assembly comes as a kit which includes a
fan assembly, eight screws and two optional mounting
brackets. The two optional mounting brackets are
required when mounting the fan assembly on earlier
versions of racks. New rack assemblies can be identified
by metal grilles on top and bottom of the rack. Earlier
versionsof IC697 racks do not have metal grilles.
Rack and Fan Assembly Compatibility
The current version of the Rack Fan Assembly
(IC697ACC721B, 724B, and 744) is compatible with
IC697 racks having the following catalog numbers:
D IC697CHS782A or later versions
D IC697CHS783A or later versions
D IC697CHS790D or later versions
D IC697CHS791D or later versions
Note
This version of the Rack Fan Assembly is compatible with
racks built to conform to shock and high vibration specifications. These high vibration racks have an SV suffix added to the existing rack suffix.
For example,
IC697CHS790ESV denotes that the rack is a high vibration
rack. All rack mounting dimensions and instructions in
this data sheet also apply to high vibration racks.
The previous version of the fan assembly
(IC697ACC721A and 724A) is compatible with the
following IC697 racks.
D
D
D
D
IC697CHS782A, B only
IC697CHS783A, B only
IC697CHS790D only
IC697CHS791D only
Wiring Connector (3)
a45456A
Figure 1. AC Rack Fan Assemblies IC697ACC721/724
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
6-1
PLC Racks
2
GFK-0637E
October 1999
Rack Fan Assembly
The following illustration shows the position of the fan
assembly when it is mounted on a rack. Note that it is
mounted on the bottom of the rack with air flow from
the bottom towards the top of the rack.
a45457
LOGICPOWER
TPK.A.42979
4–17–89
POWER
SUPPLY
OK
RUN
ENABLED
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
OK
PGMR ACTIVE
BUS ACTIVE
BUS
TRANSMITTER
OK
USER 1
USER 2
PROGRAMMABLE
COPROCESOOR
OK
CH 1 OK
BUS CONTROLLER
1 CHANNEL
INPUT
120VAC
INPUT
120VAC
INPUT
120VAC
OUTPUT
120VAC, 05A
OUTPUT
120VAC, 05A
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Figure 2. Typical Fan Assembly Mounting (AC Type Fan Assembly Shown)
Installing the Fan Assembly
To install the fan assembly, use the following
instructions (refer to Figure 3). Installation of the fan
assembly is easy; the only tool you need to attach the fan
assembly to the rack is a #2 Phillips screwdriver.
a45458
7.25
2.82
2.70
1.45
2.09
Figure 3. Fan Assembly Dimensions for Mounting
6-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
Rack Fan Assembly
3
GFK-0637E
October 1999
Mounting Fan Assembly on Racks
Mounting Fan Assembly on Earlier Versions of
Racks (with Optional Bracket)
1. Position the fan assembly on the bottom of the
rack and slide the flange on the rear of the fan
assembly (flange without slots) under the lip of the
rear rail on the rack.
1. Slide the flange on the two optional brackets
under the lip of the front and rear rails on the rack.
The bracket tabs must face towards the rack side
plates. Slide the brackets out towards the rack side
plates.
2. Secure the brackets by aligning the two bracket
holes with the two edge slots in each side plate.
3. Install two screws at each end and secure the
bracket by tightening the screws to 10–12 in.-lbs.
4. Attach the fan assembly to the optional brackets
with four screws; two at each end of the fan
assembly. Secure by tightening the screws to
10–12 in.-lbs.
2. While doing this, align the two holes in each end
of the fan assembly with the holes in the rack side
plates.
3. Install two screws in each end and secure the fan
assembly by tightening the screws to 10–12 in.-lbs.
4. There are two additional screws that must be
installed in the front rail. Install these screws and
tighten to 10–12 in.-lbs.
a45459
Figure 4. Mounting Details for Fan Assembly (AC Type Shown) and Optional Mounting Bracket
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
6-3
PLC Racks
4
GFK-0637E
October 1999
Rack Fan Assembly
Changing the Filter
Each fan has a polyurethane filter which can be
removed, and cleaned or replaced as needed.
Removing a filter is easy, simply lift the tabs located on
all four sides of the plastic retainer. Remove the filter
and either clean it or replace it with a new filter.
To replace a retainer, align the retainer with the filter
assembly and snap the retainer back in place. Details of
the filter assembly are shown in the following figure.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
a44872
Î
GUARD
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
FILTER
RETAINER
Figure 5. Filter Guard Assembly (AC Type Fan Shown)
Wiring 24 VDC Fans
On the 24 VDC Fan Assembly, IC697ACC744, each fan
has a pair of 24 gauge, 12” (310 mm) long leads. Connect
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
all the Red leads to +24 VDC, and all the Black leads to
24 VDC common.
Î
Î
a44872A
Figure 6. Wire Lead Detail for Fans in the IC697ACC744 24 VDC Rack Fan Assembly
6-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC Racks
5
GFK-0637E
October 1999
Rack Fan Assembly
Table 1. Specifications for IC697ACC721/724/744 [
120 VAC,50/60Hz(IC697ACC721)
Operating Voltage:
240 VAC,50/60Hz(IC697ACC724)
24 VDC (IC697ACC724)
15 to 17 watts at 120 VAC
Input Power (each fan):
16 to 17 watts at 240 VAC
6.7 watts at 24 VDC
0.18 to 0.20 amps at 120 VAC
Line Amps (each fan):
0.09 to .010 amps at 240 VAC
0.28 amps at 24 VDC
0.24 to 0.26 amps at 120 VAC
Locked Rotor Amps (each fan):
0.12 to 0.14 amps at 240 VAC
0.70 amps at 24 VDC
OperatingTemperature:
–28 _ to +70_C (–18.4_ to +158_F)
Nominal Air Flow (without filter):
@120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hz: 108 CFM (each fan)
Nominal Air Flow (with filter):
@120 or 240 VAC, 60 Hz: 71 CFM (each fan)
Weight of Fan Assembly:
5.94 pounds (2.69 kg)
MTBF for each fan:
@ 40_C (104_F) >80,000 Hours (manufacturers specification)
@ 60_C (140_F) >50,000 Hours (manufacturers specification)
FilterAssembly
Retainer and Guard:
UL94V-0 Plastic
Filter Type:
Polyurethane Foam, 30 PPI (Pores Per Inch)
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC
Rack FanAssembly, 240 VAC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC744
Replacement Filter Element, Comair Rotron
554146 (5 pack)
The Rack Fan Assembly comes as a kit which includes a fan assembly, two optional mounting
brackets, and eight screws.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
6-5
1
Power Supplies
IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724
7
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
GFK-1047F
August 1997
Power Supplies
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724)
datasheet GFK-1047F
Features
D Operation from 24 VDC
D Three output voltages, 90 watts total
D
D
D
+5 VDC output up to 18 amps
+12 VDC output up to 1.5 amps
-12 VDC output up to 1 amp
Slide-in rack mount construction
Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection
provided on 5 volt bus
Two rack operation from a single power supply
Functions
The 90 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplanemounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
provides +5 volt, +12 volt and -12 volt power, and logic
level sequencing signals to the backplane.
This power supply can be used either in a single rack
application, or can also be used to provide power to a
second rack if the total load is within the supply rating.
Interconnection to the second rack is through a prewired cable (IC697CBL700).
The power supply output will ride through a 10 msec
total loss of input power at full load. Protection is provided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
a47033
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Even if the power supply is
switched off, hazardous voltages from user field wiring may
still be present on the I/O terminal boards as well as on the power supply terminal board.
Care should be taken when handling the power supply and I/O
modules as well as any wiring
connected to them in order to
prevent personal injury.
LOGIC POWER
ON
OFF
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INPUT
24 VDC
6.5A
+5V AT 18A
OUTPUT
+12V AT 1.5A
–12V AT 1A
90 WATTS TOTAL
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Replace with same
type and rating
10A/250V
INPUT
+
24 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
WARNING
EXPLOSION
HAZARD
–
WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE REPLACING OR
WIRING MODULES.
ALIMENTACION ELECTRICA
ATENCION
Incluso si la alimentacion electrica esta desconectada, voltajes
peligrosos provenientes del cableado externo pueden estar
presentes en los terminales de
entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
los terminales de la tarjeta impresa de la fuente de poder.
Debe prestarse atencion en el
manejo de la fuente de poder, en
el manejo de los modulos de entrada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
de cualquier cable conectado a
la fuente o a los modulos para
evitar dan~os personales.
ADVERTENCIA
RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
CUANDO ESTA EN ZONAS
PELIGROSAS, DESCONECTAR LA POTENCIA ANTES DE
REEMPLAZAR O INSTALAR
LOS MODULOS.
7-1
Power Supplies
2
GFK-1047F
August 1997
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
Dual Rack Operation
Operation of the Power Supply
This Power Supply Module operates from a 24 VDC
nominal line. The power supply can accept an input
voltage range of from 18 to 32 VDC.
Overvoltage Protection
A single power supply can provide power for two
racks under the following conditions:
D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
and the total power required by both racks is within the capability of the supply.
D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if
the 5 V bus exceeds 6.7 volts. External overvoltage on
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open.
Replace this fuse with a 10 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse.
Overcurrent Protection
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent
limit for each of the three outputs (26 amps for +5
volts, 4 amps for +12 volts, and 2 amps for –12 olts
(all maximum)). If the maximum current rating is exceeded, the output voltage will drop.
It will remain in that state until the load is either removed or reduced. A current overload (including a
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open.
5.2 amperes.
D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable.
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable carries
the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequencing
signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which connects
directly to the backplane through an opening in the
rack frame. Note that the cable carries power and power sequencing signals only. Inter-rack communication
and bus interface modules must be provided separately.
See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual for application information.
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
Temperature Derating
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
INDICATED END
IS SUPPLYING
POWER
For operation at ambient temperatures that exceed
50_C (122_F), maximum output power must be derated as shown in the derating curve.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a42134
POWER
SUPPLY
FIRST
RACK
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
FACE
PLATE
a45647
90
80
70
60
TOTAL
OUTPUT 50
POWER
40
30
20
10
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C)
Figure 7. Output Power Derating Curve
7-2
SECOND
RACK
Figure 8. Dual Rack Configuration
Timing Diagram
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the
dc input power to the dc outputs and to the two system
signals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYSRESET. The 5VSTBY output may be used for user battery
backup schemes as shown.
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The sys-
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
3
GFK-1047F
August 1997
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
er from internal energy storage elements, and therefore
does not require inrush energy from the power source.
tem is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least
200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during
this time, outputs are forced off).
If input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will remain
within specifications for at least 10 ms. The system is
then given an additional 5 milliseconds to complete an
orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all processing.
a47035
INPUT POWER ON
OFF
ON
| 1 CYCLE
OFF
} 1 CYCLE
Mounting
The Power Supply is a plug-in module which is secured
to the rack with four M 2.5 screws (included). Be certain
that these screws are tightened both to secure the power supply to the rack, and to assure proper power supply-to-rack grounding.
Power Supply Door
DC
4.5V
4.9V
OUTPUT
POWER
Input Voltage and Grounding
ACFAIL
10 ms
MIN
SYSRESET
5ms MIN
50µs MIN
200 ms
MIN
5VSTBY
2
1
2
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC
2
The power supply door can be opened by grasping the
upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or a
fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use
care when opening the door since pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or the door to break.
5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE.
Figure 9. Timing Diagram for 24 VDC Power Supply
Note
Input power interruptions that exceed the power
supply ride through time (10 milliseconds minimum) will result in a complete power down/power
up cycle of ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
The power input terminal board provides two terminals for
connecting 24 VDC power and an additional terminal for
system and noise ground. Power input connections should
be made with copper AWG #16 (1.33 mm2) through AWG
#12 (3.31 mm2) wire rated for 75_C (167_F).
Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but
the wires into any given terminal should be the same
type and size.
It is recommended that the GND terminal on the power
supply be connected to the GND terminal on the rack and
to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire rated for
75_C (167_F) and a ring terminal to ensure adequate
grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each wire on
the GND lug is recommended.
a47034
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32)
Inrush
When input voltage is initially applied, internal energy
storage elements will draw a surge current from the 24
VDC input power source which can be in the range of
100 amps depending on the installation and power
source impedance characteristics. Standard best practices should be used for installations where minimizing
inrush current is a consideration. Typical best practices
include providing local energy storage which can be
either system batteries or capacitors at each power supply input, and minimizing resistance from the storage
elements to prevent significant voltage drop during the
initial energy transfer.
Note that this inrush only occurs during the initial application of input voltage to the power supply. Turning
the power switch On and OFF does not disconnect pow-
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
#12 (3.3 mm2)
GROUND
WIRE
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
EARTH
GROUND
INCOMING
Î
Î
Î
Replace with same
type and rating
1A/250V
INPUT
+
24 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Figure 10. Input Wiring and Ground Connections
7-3
Power Supplies
4
GFK-1047F
August 1997
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
System Noise Immunity
Warning
Because the power ON/OFF switch does not
disconnect power from the internal storage
elements, it is possible for the input terminals to discharge to user wiring when power
is reapplied. To prevent this condition, turn
the power supply switch on after the removal of
user input power to discharge all stored energy through the supply.
Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
programmable controller system to reduce the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
1. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of the
rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. Use of a ring
terminal and starwasher is recommended.
2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected to
a good earth ground.
Table 1. Specifications For IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724 [
Nominal Rated Voltage:
Input Voltage Range:
24 VDC
18 to 32 VDC
Input Power:
Input Inrush Energy:
160 watts maximum @ full load
22 joules maximum
Output Power:
Output Voltage:
90 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
+5 VDC: 4.90 to 5.25 volts (5.07 volts nominal)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
-12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
Protective Limits Overvoltage Limit:
Overcurrent Limit:
+5 VDC Output: 5.7 to 6.7 volts
+5 VDC output: 26 amps, maximum
+12 VDC output: 4 amps, maximum
-12 VDC output: 2 amps, maximum
Ride Through Time:
10 milliseconds minimum @20 VDC
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Power Supply, 24 Volts DC, 90 Watts
IC697PWR724
CE697PWR724
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate
for vacant power supply slot in second rack).
IC697CBL700
Note: For Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
7-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
5
GFK-1047F
August 1997
24 VDC, 90W Power Supply Module
The following markings are required to appear in the
applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and data sheet for Class I Div 2 Hazardous
Locations.
1.
EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C,
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
3.
2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
7-5
1
Power Supplies
IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748
8
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
GFK-1061D
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR748/CE697PWR748)
datasheet GFK-1061D
Features
D Operation from 48 VDC
D Three output voltages, 90 watts total
D
D
D
+5 VDC output up to 18 amps
+12 VDC output up to 1.5 amps
–12 VDC output up to 1 amp
Slide-in rack mount construction
Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection
provided on 5 volt bus
Two rack operation from a single power supply
Functions
This 90 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplanemounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
provides +5 volt, +12 volt and –12 volt power, and
logic level sequencing signals to the backplane.
This power supply can be used either in a single rack
application, or can also be used to provide power to a
second rack if the total load is within the supply rating.
Interconnection to the second rack is through a prewired cable (IC697CBL700).
The power supply output will ride through a 10 msec
total loss of input power at full load. Protection is provided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
a47033
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Even if the power supply is
switched off, hazardous voltages from user field wiring may
still be present on the I/O terminal boards as well as on the power supply terminal board.
Care should be taken when handling the power supply and I/O
modules as well as any wiring
connected to them in order to
prevent personal injury.
LOGIC POWER
ON
OFF
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
INPUT
48 VDC
3.5A
+5V AT 18A
OUTPUT
+12V AT 1.5A
–12V AT 1A
90 WATTS TOTAL
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Replace with same
type and rating
5A/250V
INPUT
+
48 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
WARNING
EXPLOSION
HAZARD
–
WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE REPLACING OR
WIRING MODULES.
ALIMENTACION ELECTRICA
ATENCION
Incluso si la alimentacion electrica esta desconectada, voltajes
peligrosos provenientes del cableado externo pueden estar
presentes en los terminales de
entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
los terminales de la tarjeta impresa de la fuente de poder.
Debe prestarse atencion en el
manejo de la fuente de poder, en
el manejo de los modulos de entrada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
de cualquier cable conectado a
la fuente o a los modulos para
evitar dan~os personales.
ADVERTENCIA
RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
CUANDO ESTA EN ZONAS
PELIGROSAS, DESCONECTAR LA POTENCIA ANTES DE
REEMPLAZAR O INSTALAR
LOS MODULOS.
8-1
Power Supplies
2
GFK-1061D
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
Operation of the Power Supply
Dual Rack Operation
This Power Supply Module operates from a 48 VDC
nominal line. The power supply can accept an input
voltage range of from 35 to 60 VDC.
A single power supply can provide power for two
racks under the following conditions:
D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
and the total power required by both racks is within the capability of the supply.
Overvoltage Protection
D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if
the 5 V bus exceeds 6.7 volts. External overvoltage on
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open.
Replace this fuse with a 5 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse.
Overcurrent Protection
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent
limit for each of the three outputs (26 amps for +5V, 4
amps for +12 V, and 2 amps for –12 V (all maximum)). If the maximum current rating is exceeded,
the output voltage will drop.
It will remain in that state until the load is either removed or reduced. A current overload (including a
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open.
Temperature Derating
For operation at ambient temperatures that exceed
50_C (122_F), maximum output power must be derated as shown in the derating curve.
5.2 amperes.
D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable.
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable carries
the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequencing
signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which connects
directly to the backplane through an opening in the
rack frame. Note that the cable carries power and power sequencing signals only. Inter-rack communication
and bus interface modules must be provided separately.
See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual for application information.
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
1
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
INDICATED END
IS SUPPLYING
POWER
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a42134
POWER
SUPPLY
FIRST
RACK
FACE
PLATE
a45647
90
80
70
60
TOTAL
OUTPUT 50
POWER
40
30
20
10
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C)
Figure 1. Output Power Derating Curve
8-2
SECOND
RACK
Figure 2. Dual Rack Configuration
Timing Diagram
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the
dc input power to the dc outputs and to the two system
signals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYSRESET. The 5VSTBY output can be used for user battery
backup schemes as shown.
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The sys-
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
3
GFK-1061D
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
tem is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least
200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during
this time, outputs are forced off).
the power switch On and OFF does not disconnect power from internal energy storage elements, and therefore
does not require inrush energy from the power source.
If input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will remain
within specifications for at least 10 milliseconds. The
system is then given an additional 5 milliseconds to complete an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all
processing.
Mounting
a47035
INPUT POWER ON
OFF
ON
| 1 CYCLE
OFF
} 1 CYCLE
The Power Supply is a plug-in module which is secured
to the rack with four M 2.5 screws (included). Be certain
that these screws are tightened both to secure the power supply to the rack, and to assure proper power supply-to-rack grounding.
Power Supply Door
DC
4.5V
4.9V
OUTPUT
POWER
ACFAIL
Input Voltage and Grounding
10 ms
MIN
SYSRESET
5ms MIN
50µs MIN
200 ms
MIN
5VSTBY
2
1
2
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC
2
The power supply door can be opened by grasping the
upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or a
fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use
care when opening the door since pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or the door to break.
5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE.
Figure 3. Timing Diagram for 48 VDC Power Supply
Note
Input power interruptions that exceed the power
supply ride through time (10 milliseconds minimum) will result in a complete power down/power
up cycle of ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
The power input terminal board provides two terminals for
connecting 48 VDC power and an additional terminal for
system and noise ground. Power input connections should
be made with copper AWG #16 (1.33 mm2) through AWG
#12 (3.31 mm2) wire rated for 75_C (167_F).
Each terminal can accept solid or stranded wires, but
the wires into any given terminal should be the same
type and size.
It is recommended that the GND terminal on the power
supply be connected to the GND terminal on the rack and
to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire rated for
75_C (167_F) and a ring terminal to ensure adequate
grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each wire on
the GND lug is recommended.
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32)
Inrush
When input voltage is initially applied, internal energy
storage elements will draw a surge current from the 48
VDC input power source which can be in the range of
100 amps depending on the installation and power
source impedance characteristics. Standard best practices should be used for installations where minimizing
inrush current is a consideration. Typical best practices
include providing local energy storage which can be
either system batteries or capacitors at each power supply input, and minimizing resistance from the storage
elements to prevent significant voltage drop during the
initial energy transfer.
Note that this inrush only occurs during the initial application of input voltage to the power supply. Turning
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
#12 (3.3 mm2)
a47049
Î
GROUND
WIRE
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
EARTH
GROUND
INCOMING
Î
Î
Î
Replace with same
type and rating
5A/250V
INPUT
+
48 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
8-3
Power Supplies
4
GFK-1061D
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
Figure 4. Input Wiring and Ground Connections
System Noise Immunity
Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
programmable controller system to reduce the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
Warning
Because the power ON/OFF switch does not
disconnect power from the internal storage
elements, it is possible for the input terminals to discharge to user wiring when power
is reapplied. To prevent this condition, turn
the power supply switch on after the removal
of user input power to discharge all stored
energy through the supply.
4. The GND terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of the
rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. Use of a ring
terminal and starwasher is recommended.
5. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected to
a good earth ground.
Table 1. Specifications For IC697PWR724/CE697PWR724 [
Nominal Rated Voltage:
Input Voltage Range:
48 VDC
35 to 60 VDC
Input Power:
Input Inrush Energy:
160 watts maximum @ full load
28 joules maximum at 60 VDC Input
Output Power:
Output Voltage:
90 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
+5 VDC: 4.90 to 5.25 volts (5.07 volts nominal)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
–12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
1.0 A on +5 VDC
Minimum Load:
Protective Limits Overvoltage Limit:
Overcurrent Limit:
+5 VDC Output: 5.7 to 6.7 volts
+5 VDC output: 26 amps, maximum
+12 VDC output: 4 amps, maximum
–12 VDC output: 2 amps, maximum
Ride Through Time:
10 milliseconds minimum
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Power Supply, 48 Volts DC, 90 Watts
IC697PWR748
CE697PWR748
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate
for vacant power supply slot in second rack).
IC697CBL700
Note: For Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
8-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
5
GFK-1061D
August 1997
48 VDC 90W Power Supply Module
The following markings are required to appear in the
applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and data sheet for Class I Div 2 Hazardous
Locations.
1.
EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C,
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
3.
2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
8-5
1
Power Supplies
IC697PWR710/712
9
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module (IC697PWR710/712)
datasheet GFK-1388A
– This data sheet (GFK-1388) describes version H (IC697PWR710H/712H), or later versions of this power supply.
– For a description of version G (IC697PWR710G/712G), and earlier versions – see data sheet GFK-0083L.
Features
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
Operation from 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Five volt DC output up to 11 amps
Slide-in rack mount construction
Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection provided on 5 volt bus
Two rack operation from a single power supply
Power factor corrected on AC inputs
Jumper for overvoltage protection devices
Functions
This Power Supply Module for the programmable
controller is a rack-mounted unit that plugs directly
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
into a 48-pin backplane-mounted connector in the
leftmost slot in the rack. It provides +5 volt power
and logic level sequencing signals to the backplane.
This power supply may be used either in a single rack
application, or may also be used to provide power to a
second rack if the total load is within the supply rating. Interconnection to the second rack is through an
available prewired cable (see the ordering instructions
on the last page of this data sheet).
The power supply output will ride through a one-cycle
total loss of input power at full load. Protection is provided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
a47110
ON
OFF
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Series 90t-70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
120/240VAC
0.8A/0.4A
50/60HZ
INPUT
125 VDC
0.8A
+5V AT 11A
OUTPUT
55 WATTS TOTAL
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Replace with same
type and rating
1A/250V
INPUT
+
L1
120/240VAC
N
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Even if the power supply is
switched off, hazardous voltages from user field wiring may
still be present on the I/O terminal boards as well as on the
power supply terminal board.
Care should be taken when
handling the power supply and
I/O modules as well as any wiring connected to them in order
to prevent personal injury.
LOGIC POWER
125 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75_C Copper
Conductors
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD –
WHEN IN HAZARDOUS
LOCATIONS, TURN OFF
POWER BEFORE REPLACING OR WIRING MODULES.
ALIMENTACIONELECTRICA
ATENCION
Incluso si la alimentacion electrica esta desconectada, voltajes peligrosos provenientes
del cableado externo pueden
estar presentes en los terminales de entrada/salida (I/O),
asi como en los terminales de
la tarjeta impresa de la fuente
de poder.
Debe prestarse atencion en el
manejo de la fuente de poder,
en el manejo de los modulos de
entrada/salida (I/O), y en el
manejode cualquier cable conectado a la fuente o a los modulos para evitar dan~os personales.
ADVERTENCIA
RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
CUANDO ESTA EN ZONAS
PELIGROSAS, DESCONECTAR LA POTENCIA ANTES
DE REEMPLAZAR O INSTALAR LOS MODULOS.
9-1
Power Supplies
2
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
Operation of the Power Supply
connects directly to the backplane through an opening in the rack frame.
This Power Supply Module can operate from either a
120 VAC or 240 VAC nominal line. For these two
ranges, the power supply can accept an input voltage
range of from 90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz. Active power factor correction circuits in this supply maintain a
unity power factor which eliminates the need for
oversized circuit breakers and wiring.
Note that the cable carries power and power sequencing signals only. Inter-rack communication and bus
interface modules must be provided separately. See
the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual for application information.
This power supply will also operate with a 125 VDC
nominal line. It will accept a DC input voltage range
of 100 to 150 VDC.
Overvoltage Protection
The power supply includes an electronic overvoltage
protection circuit. This circuit will clamp the output if
the 5 volt bus exceeds 6.2 volts. External overvoltage on
the output will not cause the power supply fuse to
open. However, if an internal fault in the power supply
caused the overvoltage condition, the fuse may open.
Replace this fuse with a 1 amp, 250 volt 5x20 mm fuse.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
1
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
INDICATED
END
IS SUPPLYING
POWER
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a42134
POWER
SUPPLY
FIRST
RACK
FACE
PLATE
Overcurrent Protection
SECOND
RACK
The power supply provides an electronic overcurrent
limit at 12 amperes, typical. If the maximum current
rating is exceeded, the output voltage will drop.
It will remain in that state until the load is either removed or reduced. A current overload (including a
short circuit condition) will not cause the fuse to open.
Dual Rack Operation
A single power supply can provide power for two
racks under the following conditions:
H
Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
and the total power required by both racks is within the capability of the supply.
H
The current drawn by the second rack is less than
5.2 amperes.
H
The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
as limited by the 3-foot connecting cable.
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
listed in the ordering instructions. This cable carries
the +5 volt power bus as well as the power sequencing signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector which
9-2
Figure 1. Dual Rack Configuration
Timing Diagram
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of
the AC input power to the 5 volt DC output and to the
two system signals generated by the power supply:
ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The
system is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at
least 200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available.
(During this time, outputs are forced off).
If AC input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will
remain within specifications for at least one cycle.
The system is then given an additional 5 ms to complete an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all
processing.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
3
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
Field Wiring Connections
a44050
INPUT POWER ON
OFF
AC
OUTPUT
POWER
4.9V
ACFAIL
SYSRESET
200 ms
MIN
ON
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
< 1 CYCLE
OFF
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
>
1 CYCLE
4.9V
26.5ms
MIN
21 ms
MIN
5 ms MIN
The power input terminal board has four terminals.
The top two (L1 and N) are for 120/240 VAC or 125
VDC input power connections; the third and fourth
terminals are for ground and overvoltage protection
device connections, respectively. Power input connections should be made with copper AWG #16 (1.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F). Each terminal
can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into
any given terminal should be the same type and size.
It is recommended that the ground terminal on the
power supply be connected to the GND terminal on
the rack and to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F) to ensure adequate
grounding.
50 µs MIN
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32)
Figure 2. Timing Diagram for Versions D and Later
ÎÎ
#12 (3.3 mm2)
GROUND
WIRE
Note
Input power interruptions which exceed the
power supply ride through time (21
milliseconds minimum) will result in a
complete power down/power up cycle of
ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
Mounting
The Power Supply is a plug-in module that is installed
in the leftmost slot of any standard IC697 rack or VME
Integrator ’s rack.
Power Supply Door
The power supply door can easily be opened by
grasping the upper left corner of the door with your
right thumb or a fingernail and gently pulling the
door towards you. Use care when opening the door
since pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or
the door to break.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
EARTH
GROUND
INCOMING
CONNECT JUMPER STRAP
BETWEEN TERMINALS 3
and 4 FOR OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION DEVICES.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
a47111
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Replace with same
type and rating
1A/250V
INPUT
+
L1
120/240V AC
N
125 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Figure 3. Terminal Board Connections for
IC697PWR710/712, Versions H and Later
Overvoltage Protection Devices
The overvoltage protection devices (see Figure 4) for this
power supply are connected internally to terminal 4
(bottom terminal) on the input terminal board. This pin is
normally connected to frame ground (terminal 3) with
the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving
terminal 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.
9-3
Power Supplies
4
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage
protection must be disabled during the test by removing
the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.
a47106
Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
programmable controller system to reduce the possibility of errors due to electrical noise.
1
1. A ground terminal on the power supply must be
connected to the GND terminal on either side of
the rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire.
2
2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
to a good earth ground.
3
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
System Noise Immunity
Frame
Ground
4
Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board
Figure 4. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper
Table 3. Specifications for IC697PWR710/712 (Versions H and Later) [
Nominal Rated Voltage:
120/240VAC or 125 VDC
Input VoltageRange:
AC
DC
90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
100 to 150 VDC,
Input Power:
90 watts maximum at full load
Input Half Cycle Peak Inrush:
3 amps (typical)
Power Factor
> .95
Output Power:
56 watts maximum
Output Voltage:
+5 VDC: 4.90 to 5.25 volts (5.1 volts nominal)
Protective Limits OvervoltageLimit:
6.2 volts (typical), electronicovervoltageprotection
Overcurrent Limit:
12 amps (typical), electroniccurrent limit
Ride Through Time:
21 milliseconds minimum (from loss of AC input)
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867C, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 4. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Power Supply - 120/240 Volts AC or 125 Volts DC, 55 Watts (H, or later version)
IC697PWR710/712
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate for vacant power supply slot in second rack)
IC697CBL700/713
9-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
5
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
Special Installation Instructions for
Floating Neutral (IT) Systems
Examples of Non-Floating Neutral System
When this power supply is installed in a system
where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective
Earth Ground, these special installation instructions
must be followed to prevent damage to the power
supply.
Definition of Floating Neutral Systems
As described in this data sheet a Floating Neutral System
is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral
and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a
negligible impedance. In Europe this is referred to as an
IT system (see IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System,
voltages measured from input terminals to protective
earth ground may exceed 264 Volts AC maximum input
voltage as specified in the power supply specifications in
this data sheet.
L
N
N/PE
PE
These systems do not require these special installation
instructions.
Use These Special Installation Instructions
for Floating Neutral Systems
1.
The input power terminals should be wired
according to the instructions in this data sheet.
2.
The factory installed jumper between terminals 3
and 4 of the power supply module must be
removed.
3.
L1
Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs,
MUST be installed between the following
terminals:
N
h
h
Example of Floating Neutral System
PE
This system must be installed using the special
installation instructions on this page.
Systems in which one leg of the power distribution
wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two
legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to
Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems.
t
L1
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
From L1 to earth ground
From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the
system is protected from power line transients that
exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N–PE)MAX.
For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral
floating 50V above earth ground, the transient
protection should be rated at:
240V + 100V +50V = 390V
9-5
Power Supplies
6
GFK-1388A
August 1997
120/240 VAC or 125 VDC, 55W Power Supply Module
The following statements are required to appear for
Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.
1.
EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C,
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
9-6
2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
3.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Power Supplies
IC697PWR711/713
10
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC (IC697PWR711/713)
datasheet GFK-1448B
–This data sheet describes version H (IC697PWR711H/713H), or later versions of this power supply.
–F or a description of version G (IC697PWR711G/713G), and earlier versions – see data sheet GFK-0392G.
Features
D Operation from 120 VAC, 240 VAC, or 125 VDC
D Three output voltages, 100 watts total
+5 VDC output up to 20 amps
+12 VDC output up to 2 amps
-12 VDC output up to 1 amp
D
D
D
D
D
Slide-in rack mount construction
Electronic short circuit overcurrent protection
Two rack operation from a single power supply
Power Factor correction for AC operation
Jumper for overvoltage protection devices
Functions
The 100 Watt Power Supply Module is a rack-mounted
unit that plugs directly into a 48-pin backplanemounted connector in the leftmost slot in the rack. It
provides +5 volt, +12 volt and -12 volt power, and logic
level sequencing signals to the backplane.
This power supply may be used either in a single rack
application, or may also be used to provide power to a
second rack if the total load is within the supply rating.
Interconnection to the second rack is through a prewired cable (see the ordering instructions on the last
page of this data sheet).
a47113
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ON
OFF
POWER SUPPLY MODULE
120/240VAC
1.4A/0.7A
50/60HZ
INPUT
125 VDC
1.4A
OUTPUT
+5V AT 20A
+12 AT 2A
–12 AT 1A
100 WATTS TOTAL
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Replace with same
type and rating
2A/250V
INPUT
+
L1
120/240V AC
N
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
Even if the power supply is
switched off, hazardous voltages from user field wiring may
still be present on the I/O terminal boards as well as on the power supply terminal board.
Care should be taken when handling the power supply and I/O
modules as well as any wiring
connected to them in order to
prevent personal injury.
LOGIC POWER
125 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
WARNING
EXPLOSION
HAZARD
–
WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, TURN OFF POWER
BEFORE REPLACING OR
WIRING MODULES.
ALIMENTACION ELECTRICA
ATENCION
Incluso si la alimentacion electrica esta desconectada, voltajes
peligrosos provenientes del cableado externo pueden estar
presentes en los terminales de
entrada/salida(I/O), asi como en
los terminales de la tarjeta impresa de la fuente de poder.
Debe prestarse atencion en el
manejo de la fuente de poder, en
el manejo de los modulos de entrada/salida (I/O), y en el manejo
de cualquier cable conectado a
la fuente o a los modulos para
evitar dan~os personales.
ADVERTENCIA
RIESGO DE EXPLOSION –
CUANDO ESTA EN ZONAS
PELIGROSAS, DESCONECTAR LA POTENCIA ANTES DE
REEMPLAZAR O INSTALAR
LOS MODULOS.
10-1
Power Supplies
2
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
The power supply output will ride through at least one
input line cycle with a total loss of input power at full
load. Protection is provided for overcurrent and overvoltage fault conditions.
Operation of the Power Supply
This Power Supply module can operate from either
120 VAC or 240 VAC nominal inputs. It will also operate from a nominal 125 VDC source. The specified
range of operation is from 90 VAC to 264 VAC, and
from 100 VDC to 150 VDC.
For continuous operation (greater than one hour) at
low line voltages and high temperatures, some power
derating must be applied. Refer to the following figure to determine the normal operating range for specific applications. Normal operating range is shown
by the shaded area of the graph for 60_C (140_F)
installations. Operation in the non-shaded region for
specific applications must be limited to <1 hour. Reducing the maximum operating temperature to 55_C
(131_F) will increase the normal operating range as
indicated on the graph.
Active power factor correction circuits in this supply
maintain a near unity power factor for AC inputs,
which eliminates the need for oversized circuit breakers and wiring. This circuitry also limits the half cycle
peak inrush currents to a low value.
LIMITED OPERATING RANGE
(< 1 HOUR )
100
50_C
95
55_C
60_C
90
85
MAXIMUM
TOTAL
OUTPUT
POWER
(WATTS)
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
FOR CONTINUOUS OPERATION (>1 HOUR)
IN MINIMUM SIZE ENCLOSURE
WITH NO FORCED AIR CIRCULATION.
VIN
90
95
100
105
110
120
130
264
INPUT VOLTAGE (VRMS OR VDC)
Figure 1. Power Derating for Low Line Voltages
Overvoltage Protection
Overcurrent Protection
An electronic shutdown circuit protects against voltages exceeding 6.2 volts. A back-up voltage clamp is
provided to protect against sustained overvoltage
conditions due to either external influences or internal
faults. Overvoltage due to internal faults may cause
the fuse to open. For short term overvoltage conditions, normal operation will resume when the cause is
removed.
An electronic current limit is provided on each of the
three outputs. An overload on any output will cause
the voltage to collapse and may cause the other output voltages to collapse.
10-2
Normal operation will resume after removal of the
overload. Some component cooling time may be required before normal operation resumes.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
3
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Dual Rack Operation
SET. The 5VSTBY output may be used for user battery
backup schemes as shown.
A single power supply can provide power for two
racks under the following conditions:
On application of power, the ACFAIL signal goes false
soon after the 5 volt bus is within specification. The system is held in the Reset state by SYSRESET for at least
200 milliseconds after 5 volt power is available (during
this time, outputs are forced off).
D Only 5 volt power is required in the second rack,
and the total power required by both racks is within the capability of the supply.
D The current drawn by the second rack is less than
5.2 amperes.
D The two racks must be mounted in close proximity
as limited by the available 3-foot connecting cable.
The connecting cable used for dual rack operation is
listed in Table 2, Ordering Information. This cable carries the +5 volts power bus as well as the power sequencing signals. It uses a 9-pin D-type connector
which connects directly to the backplane through an
opening in the rack frame. Note that the cable carries
power and power sequencing signals only. Inter-rack
communication and bus interface modules must be provided separately. See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual. for application information.
If AC input power is interrupted, the 5 volt bus will remain within specifications for at least one cycle. The system is then given an additional 5 milliseconds to complete
an orderly shutdown before SYSRESET stops all processing.
a42132
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
INPUT POWER ON
OFF
| 1 CYCLE
AC
ON
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
OFF
} 1 CYCLE
4.9V
4.9V
OUTPUT
POWER
26.5ms
MIN
ACFAIL
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
1
INSTALL CABLE
SO THAT THE
INDICATED END
IS SUPPLYING
POWER
TWO
RACK
POWER
CABLE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
a42134
21 ms
MIN
SYSRESET
FIRST
RACK
5VSTBY
2
Figure 2. Dual Rack Configuration
Timing Diagram
The timing diagram below shows the relationship of the ac
input power to the dc outputs and to the two system signals generated by the power supply: ACFAIL and SYSRE-
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
2
1 5VSTBY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY 5VDC
2
5VSTBY DISCONNECTED FROM POWER SUPPLY 5VDC BY A
TRANSISTOR TO ALLOW CONNECTION OF USER BATTERY SOURCE.
Figure 3. Timing Diagram
Note
FACE
PLATE
SECOND
RACK
5ms MIN
50µs MIN
200 ms
MIN
POWER
SUPPLY
Input power interruptions which exceed the
power supply holdup time (21 milliseconds
minimum) will result in a complete power
down/power up cycle of ACFAIL and SYSRESET.
Mounting
This Power Supply is a plug-in module that is installed
in the leftmost slot of any standard IC697 rack or VME
Integrator ’s rack. For additional installation information, refer to GFK-1179, Installation Guidelines for Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software.
10-3
Power Supplies
4
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Power Supply Door
Overvoltage Protection Devices
The power supply door can easily be opened by grasping
the upper left corner of the door with your right thumb or
a fingernail and gently pulling the door towards you. Use
care when opening the door since pulling from the bottom
can cause the hinge or the door to break.
The overvoltage protection devices (see Figure 5) for this
power supply are connected internally to terminal 4
(bottom terminal) on the input terminal board. This pin is
normally connected to frame ground (terminal 3) with
the supplied jumper strap which is installed at the factory. If overvoltage protection is not required or is supplied upstream, this feature can be disabled by leaving
terminal 4 unconnected by removing the jumper strap.
Field Wiring Connections
The power input terminal board has four terminals.
The top two (L1 and N) are for 120/240 VAC or 125
VDC input power connections; the third and fourth
terminals are for ground and overvoltage protection
device connections, respectively. Power input connections should be made with copper AWG #16 (1.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F). Each terminal
can accept solid or stranded wires, but the wires into
any given terminal should be the same type and size.
If you want to Hi-pot test this supply, overvoltage
protection must be disabled during the test by removing
the terminal board strap. Re-enable overvoltage protection after testing by reinstalling the strap.
a47106
1
It is recommended that the ground terminal on the
power supply be connected to the GND terminal on
the rack and to earth using copper AWG #12 (3.3
mm2 ) wire rated for 75_C (167_F) to ensure adequate
grounding. Use of a nut and star washer for each
wire on the ground terminal is recommended.
2
3
Jumper Strap Connects
Overvoltage Protection
Devices to Frame Ground
IC697
RACK STUD
(8–32)
Î
#12 (3.3 mm2)
GROUND
WIRE
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
EARTH
GROUND
INCOMING
H
N
G
CONNECT JUMPER STRAP
BETWEEN TERMINALS 3
and 4 FOR OVERVOLTAGE
PROTECTION DEVICES.
Î
Î
Î
Replace with same
type and rating
2A/250V
Figure 5. Overvoltage Protection Devices and Jumper
System Noise Immunity
INPUT
+
L1
120/240V AC
N
125 VDC
–
Torque 12 in-lb
(1.3 N-m)
75 _C Copper
Conductors
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Figure 4. Terminal Board Connections for
IC697PWR711/713, Versions H and Later
10-4
4
Screw Terminals
on Terminal Board
a47111
WARNING:
DO NOT DISCONNECT
WHILE CIRCUIT IS
ALIVE UNLESS AREA
IS KNOWN TO BE
NONHAZARDOUS
Frame
Ground
Two easy steps must be taken to properly ground the
programmable controller system to reduce the possibility of errors due to electrical noise (see Figure 5).
1. The Ground terminal on the power supply must
be connected to the GND terminal on either side
of the rack using AWG #12 (3.3 mm2 ) wire. The
Ground terminal should be also be connected to
incoming safety ground.
2. The GND terminal on the rack must be connected
to a good earth ground.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
5
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Table 1.
Specifications FOR IC697PWR711/713
(Version H and Later) [
Nominal Rated Voltage:
120/240 VAC, or 125 VDC
Input Voltage Range:
AC Input
DC Input
90 to 264 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz
100 to 150 VDC
Input Power:
135 watts (typical), 160 watts (maximum)
Input Half Cycle Peak Inrush
3 amps (typical)
Power Factor
> .93
Output Power: [[
100 watts maximum (total for all 3 outputs)
Output Voltage:
+5 VDC: 4.90 to 5.25 volts (5.07 volts nominal)
+12 VDC: 11.75 to 12.6 volts
-12 VDC: -12.6 to -11.75 volts
Protective Limits Overvoltage Limit:
+5 VDC Output: 5.7 to 6.7 volts
Overcurrent Limit:
+5 VDC output:
Holdup Time:
21A (typical)
+12 VDC output:
3.5A (typical)
-12 VDC output:
1.6A (typical)
21 milliseconds minimum (from loss of AC input)
Environmental 0_C to 60_C (32_ to 140_F) operating [[
Operating Temperature:
–40_C to +85_C (-40_ to +185_F) storage
[ Refer to data sheet GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
[[ Derate for continuous low input voltage, (see Figure 1)
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Power Supply,120/240Volts AC, or 125 Volts DC 100 Watts
(with jumper for overvoltage protection devices – version H, or later version)
IC697PWR711/713
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate for empty power supply
slot in second rack).
IC697CBL700
Note: For Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
10-5
Power Supplies
6
GFK-1448B
August 1997
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
Special Installation Instructions for
Floating Neutral (IT) Systems
Examples of Non-Floating Neutral System
When this power supply is installed in a system
where the Neutral line is not referenced to Protective
Earth Ground, these special installation instructions
must be followed to prevent damage to the power
supply.
Definition of Floating Neutral Systems
As described in this data sheet a Floating Neutral System
is a system of power distribution wiring where Neutral
and Protective Earth Ground are not tied together by a
negligible impedance. In Europe this is referred to as an
IT system (see IEC950). In a Floating Neutral System,
voltages measured from input terminals to protective
earth ground may exceed 264 Volts AC maximum input
voltage as specified in the power supply specifications in
this data sheet.
L
L1
N
N/PE
L2
PE
PE
These systems do not require these special installation
instructions.
Use These Special Installation Instructions
for Floating Neutral Systems
1.
The input power terminals should be wired
according to the instructions in this data sheet.
2.
The factory installed jumper between terminals 3
and 4 of the power supply module must be
removed.
3.
L1
Voltage surge protection devices, such as MOVs,
MUST be installed between the following
terminals:
N
h
h
Example of Floating Neutral System
PE
This system must be installed using the special
installation instructions on this page.
Systems in which one leg of the power distribution
wiring is tied to Protective Earth or a tap between two
legs of the power distribution wiring is tied to
Protective Earth are not Floating Neutral Systems.
10-6
L1
From L1 to earth ground
From L2 (Neutral) to earth ground
The voltage surge devices must be rated such that the
system is protected from power line transients that
exceed Line voltage + 100V +(N–PE)MAX.
For example, in a 240 Volt AC system with neutral
floating 50V above earth ground, the transient
protection should be rated at:
240V + 100V +50V = 390V
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
7
Power Supply Module, 100W, 120/240 VAC or 125 VDC
The following statements are required to appear for
Class I Div 2 Hazardous Locations.
1.
EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO
CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2
HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR
USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C,
D OR NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GFK-1448B
August 1997
2.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY
IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.
3.
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - DO
NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS
POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON-HAZARDOUS.
10-7
1
Power Supplies
IC697PWR720
11
Power Supply Adapter Module
GFK-0626D
August 1997
Power Supply Adapter Module (IC697PWR720)
datasheet GFK-0626D
Features
H
H
H
H
a44940
Interfaces an external power supply to an IC697 rack
Single-slot module
Plugs into power supply slot in rack
Easy connection to power supply
Functions
This Power Supply Adapter Module (PSA) for the
IC697 I/O system is a single-slot module that plugs into
the power supply slot, which is the leftmost slot in an
IC697 rack. The PSA module must be connected to an
external power supply through a cable. The external
power supply can be an IC697 power supply module
(see GFK-0717), or other external power supply.
The +5, +12, and –12 VDC outputs, as well as the 5V
remote sense, which are generated by an external
power supply are connected to the IC697 rack
backplane through the PSA. The maximum currents
that can be supplied to the backplane through the PSA
are: 18 amps on the +5 volt output, 2 amps on the +12
volt output, and 1 amp on the –12 volt output.
The PSA monitors the +5 volt output and the ttl
compatible Input Power OK signal (TTL) from the
external power supply. The Input Power OK signal
(TTL) indicates that the external power supply input
voltage is adequate to maintain hold-up time for an
orderly system shutdown. The PSA also develops two
backplane signals, ACFAIL* and SYSRESET*, which are
for the power-up/power-down sequence.
The external power supply must provide adequate
hold-up time (5.05 milliseconds minimum, per
ANSI/IEEESTD1014-1987) as well as an Input Power
OK signal (TTL) to ensure an orderly system shutdown
when power is removed.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
NC
1PL–1
0V
1PL–2
0V
1PL–3
0V
1PL–4
0V
1PL–5
5V
1PL–6
5V
1PL–7
5V
1PL–8
5V
1PL–9
CKT
NAME
CKT
NAME
TERM
NO
TERM
NO
NC
1PL–10
12V
1PL–11
12V
1PL–12
5VS
1PL–13
0VS
1PL–14
TTL
1PL–15
JP1
1PL–16
JP0
1PL–17
NC
1PL–18
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
PWR 720
WARNING
EVEN IF THE POWER SUPPLY
IS SWITCHED OFF, HAZARDOUS
VOLTAGES FROM USER FIELD
WIRING MAY STILL BE PRESENT
ON THE I/O TERMINAL BOARDS
AS WELL AS THE POWER
SUPPLY TERMINAL BOARD.
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN
HANDLING THE POWER SUPPLY
AND I/O MODULES AS WELL AS
ANY WIRING CONNECTED TO
THEM IN ORDER TO PREVENT
PERSONAL INJURY.
WARNING
DO NOT REMOVE OR INSERT
MODULES WITH POWER APPLIED.
PERSONAL INJURY, SYSTEM
MALFUNCTION AND/OR DAMAGE
TO THE EQUIPMENT MAY OCCUR.
MODULE IC697PWR720
LABEL44A726758–504R01
It is recommended that the external power supply have
a +5V Remote Sense. When the Remote Sense is
connected to the PSA terminal board (positive remote
sense to +5VS and negative to 0VS) the +5 volts at the
backplane will be regulated to the level set by the power
supply.
11-1
Power Supplies
2
GFK-0626D
August 1997
Power Supply Adapter Module
The LED indicator on the PSA is ON when the +5 volt
output is in regulation at the backplane and the TTL
signal from the power supply indicates that the power
supply input voltage is adequate to maintain hold-up
time for an orderly system shutdown. This TTL signal
can be positive or negative logic. Two terminals on the
PSA terminal board (JP1 and JP0) are available for
selecting the logic state. If positive logic (Input Power
OK if TTL = high), no jumper is required; if negative
logic (Input Power OK if TTL = low), a jumper is
required between terminals JP1 and JP0.
Mounting
The Power Supply Adapter is a single-slot module that
plugs into the power supply slot, which is the leftmost
slot of an IC697 rack. It connects to the external power
supply module through a cable that has one end
connected to the power supply. The free end of the
cable should have spring spade or ring lugs which must
be connected to designated terminals on a terminal
board on the Power Supply Adapter. This terminal
board is accessed by opening the hinged door on the
Power Supply Adapter module.
Operation of the Power Supply Adapter
This Power Supply Adapter Module operates from +5
VDC power which it receives from the +5 VDC power
bus on the IC697 rack backplane.
Power Supply Adapter Module Door
The Power Supply Adapter door can easily be opened
by grasping the upper left corner of the door with your
right thumb or a fingernail and gently pulling the door
towards you. Use care when opening the door since
pulling from the bottom can cause the hinge or the door
to break.
Dual Rack Operation
A single external power supply can provide power for
two racks. In this application, the PSA must be installed
in the first rack. For detailed information on this
application, refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual.
a44936
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎ Î ÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
Î Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎ
Î Î
LOGICPOWER
POWERSUPPLY
POWERSUPPLY
ADAPTER
OK
OK
OK
OK
RUN
PGMRACTIVE
USER 1
CH 1 OK
ENABLED
BUSACTIVE
USER 2
CPU
BUS
PROGRAMMABLE
Bus
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
OUTPUT
TRANSMITTER
COPROCESSOR
CONTROLLER
120VAC
120VAC
120VAC
120VAC, 05A
120VAC,.05A
PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROLLER
Figure 1. Location of Power Supply Adapter Module in an IC697 PLC Installation
11-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Power Supplies
3
GFK-0626D
August 1997
Power Supply Adapter Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697PWR720 [
+5.02 to +5.12 VDC (5.07 volts nominal)
Power Supply Voltage to Rack Backplane:
+11.58 to +12.42 VDC (+12 volts nominal)
–11.4 to –12.6 VDC (–12 volts nominal)
Power Supply Current to Rack
+5 VDC at 18A
Backplane: (maximum with PSA only)
+12 VDC at 2A
–12 VDC at 1A
Current Required from 5 V Bus
50 mA (.250W)
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, European Union), refer to Installation requirements for Conformance to Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Power Supply Adapter module
Power Supply Extension Cable (includes cable and faceplate
for vacant power supply slot in second rack)
Catalog Number
IC697PWR720
IC697CBL700
Note: For Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
11-3
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU731
12
GFK-0159J
August 1997
PLC CPUs
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU731)
datasheet GFK-0159J
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Single slot CPU.
512 inputs and outputs (any mix).
Up to 8K analog I/O.
0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
12 MHz, 80C186 microprocessor.
Supports IC660/IC661) and IC697 I/O products
Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based software products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the
SNP port.
D 32 Kbyte battery-backed CMOS memory (fixed
D
D
D
D
D
D
a44717g
size).
Configurable data and program memory.
Battery-backed calendar clock.
Three position operation mode switch.
Password controlled access.
Three status LEDs.
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set).
D Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 731 is a single slot PLC CPU which resides in
an IC697CHS PLC rack. The CPU 731 is programmed
and configured by MS-DOS or Windows based programming software to perform real time control of machines, processes and material handling systems. The
CPU 731 communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface
modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller
for IC660/661 I/O products, Communications modules,
I/O Link Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete
and analog I/O modules.
Module operation may be controlled by the three position switch or remotely by an attached programmer and
programming software. CPU status is indicated by
three green LEDs on the front of the module.
OK
RUN
ENABLED
CENTRAL
PROCESSING
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
CPU 731
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU731
LABEL
44A726758–101
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
12-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0159J
August 1997
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
a42786g
PARALLEL
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
The CPU is now ready to be programmed After the
program has been verified the toggle switch may be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
a42751g
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
RACK 7
B
R
M
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
CONNECTOR
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU –
BRM –
BTM –
GBC/NBC –
PCM –
PS –
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73*
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
CPU 731
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration
Installation
MODULE FUNCTION
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Be sure that power to the PLC is turned off before
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU731
LABEL
44A726758–101
CPU 731
installing the CPU 731 module
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors
on the module (see Figure 2).
12-2
Figure 2. CPU 731- Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0159J
August 1997
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit
Programmer Connection, Parallel
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
connect the programmer to the top port connector on
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
programming functions.
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
information on the programmer connection via
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
This port provides a serial connection to a Standard
Serial COM port, or to a Work Station Interface board
installed in the programming computer. For more information on serial communications, see references 1,
2, and 3.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
SERIAL
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
a43591g
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
Batteries
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
12-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0159J
August 1997
12 MHz, 32 Kbyte Central Processing Unit
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU731 [
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Battery Shelf Life
6 months nominal without applied power
Memory Retention
[
Current required from 5V Bus
1.0 Amp
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
± 3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock
± .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible, programmer serial attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central processing Unit, 12 MHz, 32 Kbyte, Fixed
IC697CPU731
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
12-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU771
13
GFK-0349F
August1997
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU771)
datasheet GFK-0349F
Features
D Single slot CPU
Program and data memory is available by the attachment of an expansion memory board with up to 512
Kbytes of battery-backed CMOS RAM.
D 2K inputs and outputs (any mix)
D Up to 8K analog I/O
a44714
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function
D 12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor
D SupportsIC660/IC661 and IC697 PLC
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
OK
RUN
ENABLED
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port.
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
memory in the same slot
D Configurable data and program memory
D Battery-backed calendar clock
D Three position operation mode switch
D Password controlled access
D Three Status LEDs
D Software Configuration (No DIP switches or
jumpers)
D Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 771 is a single slot PLC CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-DOS or Windows
based programming software to perform real time control of machines, processes and material handling systems.
The CPU 771 CPU communicates with I/O and smart
option modules over the rack-mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/661 I/O and Communications
modules, in addition to all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O modules (see the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual for more information on supported modules).
CENTRAL
PROCESSING
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
CPU 771
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU771
LABEL
44A726758–106
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
13-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0349F
August1997
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position switch on the module or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
CPU status is indicated by three green LEDs on the
front of the module.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL
a42786g
RACK 0
P
S
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
–
–
–
–
–
–
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
please refer to the Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
programming software, for additional guidelines.
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
IC66* BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73*
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration
D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable Programmer Controller Installation Manual (See reference 5).
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Install expansion memory.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
D Put toggle switch in Stop position.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See figure 1)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the
top LED stays on and the middle and bottom LEDs
are off. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch and the state of the program.
Expansion Memory
The CPU 771 must have a CMOS expansion memory
board. The CMOS expansion memory board provides
CMOS RAM memory of 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes.
The battery which supports this memory is located on
the main CPU board housing. (See figure 2)
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on
the CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
programmer (See reference 1).
Installation
Programmer Connection, Parallel
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in Figure
1. Consult Reference 1 for a description of programming functions.
13-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0349F
August1997
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit
a42711
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming
computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your application.
CPU 771
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
P
S
C B
P T
U M
a43591g
SERIAL
RACK 0
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
NOTE
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
MODULE
IC697CPU771
LABEL
44A726758–106
Figure 2. CPU 771 - Location of Major Features
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
t
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 7
MODULE FUNCTION
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
CPU 771
This port provides a serial connection to a Work Station
Interface board installed in the programming computer.
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
B
R
M
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
13-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0349F
August1997
12 MHz, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response.
Batteries
If during power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK LED (top) will not stay on.
Specific indication of a low battery state is detailed in
Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery.
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference
1
2
5
Title
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPU771 [
Battery
Shelflife
Memory retention
10 years at 20_C (68_F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current Required from 5V Bus
1.1 Amps with Expansion Memory (all sizes) 1.2 Amps
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
Serial connection to programmer
RS422compatible
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
VME
[
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CPU, 12 Mhz, Expandable
IC697CPU771
64 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM713
128 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM715
256 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM717
512 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM719
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
13-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU772
14
GFK-0588E
August 1997
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point
Central Processing Unit
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU772)
datasheet GFK-0588E
Features
D Supports floating point calculations.
Programmable Controller Installation Manual for more
information on supported modules).
D Single slot CPU.
D 2K inputs and outputs (any mix).
a44793g
D Up to 8K analog I/O.
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
D 12 MHz, 80C186 microprocessor.
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O.
OK
RUN
ENABLED
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windows based software products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the
SNP port.
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
expansion memory in the same slot.
D Configurable data and program memory.
D Battery-backed calendar clock.
D Three position operation mode switch.
D Password controlled access.
D Three status LEDs.
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or
jumpers to set).
D Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 772 is a single slot PLC CPU which allows
floating point calculations. The CPU 772 is programmed
and configured by MS-DOS or WIndows based programming software to perform real time control of machines, processes and material handling systems. The
CPU 772 communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN interface
modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller
for IC660/IC661 I/O products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface, and all of the IC697 family of
discrete and analog I/O modules (see the applicable
CENTRAL
PROCESSING
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
CPU 772
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU772
LABEL
44A726758–123R01
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
14-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0588E
August 1997
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
Program and data memory for the CPU 772 is available
by attachment of an expansion memory board with
either 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
CMOS RAM.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position switch or remotely by an attached programmer and programming software. CPU status is
indicated by three green LEDs on the front of the
module.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL
a42786g
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
–
–
–
–
–
–
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
IC66* BUS CONTROLLER, BEM73*
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable programmable controller
hardware installation manual.
D Be sure that power to the PLC is turned off before
installing the CPU 772 module
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector en-
suring that the mating screws remain aligned with
their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if
connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). After the program has been
verified the toggle switch may be moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The LEDs indicate
the position of the toggle switch, memory protection
status, and the state of the program.
Expansion Memory
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
14-2
The CPU 772 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
memory board which provides CMOS RAM memory
of 64K, 128K, 256K or 512 Kbytes. The battery which
supports this memory is located on the main CPU board
(see Figure 2). Installation of a CMOS expansion
memory board on the CPU will require initialization of
the CPU with the programmer (see Reference 2).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0588E
August 1997
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
a44794g
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
This port provides a serial connection to a Standard
Serial COM port, or to a Work Station Interface board
installed in the programming computer.
CPU 772
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
MODULE FUNCTION
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU772
LABEL
44A726758–123R01
CPU 772
Figure 2. CPU 772 - Location of Major Features
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
programmer is connected to the top port connector on
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
programming functions.
t
Serial Port
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
SERIAL
a43591g
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTION
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
14-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0588E
August 1997
12 MHz Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
fore removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 3.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery be-
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU772 [
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Battery Shelf Life
6 months nominal without applied power
Memory Retention
[
Current required from 5V Bus
1.2 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
± 3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock
± .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CPU 772, 16 MHz, Expandable, Floating Point
IC697CPU772
64 Kbyte, CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM713
128 Kbyte, CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM715
256 Kbyte, CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM717
512 Kbyte, CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM719
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
14-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU781
15
GFK-0766D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU781)
datasheet GFK-0766D
Features
D Single slot CPU.
D 12K inputs and outputs (any mix).
D Up to 8K analog I/O.
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor.
D Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O products.
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port.
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
expansion memory in the same slot.
D Configurable data and program memory.
D Battery-backed calendar clock.
D Three position operation mode switch.
D Password controlled access.
D Keyswitch memory protection
D Four status LEDs.
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or
jumpers to set).
D Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 781 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which is programmed and configured by MSDOS or Windows based programming software to
perform real time control of machines, processes and
material handling systems.
The CPU 781 communicates with I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/O modules (see the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual for more information on supported modules).
a45156
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î ÎÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 781
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU781
LABEL
44A726758-128R01
Program and data memory for the CPU 781 is available
by the attachment of an expansion memory board with
either 128, 256 or 512 KBytes of battery-backed CMOS
RAM, or 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes of Non-volatile flash.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
15-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0766D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
front of the module.
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the memory board
PARALLEL
a42786g
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
NOTE
B
R
M
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
RACK 7
B
R
M
Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable hardware installation manual.
with the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned
with their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. After the program has been verified the
toggle switch may be moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, memory protection status,
and the state of the program.
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU BRM BTM GBC/NBC PCM PS -
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY,
PWR710/711/724/748
Expansion Memory
Installation
The CPU 781 must have a CMOS expansion memory
board. Expansion memory boards are available with
128 KBytes, 256 KBytes, 512 KBytes, and 256 KBytes
with 256 KBytes of non-volatile Flash memory. The
battery which supports the CMOS RAM memory is
located on the main CPU board. (See Figure 2).
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
Installation of an expansion memory board on the
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
programmer (See Reference 2).
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram
15-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0766D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Programmer Connection, Parallel
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
a45157
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
Serial Port
CPU 781
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM731
IC697MEM732
IC697MEM733
IC697MEM735
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU781
LABEL
44A726758-128R01
CPU 781
The programmer connects to the top port on the bus
transmitter (IC697BEM713) system interface module
for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only),
see Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
programming functions.
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
This port provides a serial connection to an IC647
communications interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the
Standard Serial COM port on the CPU to the serial port
on the programming computer, or other serial device,
through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
(IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter
(IC690ACC901). This connection can be made with
available cables or you may build cables to fit the needs
of your particular application. For more information on
serial communications, see Reference 3.
a43591g
SERIAL
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
G
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
B
R
M
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST
BRM IS 50 FEET (15 METERS) MAXIMUM.
ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 2. CPU 781 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
15-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0766D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
tion for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor func-
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU781 [
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Battery Shelf Life
6 months nominal without applied power
Memory Retention
Current required from 5V Bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
±3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock
±.01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
15-4
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
GFK-0766D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Central Processing Unit
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CPU 781, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable Memory
IC697CPU781
128 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM731
256 Kbyte with 256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash Memory, 32-Bit
CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM732
256 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM733
512 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
15-5
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU782
16
GFK-0767D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point
Central Processing Unit
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit (IC697CPU782)
datasheet GFK-0767D
Features
D Supportsfloating point calculations
D Single slot CPU.
D 12K inputs and outputs (any mix).
D Up to 8K analog I/O.
D 0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
D 16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor.
D SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts.
D Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port.
D Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
memory in the same slot.
D Configurable data and program memory.
D Battery-backed calendar clock.
D Three position operation mode switch.
D Password controlled access.
D Keyswitch memory protection
D Four status LEDs.
D Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to
set).
D Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 782 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The
CPU782 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS
or Windows based programming software to perform
real time control of machines, processes and material
handling systems.
The CPU 782 communicates with I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/Omodules.
a45154
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î Î
Î ÎÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 782
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT
CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU782
LABEL
44A726758-129R01
Program and data memory for the CPU 782 is available
by the attachment of an expansion memory board with
either 128, 256 or 512 KBytes of battery-backed CMOS
RAM, or 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes of Non-volatile flash.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
16-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0767D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data cn
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only(i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
front of the module.
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
PARALLEL
a42786g
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
NOTE
B
R
M
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU BRM BTM GBC/NBC PCM PS -
SELECTED CPU MODULE
BUS RECEIVER MODEL, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODEL, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY,
PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Diagram
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
16-2
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable hardware installation manual.
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the memory board
with the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned
with their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
are off.
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the
program.
Expansion Memory
The CPU 781 must have a CMOS expansion memory
board. Expansion memory boards are available with
128 KBytes, 256 KBytes, 512 KBytes, and 256 KBytes
with 256 KBytes non-volatile flash memory. The battery which supports the CMOS RAM memory is located on the main CPU board. (See Figure 2).
Installation of an expansion memory board on the
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the
programmer (See Reference 2).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0767D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
Programmer Connection, Parallel
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
a45155
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
Serial Port
CPU 782
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM731
IC697MEM732
IC697MEM733
IC697MEM735
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU781
LABEL
44A726758-129R01
CPU 782
The programmer connects to the top port on the bus
transmitter (IC697BEM713) system interface module
for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only),
see Figure 1. Consult Reference 2 for a description of
programming functions.
Figure 2. CPU 782 - Location of Major Features
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 3.
This port provides a serial connection to an IC647
communications interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the
Standard Serial COM port on the CPU to the serial port
on the programming computer, or other serial device,
through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter
(IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter
(IC690ACC901). This connection can be made with
available cables or you may build cables to fit the needs
of your particular application. For more information on
serial communications, see Reference 3.
SERIAL
a43591g
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
G
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
16-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0767D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Batteries
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Configuration
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU782 [
Batter
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power
Shelf Life
Memory Retention
Current required from 5V Bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock
±3.5 seconds per day
±.01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
16-4
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point Central Processing Unit
GFK-0767D
August 1997
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CPU 782, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Expandable, Floating Point
IC697CPU782
128 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM731
256 Kbyte with 256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash Memory, 32-bit
CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM732
256 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM733
512 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
16-5
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPM915
17
GFK-1119B
August 1997
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory (IC697CPM915)
datasheet GFK-1119B
Features
D Single slot CPU
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
same slot
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Supports floating point calculations
12K inputs and outputs (any mix)
Up to 8K analog I/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
32 MHz, 80486DX microprocessor
Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O)
Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port.
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
D Four status LEDs
D Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
D Reference information inside front door
D In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
ules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/Omodules.
a47065
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 915
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
The CPM 915 Central Processing Unit (CPU) is a
single slot programmable controller CPU which allows floating point calculations. The CPM915 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS or WIndows
based programming software to perform real time
control of machines, processes and material handling
systems. It communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
32 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
MODULE
IC697CPM915
LABEL
44A726758-146R01
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modr MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
17-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1119B
August 1997
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PARALLEL
a42786g
RACK 0
P
S
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY,
PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. Typical Programmable Controller System
Configuration
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CPM 915 is provided by a memory board with 1M byte of batterybacked CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the CPM 915 module and does not need to
be ordered separately.
Flash Memory
This module uses flash memory for storage of the operating system firmware (Note that this module does not
support storage of user program in the flash memory). This
allows updates of the firmware without disassembling the module or replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a PC
17-2
compatible computer to the serial port of the module
and running the Loader software included with the
firmware floppy disk.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an attached programmer and programming software. Program and configuration data can be locked through
software passwords or manually by the memory protect
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
program and configuration data can only be changed by
a programmer connected parallel only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a CPU is indicated by the
four green LEDs on the front of the module.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable programmable controller
hardware installation manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 2).
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put the keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure that rack power is off.
D Install the CPM 915 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top LED should
blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the top LED stays on and the second and third
LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is
in the OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed regardless of key position).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1119B
August 1997
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the
program.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
a47066
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 915
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
32 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPM915
LABEL
44A726758–146R01
CPM 915
Figure 2. CPM 915 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS based programmer
only) the programmer is connected to the top port on
the Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown
in Figure 1. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
programming functions.
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a
Work Station Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application. See reference 3 for more information on
serial communications.
SERIAL
a43591g
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
P
C
M
ONE
METER
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
B
R
M
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
50 FEET (15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS
MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
17-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1119B
August 1997
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Batteries
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface. For more detailed information on
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. Specific indication of a
low battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference
17-4
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
32 MHz 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
GFK-1119B
August 1997
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPM915 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20° C (68° F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
2.8 Amps nominal
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
32 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
IC697CPM915
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
17-5
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPM925
18
GFK-1120D
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory (IC697CPM925)
datasheet GFK-1120D
Features
D Single slot CPU
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
same slot
Supports floating point calculations
12K inputs and outputs (any mix)
Up to 8K analog I/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor
Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O
Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
Four status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
a45673
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 925
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
Functions
The CPM 925 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The
CPM 925 CPU is programmed and configured by
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software
to perform real time control of machines, processes
and material handling systems. It communicates with
I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted
backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way
of the VME C.1 Standard format.
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
MODULE
IC697CPM925
LABEL
44A726758-147R01
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/Omodules.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
18-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1120D
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
PARALLEL
a42786g
RACK 0
P
S
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. Typical Programmable Controller System
Configuration
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CPM 925 is provided
by a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed
CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of
the CPM 925 module and is included with the module..
Flash Memory
This module uses flash memory for storage of the operating system firmware (this module does not support
storage of user program in the flash memory). This allows
updates of the firmware without disassembling the
module or replacing EPROMs. The operating system
firmware is updated by connecting a PC compatible
computer to the module’s serial port and running the
Loader software included with the firmware floppy
disk.
18-2
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
PROGRAMMER
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked through
software passwords or manually by the memory protect
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
program and configuration data can only be changed by
a programmer connected parallel only (to the Bus
Transmitter module). The status of a CPU is indicated
by the four green LEDs on the front of the module.
The CPM 925 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40_C
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 2).
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure that rack power is off.
D Install the CPM 925 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
D Turn on power.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1120D
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
a45674
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 925
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPM925
LABEL
44A726758–147R01
CPM 925
third LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the
keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU
can be programmed regardless of key position). After
the program has been verified the toggle switch can be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. See Reference 1 for a description of
programming functions.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
SERIAL
a45301
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
OR
N
B
C
*
IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
BLOCK
NOTE
RACK 7
B
R
M
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEETMAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
Serial Port
Figure 2. CPM 925 - Location of Major Features
The module should power up and the top LED should
blink. When the diagnostics have completed
successfully, the top LED stays on and the second and
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU (see Figure 3).
This port provides a serial connection to a Work Station
Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming
18-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1120D
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application. See reference 3 for more information on
serial communications.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to
configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual
module and rack configuration at power-up and
periodically during operation. The actual
configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU
alarm processor function for configured fault
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
configuration functions.
Table 1. References
Reference
18-4
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit, 1 Mbyte Memory
GFK-1120D
November 1999
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPM925 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.3 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 40_C (32_F to 104_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
IC697CPM925
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult
the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
18-5
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPX772
19
GFK-1429F
November 1999
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX772)
datasheet GFK-1429F
Features
D Single slot CPU with three serial ports
D Provides 512 Kbyte of battery-backed RAM
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
memory in the same slot
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later
Supports floating point calculations
2K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K
analogI/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O
Programmed by MS-DOSr software products, or
Windowsr based software products running on
Windowsr 95 or Windows NT,r over Ethernet
TCP/IP, or through an SNP port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
The CPX772 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
Windows based programming software to perform
real time control of machines, processes and material
handling systems. It communicates with I/O and
smart option modules over the rack-mounted
backplane using the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link
Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
r
a45720
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
CPX 772
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USEIC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX772
LABEL
44A726758–151R01
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
19-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1429F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
PARALLEL
a45677
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
NOTE
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
the module’s serial port and running the software included with the firmware upgrade kit.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). CPU status is
indicated by the seven green LEDs on the front of the
module.
Operating Temperature
For continuous operation above 50 degrees C, such as
in a minimum size enclosure with no air flow, derating is necessary for the 100W AC/DCPower Supply
(PWR711), and the 90W DC Power Supplies
(PWR724/PWR748), as shown in the chart below.
PWR724
PWR748 PWR711
90W
100W
75W
90W
60W
80W
60W
50W
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example
40W
30W
User RAM Memory
20W
10W
The CPX772 has a built-in memory board with 512K
of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for user data
(program, configuration, and register data) storage.
10
User Flash Memory
The CPX772 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash
memory for user data (program, configuration, register data) storage. Use of this flash memory is optional.
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing
the operating system firmware. This allows firmware
to be updated without disassembling the module or
replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is
19-2
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
20
30
40
50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C )
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1429F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
If the PLC installation must comply with supported
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software, for additional guidelines.
Installation should not be attempted without referring
to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connecD
D
D
D
D
tors on the module (see Figure 2).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure that rack power is off.
Install the CPX 772 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position).
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position; RUN WITH OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, status of serial port activity,
and the state of the program.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
CPX 772
STATUS
LEDS
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
512 KBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
User‘s Manual for a description of programming
functions.
a45721
MODULE
IC697CPX772
LABEL
44A726758–151R01
CPX 772
Figure 2. CPX 772 - Location of Major Features
19-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1429F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
SERIAL
a45301
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
OR
N
B
C
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. It has a
6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
Table 1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
*
Signal
Name
Description
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
1*
2
3
4
5
6
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
BLOCK
NOTE
RACK 7
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
Programmer Connection, Serial Ports
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a
programming computer or other serial devices.
Starting with Firmware Release 8.00, support for
program Load/Store operations and Datagrams was
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
Product Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Protocol
SNP (Slave)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
No
No
No
Break-Free SNP (Slave)
19-4
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
D Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible,
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female Dconnector. Pin-out information can be found in the
IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
GFK-1429F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
Three of the LED indicators on the front of the CPX
772 provide the status of serial port activity on the
CPU without having a terminal connected. The
LEDs are labeled as P1, P2, and P3 to correspond to
the applicable port.
The connection from a CPU serial port to the serial
port on a programming computer or other serial
device requires a serial cable and, for Ports 2 and 3, a
converter. This connection can be made with the
IC690ACC901 cable kit (includes cable and
miniconverter) or you may build cables to fit the
needs of your particular application. See the IC697
PLC Installation Manual for more information on serial
communications, cables, and converters.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
information on the programmer connection via
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software,
although the MS-DOS software does not support all
features, such as Bulk Memory Area (BMA), which
requires the Windows software version 2.2 or later.
See the IPI shipped with this module for
programming software feature support details. There
are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during
operation. The actual configuration must be the same
as the programmed configuration. Deviations are
reported to the CPU alarm processor function for
configured fault response. Refer to the applicable
Programming Software User‘s Manual for a description
of configuration functions.
19-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1429F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Point, 512 Kbyte (Slow) Memory
Central Processing Unit
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Removing a Module
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
The instructions listed below should be followed
when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Table 3. Specifications for IC697CPX772 [
Battery: Memory retention
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F)
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
VME Compatibility
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
Battery: Shelf life
[
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 4. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbyte Memory
IC697CPX772
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option please consult the factory for price and availability.
19-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPX782
20
GFK-1431F
November 1999
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX782)
datasheet GFK-1431F
Features
D Single slot CPU with three serial ports
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
same slot
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later
Supports floating point calculations
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K
analogI/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O
Programmed by MS-DOSr software products, or
Windowsr based software products running on
Windowsr 95 or Windows NT,r over Ethernet
TCP/IP, or through an SNP port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
Three Series Ninety Protocol (SNP Slave) ports
Functions
The CPX 782 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
Windows based programming software to perform
real time control of machines, processes, and material
handling systems. It communicates with I/O and
smart option modules over a rack-mounted backplane
using the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link
Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
r
a45722
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
CPX 782
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USEIC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX782
LABEL
44A726758–152R01
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
20-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1431F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
PARALLEL
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
a45677
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ONE
METER
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
ONE
METER
P
S
LEGEND
RACK 7
B
R
M
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is
updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
the module’s serial port and running the software included with the firmware upgrade kit.
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
Î
Î
Î
Î
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
front of the module.
Operating Temperature
For continuous operation in a minimum size enclosure with no air flow, derating is necessary for the
100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711), and the 90W
DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) as shown in
the chart below.
PWR724
PWR748 PWR711
90W
100W
75W
90W
60W
80W
60W
50W
40W
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example
30W
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
20W
User RAM Memory
The CPX782 has a built-in memory board with 1
Mbyte of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for
user data (program, configuration, and register data)
storage.
User Flash Memory
The CPX782 has 256K of built-in flash memory for
user data (program, configuration, and register data)
storage. Use of this flash memory is optional.
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing
the operating system firmware . This allows firmware
to be updated without disassembling the module or
20-2
10W
10
20
30
40
50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C )
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1431F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
If the PLC installation must comply with supported
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software, for additional guidelines.
Installation should not be attempted without referring
to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connecD
D
D
D
D
tors on the module (see Figure 2).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure that rack power is off.
Install the CPX 782 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position).
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position; RUN WITH OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, status of serial port activity,
and the state of the program.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
CPX 782
STATUS
LEDS
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
User‘s Manual for a description of programming
functions.
a45723
MODULE
IC697CPX782
LABEL
44A726758–152R01
CPX 782
Figure 2. CPX 782 - Location of Major Features
20-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1431F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
SERIAL
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
a45301
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. It has a
6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
OR
N
B
C
Table 1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
*
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
BLOCK
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
Name
Description
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
Programmer Connection, Serial Ports
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a
programming computer or other serial devices.
Starting with Firmware Release 8.00, support for
program Load/Store operations and Datagrams was
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
Product Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Protocol
SNP (Slave)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
No
No
No
Break-Free SNP (Slave)
20-4
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
D Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible,
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female, Dconnector. Pin-out information can be found in
the IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
GFK-1431F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
Three of the LED indicators on the front of the CPX
782 provide the status of serial port activity on the
CPU without having a terminal connected. The
LEDs are labeled as P1, P2, and P3 to correspond to
the applicable port.
The connection from a CPU serial port to the serial
port on a programming computer or other serial
device requires a serial cable and, for Ports 2 and 3, a
converter. This connection can be made with the
IC690ACC901 cable kit (includes cable and
miniconverter) or you may build cables to fit the
needs of your particular application. See the IC697
PLC Installation Manual for more information on serial
communications, cables, and converters.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
information on the programmer connection via
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software,
although the MS-DOS software does not support all
features, such as Bulk Memory Area (BMA), which
requires the Windows software version 2.2 or later.
See the IPI shipped with this module for
programming software feature support details. There
are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during
operation. The actual configuration must be the same
as the programmed configuration. Deviations are
reported to the CPU alarm processor function for
configured fault response. Refer to the applicable
Programming Software User‘s Manual for a description
of configuration functions.
20-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1431F
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
Central Processing Unit
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Removing a Module
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
The instructions listed below should be followed
when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Table 3. Specifications for IC697CPX782 [
Battery: Memory retention
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F)
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
VME Compatibility
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
Battery: Shelf life
[
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 4. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
IC697CPX782
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
20-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPX928
21
GFK-1433E
November 1999
2429.88/PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX928)
datasheet GFK-1433E
Features
D Single slot CPU with three serial ports
D Provides 6 Mbytes of battery-backed memory in
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
the same slot
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later
Supports floating point calculations
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K
analogI/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O
Programmed by MS-DOSr software products, or
Windowsr based software products running on
Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet
TCP/IP or through an SNP port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
The CPX 928 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
Windows based programming software to perform
real time control of machines, processes and material
handling systems. It communicates with I/O and
smart option modules over the rack-mounted
backplane using the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link
Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
r
a45724
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
CPX 928
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USEIC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX928
LABEL
44A726758–153R01
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
21-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1433E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL
RACK 0
P
S
a45677
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ Î
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
ONE
METER
P
S
LEGEND
RACK 7
B
R
M
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
without disassembling the module or replacing
EPROMs. The operating system firmware is updated
by connecting a PC compatible computer to the module’s serial port and running the software included
with the firmware upgrade kit.
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ Î
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example
User RAM Memory
The CPX928 has a built-in memory board with 6
Mbytes of battery-backed CMOS RAM memory for
user data (program, configuration, and register data)
storage.
User Flash Memory
The CPX928 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash
memory for user data (program, configuraton, and
register data) storage. Use of this flash memory is
optional.
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
front of the module.
Operating Temperature
The CPX 928 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 50_C
(122_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment.
If the PLC installation must comply with supported
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software, for additional guidelines.
This CPU uses flash memory for storing the operating
system firmware. This allows firmware to be updated
21-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1433E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
D Installation should not be attempted without referD
D
D
D
D
D
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 2).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure that rack power is off.
Install the CPX 928 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position).
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position; RUN WITH OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, status of serial port activity,
and the state of the program.
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
User‘s Manual for a description of programming
functions.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
a45727
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
CPX 928
STATUS
LEDS
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
6 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX928
LABEL
44A726758–153R01
CPX 928
Figure 2. CPX 928 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
21-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1433E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
SERIAL
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
a45301
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. It has a
6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
OR
N
B
C
Table 1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
*
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
BLOCK
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
1*
2
3
4
5
6
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
Programmer Connection, Serial Ports
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a
programming computer or other serial devices.
Starting with Firmware Release 8.00, support for
program Load/Store operations and Datagrams was
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
Product Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
SNP (Slave)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Break-Free SNP (Slave)
Yes
Yes
No
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
No
No
No
21-4
Description
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Protocol
Signal
Name
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
D Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible,
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female Dconnector. Pin-out information can be found in
the IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
Three of the LED indicators on the front of the CPX
928 provide the status of serial port activity on the
CPU without having a terminal connected. The
LEDs are labeled as P1, P2, and P3 to correspond to
the applicable port.
The connection from a CPU serial port to the serial
port on a programming computer or other serial
device requires a serial cable and, for Ports 2 and 3, a
converter. This connection can be made with the
IC690ACC901 cable kit (includes cable and
miniconverter) or you may build cables to fit the
needs of your particular application. See the IC697
PLC Installation Manual for more information on serial
communications, cables, and converters.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GFK-1433E
November 1999
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
information on the programmer connection via
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software,
although the MS-DOS software does not support all
features, such as Bulk Memory Area (BMA), which
requires the Windows software version 2.2 or later.
See the IPI shipped with this module for programming software feature support details. There are no
DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system.
The CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration at power-up and periodically during operation.
The actual configuration must be the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to
the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault
response. Refer to the applicable Programming Software User‘s Manual for a description of configuration
functions.
21-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1433E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte (Medium) Memory
Central Processing Unit
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Removing a Module
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
The instructions listed below should be followed
when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Table 3. Specifications for IC697CPX928 [
Battery: Memory retention
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 50_C (32_F to 122_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
VME Compatibility
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
Battery: Shelf life
[
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 4. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 6 Mbyte Memory
IC697CPX928
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
21-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPX935
22
GFK-1435E
November 1999
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit (IC697CPX935)
datasheet GFK-1435E
Features
D Single slot CPU with three serial ports
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
same slot
Contains 256K of non-volatile user flash memory
Supports BMA in release 7.92 and later
Supports floating point calculations
12K inputs and outputs (any mix), and up to 8K
analogI/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
Supports IC66 (can be IC660 or IC661) and IC697 I/O
Programmed by MS-DOSr software products, or
Windowsr based software products running on
Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet
TCP/IP or through an SNP port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch
memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
The CPX 935 is a single slot PLC CPU that is
programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
Windows based programming software to perform
real time control of machines, processes, and material
handling systems. It communicates with I/O and
smart option modules over a rack mounted backplane
using the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link
Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
r
a45734
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
CPX 935
TOP
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX935
LABEL
44A726758–154R01
MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
22-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1435E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
PARALLEL
RACK 0
P
S
a45677
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
C B
P T
U M
ONE
METER
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
P
C
M
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ Î
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 6
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
B
R
M
ONE
METER
P
S
LEGEND
RACK 7
B
R
M
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
PCM
PS
-
to be updated without disassembling the module or
replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is
updated by connecting a PC compatible computer to
the module’s serial port and running the software included with the firmware upgrade kit.
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST
BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET
(2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ Î
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. PLC System Configuration Example
User RAM Memory
The CPX935 has a built-in memory board with 1
Mbyte of battery-backed Fast CMOS RAM memory
for user data (program, configuration, and register
data) storage.
User Flash Memory
The CPX935 has 256K of built-in, non-volatile flash
memory for user data (program, configuration, and
register data) storage. Use of this flash memory is
optional.
Firmware Storage in Flash Memory
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the
front of the module.
Operating Temperature
The CPX 935 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 50_C
(122_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment.
If the PLC installation must comply with supported
standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer
to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards, shipped with the PLC programming
software, for additional guidelines.
This CPU uses non-volatile flash memory for storing
the operating system firmware. This allows firmware
22-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1435E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
D Installation should not be attempted without referD
D
D
D
D
D
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 2).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure that rack power is off.
Install the CPX 935 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 1).
Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top left (OK)
LED should blink. When the diagnostics have
completed successfully, the top left LED stays on and
the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs are off. The
fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if
the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the
CPU can be programmed regardless of key position).
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
can be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position; RUN WITH OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN
WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The seven
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, status of serial port activity,
and the state of the program.
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only)
the programmer is connected to the top port on the
Bus Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) as shown in
Figure 1. Consult the applicable Programming Software
User‘s Manual for a description of programming
functions.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
a45727
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
CPX 935
STATUS
LEDS
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
TOP
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPX935
LABEL
44A726758–154R01
CPX 935
Figure 2. CPX 935 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
22-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1435E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
SERIAL
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
a45301
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. It has a
6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector, which is similar in
appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
OR
N
B
C
Table 10-1. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
*
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
IC66* BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
BLOCK
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
NOTE
RACK 7
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
*
FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
Programmer Connection, Serial Ports
The CPX 772 has three independent, on-board serial
ports. These ports, accessed by connectors on the
front of the module, are used for serial interface to a
programming computer or other serial devices.
Starting with Firmware Release 8.00, support for
program Load/Store operations and Datagrams was
added to Ports 1 and 2. Also, Break-Free SNP was
added as the default protocol for Ports 1 and 2 in
Firmware Release 8.00. For details, see the Important
Product Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Protocol
SNP (Slave)
Port 1 Port 2 Port 3
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
No
No
No
Break-Free SNP (Slave)
22-4
1*
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
Name
Description
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 10-2. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
D Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible,
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female Dconnector. Pin-out information can be found in the
IC697 PLC Installation Manual.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
Three of the LED indicators on the front of the
CPX935 provide the status of serial port activity on
the CPU without having a terminal connected. The
LEDs are labeled as P1, P2, and P3 to correspond to
the applicable port.
The connection from a CPU serial port to the serial
port on a programming computer or other serial
device requires a serial cable and, for Ports 2 and 3, a
converter. This connection can be made with the
IC690ACC901 cable kit (includes cable and
miniconverter) or you may build cables to fit the
needs of your particular application. See the IC697
PLC Installation Manual for more information on serial
communications, cables, and converters.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GFK-1435E
November 1999
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface. For more detailed
information on the programmer connection via
Ethernet TCP/IP, refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications (Type 2) User’s Manual, and the
Windows programming manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software,
although the MS-DOS software does not support all
features, such as Bulk Memory Area (BMA), which
requires the Windows software version 2.2 or later.
See the IPI shipped with this module for
programming software feature support details. There
are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during
operation. The actual configuration must be the same
as the programmed configuration. Deviations are
reported to the CPU alarm processor function for
configured fault response. Refer to the applicable
Programming Software User‘s Manual for a description
of configuration functions.
22-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1435E
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. Specific indication of
a low battery state is detailed in the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Removing a Module
The instructions listed below should be followed
when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPX935 [
Battery: Memory retention
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 50_C (32_F to 122_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
VME Compatibility
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
Battery: Shelf life
[
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast Memory
IC697CPX935
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
22-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CGR772
23
November 1999
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications (IC697CGR772)
datasheet
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Requiredfor CPU redundancy applications
Supports floating point calculations
Single slot CPU
2048 inputs and 2048 outputs
Up to 8K analog I/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts
Programmed by MS-DOSr (IC641) or Windowsr based
software products
Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed fast CMOS RAM
memory in the same slot
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Keyswitch memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set)
Reference information inside front door
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D Three Series 90 Protocol (SNP) ports
Redundancy Features
In addition to the above features, the CGR772 supports
the redundancy features listed below.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs
Synchronization of CPUs
Redundant backupcommunications
5.9 ms scan extension(nominal)
One scan switching (in most cases)
Configurablebackup data size
On-lineprogramming
On-line repair
No single point of failure (except for IC66* I/O Blocks and
bus stubs).
Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs
Program control switching
Symptom status bits and fault tables
Memory parity and checksums
CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
D
Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundancy Communications Module
a45728
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
CGR 772
TOP
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CGR772
LABEL
44A726758–155R01
R MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
23-1
PLC CPUs
2
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
November 1999
Functions
The CGR 772 is a single slot programmable controller CPU
which allows floating point calculations and is required for
CPU redundancy applications. The CGR772 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS or Windows programming software to perform real time control of machines, processes and material handling systems.
The CGR772 communicates with I/O and smart option
(specialty) modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules, and all
of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O modules.
PRIMARY UNIT
SECONDARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
31
P C
S P
U
B R G
T C B
M M C
or
N
B
C
30
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
PS
CPU
BTM
RCM
GBC or NBC
BLOCK
SCANNER
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Power Supply
Central Processor Unit
Bus Transmitter Module
Redundancy Communications Module
IC66* Bus Controller
IC66* I/O Block
Remote I/O Scanner
IC697PWR710/711/724/748
IC697CGR772
IC697BEM713
IC697RCM711
IC697BEM731/734
IC66*XXXYYY
IC697BEM733/735
Figure 1. Typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
User Memory
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Program and data memory for the CGR772 is provided
by a memory board with 512 KBytes of battery-backed
CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of
the CGR772 and is included with the module. This
memory board provides error checking through a CPU
checksum routine with detected parity errors being reported to the CPU as they occur.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an attached programmer and programming software. Program and configuration data can be locked through
software passwords or manually by the memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
program and configuration data can only be changed
by a programmer connected through parallel communications (that is, via the Bus Transmitter module). The
status of the CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs
on the front of the module.
23-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
November 1999
CPU Redundancy Systems
The CGR772 is used as the controller in a CPU Redundancy system. Two redundancy control methods can be
configured using the CGR772. The GHS method
(IC660/661 Hot Standby) uses multiple single bus
IC660/661I/O networks with one redundant controller
in each synchronized PLC. The GDB method
(IC660/661Dual Bus) uses multiple dual bus IC660/661
I/O networks with two redundant controllers in each
synchronized PLC. The location of the CGR772 modules in a typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system
is shown in Figure 1.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
please refer to the Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
programming software, for additional guidelines.
Installation should not be attempted without referring
to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery conD
D
D
D
D
nectors on the module.
Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure rack power is off.
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
Turn on power. The module should power up and
the top left (OK) LED should blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the top left LED
stays on and the second (RUN) and third (EN) LEDs
are off. The fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM PROTECT) is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF position.
The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). After the program has been
verified the toggle switch can be moved to the appropriate operation mode position; RUN WITH
OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The LEDs indicate the position of
the toggle switch, memory protection status, status
of serial port activity, and the state of the program.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
a45729
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
CGR 772
STATUS
LEDS
TOP
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232 (PIN 1 AT
TOP)
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
PIN 1
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
512 KBYTES
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
PIN 1
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CGR772
LABEL
44A726758–155R01
CGR 772
Figure 2. CGR 772 - Location of Major Features
23-3
PLC CPUs
4
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
November 1999
The programmer connection (shown below) is typically
made from CPU serial Port 3 to the serial port on the
programming computer, through an RS-422/RS-485 to
RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-422 to RS-232
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
the needs of your particular application. See the IC697
Programmable Controller Serial Communications Manual for
more information on serial communications.
Programmer Connection, Parallel Interface
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) system interface
module for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer
only) as shown in Figure 1
Connection to Serial Ports
The CGR772 has three on-board serial ports which
can be configured to behave as three independent
communications ports. These three ports are accessed
by connections on the front of the module for serial
interface to the programming computer, or other
serial serial devices.
Note
When configuring a CPU Redundancy system the programmer must be connected to the CPU in the Primary
unit to configure the Primary PLC and then moved to the
CPU in the Secondary PLC to configure the Secondary
PLC.
For more detailed information on configuration of Hot
Standby CPU Redundancy systems and
communications between PLCs in the system, refer to
the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide.
Ports 1 through 3 support SNP Slave protocol only. Ports 1
and 2 do not support program Load and Store or
Datagrams. For details, see the Important Product
Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SNP
Yes
Yes
Yes
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SERIAL
SECONDARY UNIT
PRIMARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
30
P
S
PROGRAMMER
C B R G
P T C B
M M C
U
or
N
B
C
31
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Figure 3. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration with Serial Connection to Programmer
23-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
H
CPU Serial Ports
Support for Port 1, Port 2, and Port 3 was provided
for the CGR772 in its initial release in October 1998
(equipped with firmware release 7.85).
H
Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. Port 1
has a 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector. This connector
is similar in appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
Table 10-3. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
1*
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
Name
Description
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front of the
November 1999
Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female Dconnector. Pin assignments are found in the IC697
PLC Installation Manual.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
module.
H
Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 10-4. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Configuration
This CPU and its I/O system are configured with MSDOS or Windows based programming software. There
are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during operation. The actual configuration must be the same as
the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference 1 (in Table 2.) for
a description of configuration functions.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics
a low battery is detected, the Module OK LED (top) will
not stay on. See the section on System Status References
in Chapter 2 of the IC697 PLC Reference Manual for
more details about detecting a low battery condition.
23-5
PLC CPUs
6
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
November 1999
Operation in High Ambient Temperatures
The CGR772 requires either forced air cooling or
limiting of system power for operating in ambient
temperatures greater than 50_C (122_F). A fan
capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should be located
beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the IC697 Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
For continuous operation above 50_C in a minimum
size enclosure without forced air cooling, it is necessary to limit system power. De-rating data for the
100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711) and the 90W
DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) is shown in
the chart below.
90W
100W
90W
60W
80W
The following instructions should be followed when removing a CGR772 module from its slot in a rack. If a
fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from the
rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU replaced. If
a failure is detected in the backup unit, you can simply
remove power from the CPU rack and replace the module.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
PWR724
PWR748 PWR711
75W
Removing a Module
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
60W
50W
40W
30W
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
20W
10W
10
20
30
40
50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C )
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CGR772 [
Battery
[
Shelf life
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F)
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to InstallationRequirements for Conformance to
Standards.
23-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
7
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 512 KByte Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
November 1999
Table 2. References
Reference
Title
1
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User ’s Guide
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 512 Kbytes CMOS RAM Memory
for CPU Redundancy applications
IC697CGR772
RedundancyCommunicationsModule
IC697RCM711
Bus TransmitterModule
IC697BEM713
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC
Rack FanAssembly, 240 VAC
Rack FanAssembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
23-7
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CGR935
24
GFK-1439C
November 1999
PLC CPUs
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications (IC697CGR935)
datasheet GFK-1439C
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Requiredfor CPU redundancy applications
Supports floating point calculation
Single slot CPU
12K inputs and 12K outputs (any mix)
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
96 MHz, 80486DX4 microprocessor
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts
Programmed by MS-DOSr or Windowsr based software
products
Supports 1 Mbyte of battery-backed fast CMOS RAM
memory in the same slot
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Keyswitch memory protection
Seven status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set)
Reference information inside front door
Three Series Ninety Protocol (SNP Slave) communications
ports
In addition to the above features, the CGR935 supports
the redundancy features listed below.
D
D
Symptom status bits and fault tables
Memory parity and checksums
D
D
CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundancy Communications Module
Up to 8K analog I/O
Redundancy Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs
Synchronization of CPUs
Redundant backupcommunications
4.7 ms scan extension
One scan switching (in most cases)
Configurablebackup data size
On-lineprogramming
On-line repair
No single point of failure (expect for IC66* I/O Blocks and
bus stubs)
Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs
a45734
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK P1
RUN P2
EN P3
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
CGR 935
TOP
OFF
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
O
N
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
O
P1
K
RU P2
N
E
P3
N
MEM PROON =TECT
OK, ENABLED,
RUN WITH
PROTECTEDOUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN
WITH
OUTPUTS
STOP
DISABLED
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING
OLD BATTERY.
USE
MODULE FUNCTION
IC697ACC701
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT
2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT
3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CGR935
LABEL
44A726758–158R0
1
Program control switching
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
24-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1439C
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
Functions
The CGR935 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations and is
required for CPU redundancy applications. The
CGR935 is programmed and configured by MS-DOS or
Windows programming software to perform real time
control of machines, processes and material handling
systems.
The CGR935 communicates with I/O and smart option (specialty) modules over the rack mounted backplane (IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus
Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications
modules, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and
analog I/O modules.
PRIMARY UNIT
SECONDARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
31
P C
S P
U
B R G
T C B
M M C
or
N
B
C
30
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
PS
CPU
BTM
RCM
GBC or NBC
BLOCK
SCANNER
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Power Supply
Central Processor Unit
Bus Transmitter Module
Redundancy Communications Module
IC66* Bus Controller
IC66* I/O Block
Remote I/O Scanner
IC697PWR710/711/724/748
IC697CGR935
IC697BEM713
IC697RCM711
IC697BEM731/734
IC66*XXXYYY
IC697BEM733/735
Figure 1. Typical Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
User Memory
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Program and data memory for the CGR935 is provided by a memory board with 1 MByte of batterybacked Fast CMOS RAM. This memory board is an
integral part of the CGR935 and is included with the
module. This memory board provides error checking
through a CPU checksum routine with detected parity errors being reported to the CPU as they occur.
Starting with firmware release 7.85 (October, 1998),
increased program memory size was made available.
See the Important Product Information (IPI) sheet,
GFK-1440, that ships with the module for details.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data
can only be changed by a programmer connected
through parallel communications (that is, via the Bus
Transmitter module). The status of the CPU is indicated by the seven green LEDs on the front of the
module.
24-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1439C
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
CPU Redundancy Systems
The CGR935 is used as the controller in a CPU Redundancy system. Two redundancy control methods can be
configured using the CGR 935. The GHS method
(IC660/661 Hot Standby) uses multiple single bus
IC660/661 I/O networks with one redundant controller
in each synchronized PLC. The GDB method uses multiple I/O networks with either single or dual busses in
each synchronized PLC with the capability of either
unit being activated with bumpless switch. The location
of the CGR935 modules in a typical Hot Standby CPU
Redundancy system is shown in Figure 1.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software, describes how to properly install the equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
please refer to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC programming software, for additional guidelines.
Do not attempt installation without referring to the
applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual
and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual.
the toggle switch, memory protection status, status
of serial port activity, and the state of the program.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
D
D
D
D
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ
CGR 935
STATUS
LEDS
TOP
RUN/STOP
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232 (PIN 1
AT TOP)
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
OK
P1
RUN
P2
EN
P3
MEM PROTECT
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
PIN 1
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
96 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
FACTORY TEST
ONLY
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
Put keyswitch in Memory Protect OFF position.
Make sure rack power is off.
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
Turn on power. The module should power up and
the top left (OK) LED should blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the top left
LED stays on and the second (RUN) and third (EN)
LEDs are off. The fourth (bottom left) LED (MEM
PROTECT) is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed
(if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed
regardless of key position). After the program has
been verified, the toggle switch can be moved to the
appropriate operation mode position; RUN WITH
OUTPUTS ENABLED, RUN WITH OUTPUTS DISABLED, or STOP. The LEDs indicate the position of
a45735
1 MBYTE (FAST)
MEMORY BOARD
SERIAL PORT 1
RS-232
SERIAL PORT 2
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
FACTORY TEST
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
PIN 1
SERIAL PORT 3
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CGR935
LABEL
44A726758–158R01
CGR 935
Figure 2. CGR 935 - Location of Major Features
24-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1439C
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
The programmer connection (shown below) is typically
made from CPU serial Port 3 to the serial port on the
programming computer, through an RS-422/RS-485 to
RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-422 to RS-232
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
the needs of your particular application. See the IC697
Programmable Controller Serial Communications Manual for
more information on serial communications.
Programmer Connection, Parallel Interface
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) for a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) as shown in Figure 1.
Connection to Serial Ports
The CGR935 has three on-board serial ports which can
be configured to behave as three independent
communications ports. These three ports are accessed
by connections on the front of the module for serial
interface to the programming computer, or other serial
devices.
Note
When configuring a CPU Redundancy system, the programmer must be connected to the CPU in the Primary
unit to configure the Primary PLC and then moved to
the CPU in the Secondary PLC to configure the Secondary PLC.
For more detailed information on configuration of Hot
Standby CPU Redundancy systems and
communications between PLCs in the system, refer to
the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’s Guide.
Ports 1 through 3 support SNP Slave protocol only. Ports 1
and 2 do not support program Load and Store or
Datagrams. For details, see the Important Product
Information sheet that ships with the module.
Protocols Supported
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SNP
Yes
Yes
Yes
SNPX
No
No
No
RTU
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
SERIAL
SECONDARY UNIT
PRIMARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
30
P
S
PROGRAMMER
C B R G
P T C B
M M C
U
or
N
B
C
31
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Figure 3. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration with Serial Connection to Programmer
24-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
CPU Serial Ports
Support for Port 1 and Port 2 was added in firmware
release 7.85 (October, 1998). Prior releases only
supported Port 3.
H Port 1, the top port, is RS-232 compatible. Port 1
has a 6-pin, female, RJ-11 connector. This connector
is similar in appearance (although larger) to modular jacks commonly used for telephones and modems.
Table 10-5. Port 1 RS-232 Signals
Pin
Number
1*
2
3
4
5
6
Signal
Name
Description
CTS
TXD
0V
0V
RXD
RTS
Clear To Send
Transmit Data
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
Receive Data
Request to Send
* Pin 1 is at the top of the connector as viewed from the front
of the module.
H Port 2, the center port, is RS-485 compatible and is
optocoupler isolated. Port 2 has a 15-pin, female
D-connector.
Table 10-6. Port 2 RS-485 Signals
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
1*
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Shield
NC
NC
NC
+5VDC
RTS(A)
SG
CTS(B‘)
RT
RD(A‘)
RD(B‘)
SD(A)
SD(B)
RTS(B’)
CTS(A’)
Description
Cable Shield
No Connection
No Connection
No Connection
Logic Power **
Differential Request to Send
Signal Ground
Differential Clear To Send
Resistor Termination
Differential Receive Data
Differential Receive Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Send Data
Differential Request To Send
Differential Clear To Send
*Pin 1 is at the bottom right of the connector as viewed from
the front of the module.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GFK-1439C
November 1999
** Note that Pin 5 provides Isolated +5 VDC power (100 mA
maximum) for powering external options.
H Port 3, the bottom port, is also RS-485 compatible
but is not isolated. Port 3 has a 15-pin, female Dconnector. Pin assignments are found in the IC697
PLC Installation Manual.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet
TCP/IP network requires installation of an Ethernet
Interface module in the PLC. This can be either the
Ethernet Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet
Interface (Type 2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting
your programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP
network you must set the IP address in the Ethernet
Interface. After setting the IP address, connect the
PLC and the programmer running Windows software
to the Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with MSDOS or Windows based programming software. There
are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the
system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during operation. The actual configuration must be the same as
the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference 1 (Table 2.) for a
description of configuration functions.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics
a low battery is detected the Module OK LED (top) will
not stay on. See the section ”System Status References”
in Chapter 2 of the IC697 PLC Reference Manual for
more details about detecting a low battery condition.
24-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1439C
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
Operation in High Ambient Temperatures
The CGR935 requires either forced air cooling or
limiting of system power for operating in ambient
temperatures greater than 50_C (122_F). A fan
capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should be located
beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the IC697 Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
For continuous operation above 50_C in a minimum
size enclosure without forced air cooling, it is necessary to limit system power. De-rating data for the
100W AC/DCPower Supply (PWR711), and the 90W
DC Power Supplies (PWR724/PWR748) is shown in
the chart below.
PWR724
PWR748 PWR711
90W
100W
75W
90W
60W
80W
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when removing a CGR935 module from its slot in a rack. If a
fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from the
rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU replaced. If
a failure is detected in the backup unit, you can simply
remove power from the CPU rack and replace the module.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
60W
from the rack.
50W
40W
30W
NORMAL OPERATING RANGE
WITH NO FORCED AIR
CIRCULATION
20W
10W
10
20
30
40
50 55 60
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ( C )
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CGR935 [
Battery
[
Shelf life
5 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.1 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 50_C (32_F to 122_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Ports
Port 1: RS-232 compatible
Port 2: RS-485 compatible (optocoupler isolated)
Port 3: RS-485 compatible (not isolated)
Programmer Serial Attachment, or other serial devices.
Protocols supported: SNP Slave only
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to InstallationRequirements for Conformance to
Standards.
24-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
7
GFK-1439C
November 1999
96 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, 1 MByte Fast Memory
Central Processing Unit for CPU Redundancy Applications
Table 2. References
Reference
Title
1
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User ’s Guide
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
96 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Fast CMOS RAM Memory
for CPU Redundancy applications
IC697CGR935
RedundancyCommunicationsModule
IC697RCM711
Bus TransmitterModule
IC697BEM713
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack FanAssembly, 120 VAC
Rack FanAssembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assemblt, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, please consult the factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
24-7
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU788
25
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPU788)
datasheet GFK-0806D
Features
D Single slot CPU.
D Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
expansion memory in the same slot. (Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes available for user’s application program and data).
Up to 352 discrete inputs and outputs (any mix,
simplex mode only); 112 voted discrete inputs, 80
voted discrete outputs.
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted
analog inputs
0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor.
Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in simplex mode only)
Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port.
Configurable data and program memory.
Battery-backed calendar clock.
Three position operation mode switch.
Password controlled access.
Remote programmer keyswitch memory
protection.
Four status LEDs.
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers).
Reference information inside front door.
Functions
For detailed information on TMR systems, see Reference 4, the IC660/661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
a45233
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 788
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
The CPU 788 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-DOS
or Windows based programming software for use in
Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O
and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the
VME C.1 Standard format.
The CPU 788 must be used in conjunction with a set of
C program blocks which provide Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It will
not operate unless these program blocks are included in
the loaded application program.
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU788
LABEL
44A726758-133R01
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
25-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661
I/O products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog
I/O modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Triple Genius Busses
Load
Triple Input Sensors
Figure 1. Typical GMR System Configuration
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CPU 788 is available by attaching an expansion memory board with
512 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS RAM. Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available
for the user application program and data.
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
please refer to the Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
programming software, for additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable programmable controller hardware installation manual.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
of a CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
front of the module.
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
Installation
D
D
D
D
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
25-2
the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
ensuring the mating screws remain aligned with
their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly tighten each.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure rack power is off.
Install in slot 1 of rack 0.
D Turn on power.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). After the program has been verified the toggle switch may be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
Expansion Memory
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
The CPU 788 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board
provides CMOS RAM memory of 512 Kbytes. Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available
for the user application program and data. The battery which supports this memory is located on the main
CPU board housing.
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the programmer (See Reference 2).
a45234
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 788
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM735
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference
1 for a description of programming functions.
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU788
LABEL
44A726758–133R01
CPU 788
Figure 2. CPU 788 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
25-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
a47100
PLC A
C
P
U
PLC B
PLC C
C
P
U
C
P
U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter
Multidrop cable is catalog number
IC690CBL714 (1 cable). Two cables
are needed for 3 CPUs.
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Programmer
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a
Work Station Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application. For more information on serial communications, see reference 3.
For more detailed information on configuration of
TMR systems and communications between PLCs in
25-4
the system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Configuration
Removing a Module
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
The instructions below should be followed when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference
t
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
IC660/IC661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
25-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-0806D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPU788 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20° C (68° F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory board)
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processor Unit, CPU 788
16 MHz, 32 Bit, Expandable for IC660/IC661 Triple
Modular Redundancy Systems
IC697CPU788
512 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult
the factory for price and availability.
25-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
26
GFK-0807D
August 1997
IC697CPU789
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPU789)
datasheet GFK-0807D
Features
D Single slot CPU.
D Supports 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
expansion memory in the same slot. (Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes available for user’s application program and data)
Up to 12K discrete inputs and outputs (any mix,
simplex mode only); 2048 voted discrete inputs,
2048 voted discrete outputs
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted
analog inputs
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor
Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in simplex mode only)
Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch memory
protection
Four status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door.
Functions
The CPU 789 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which is programmed and configured by MS-DOS
or Windows based programming software for use in
Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O
and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the
VME C.1 Standard format.
For detailed information on TMR systems, see Reference 4, the IC660/661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
The CPU 789 must be used in conjunction with a set of
C program blocks which provide Triple Modular Redundancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It will
not operate unless these program blocks are included in
the loaded application program.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
a45235
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 789
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU789
LABEL
44A726758-134R01
26-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0807D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface,
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Triple Genius Busses
Load
Triple Input Sensors
Figure 1. Typical GMR System Configuration
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CPU 789 is available by attaching an expansion memory board with
512 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS RAM. Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available
for the user application program and data.
manual, shipped with your PLC programming
software, describes how to properly install the
equipment. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives,
please refer to the Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC
programming software, for additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable programmable controller hardware installation manual.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and IC641 software. Program
and configuration data can be locked through software passwords or manually by the memory protect
keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position,
program and configuration data can only be changed
by a programmer connected parallel only (that is, via
the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a CPU is
indicated by the four green LEDs on the front of the
module.
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
Installation
D
D
D
D
D
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator,
or end user to properly install the PLC equipment for
safe and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
26-2
the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
ensuring the mating screws remain aligned with
their respective standoff.
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly tighten each.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
Make sure rack power is off.
Install in slot 1 of rack 0.
Turn on power.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0807D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs
are off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the
OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU can be programmed regardless of key position). After the program has been verified the toggle switch may be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
Expansion Memory
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
The CPU 789 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board
provides CMOS RAM memory of 512 Kbytes. Up to
approximately 200 Kbytes of this memory is available
for the user application program and data. The battery which supports this memory is located on the main
CPU board housing.
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the programmer (See Reference 2).
a45236
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 789
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM735
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
Programmer Connection, Parallel
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference
1 for a description of programming functions.
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU789
LABEL
44A726758–134R01
CPU 789
Figure 2. CPU 789 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
26-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0807D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
a47100
PLC A
C
P
U
PLC B
PLC C
C
P
U
C
P
U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter
Multidrop cable is catalog number
IC690CBL714 (1 cable). Two cables
are needed for 3 CPUs.
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Programmer
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 3. This port provides a serial connection to a
Work Station Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application. For more information on serial communications, see reference 3.
For more detailed information on configuration of
TMR systems and communications between PLCs in
26-4
the system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
GFK-0807D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Configuration
Removing a Module
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module
and rack configuration at power-up and periodically
during operation. The actual configuration must be
the same as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference
1 for a description of configuration functions.
The instructions below should be followed when removing a module from its slot in a rack.
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference
t
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
IC66* Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
26-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-0807D
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Expandable Central Processing Unit
for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPU789 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20° C (68° F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory board)
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processor Unit, CPU 789
16 MHz, 32 Bit, Expandable for IC660/IC661 Triple
Modular Redundancy Systems
IC697CPU789
512 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult
the factory for price and availability.
26-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPM790
27
GFK-1215B
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems (IC697CPM790)
datasheet GFK-1215B
Features
D Single slot CPU
D Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
same slot (up to 512 Kbytes available for use by
ladder diagram application program)
Supports floating point calculations
Up to 12K discrete inputs and outputs (any mix simplex mode only); 2048 voted discrete inputs, 2048
voted discrete outputs
Up to 8K analog inputs (simplex mode only) and
8K analog outputs (simplex mode only); 1024 voted
analog inputs
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor
Supports IC660/IC661 I/O (and IC697 I/O in simplex mode only)
Programmed by MS-DOSr, or Windowsr software
products running on Windowsr 95 or Windows
NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP
port.
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Remote programmer keyswitch memory
protection
Four status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches
or jumpers)
Reference information inside front door
In-system upgradable firmware
Functions
The CPM 790 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations. The CPM
790 is programmed and configured with MS-DOS or
Windows based programming software for use in
Emergency Shut-Down (ESD), fire and gas, and other
critical control applications. It communicates with I/O
and smart option modules over the rack mounted
backplane (IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of
the VME C.1 Standard format.
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
a47080
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 790
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADEABLE FIRMWARE.
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
MODULE
IC697CPM790
LABEL
44A726758-149R01
The CPM 790 must be used in conjunction with a
Standalone C program which provides Triple Modular
Redundancy (TMR) operating and autotest routines. It
will not operate unless this program is included in the
loaded application program.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
27-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1215B
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
For detailed information on TMR systems, see
Reference 4, the IC66* Modular Redundancy Flexible
Triple Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface,
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
a47059
Triple PLCs
Triple Genius Busses
Load
Triple Input Sensors
Figure 1. Typical GMR System Configuration
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CPM 790 is provided
by a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed
CMOS RAM. 512 Kbytes of this memory is available for the
user’s application program and data. This memory board is
an integral part of the CPM 790 module and is included
with the module.
Flash Memory
This module uses flash memory for storage of the
operating system firmware (this module does not support storage of user program in the flash memory). This
allows updates of the firmware without disassembling the module or replacing EPROMs. The operating system firmware is updated by connecting a
PC compatible computer to the module’s serial port
and running the Loader software included with the
firmware floppy disk.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer and programming software.
Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the
protected position, program and configuration data can
27-2
only be changed by a programmer connected parallel
only (to the Bus Transmitter module). The status of a
CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the front
of the module.
Operating Temperature
The CPM 790 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40_C
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters)
should be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing
the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on
the IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-1215B
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 2).
D Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure that rack power is off.
D Install the CPM 790 module in slot 1 of rack 0.
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top LED should
blink. When the diagnostics have completed
successfully, the top LED stays on and the second and
third LEDs are off. The fourth LED is off if the
keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now
ready to be programmed (if connected parallel, the CPU
can be programmed regardless of key position). After
the program has been verified the toggle switch can be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
Programmer Connection, Parallel
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
a47081
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPM 790
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
For a parallel interface (MS-DOS programmer only) the
programmer is connected to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713). Consult Reference
1 for a description of programming functions.
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADEABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPM790
LABEL
44A726758–149R01
CPM 790
Figure 2. CPM 790 - Location of Major Features
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
27-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1215B
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
a47100
PLC A
C
P
U
PLC B
PLC C
C
P
U
C
P
U
Multidrop Cable
RS–232/422
Converter
Multidrop cable is catalog number
IC690CBL714 (1 cable). Two cables
are needed for 3 CPUs.
Figure 3. System Configuration, Serial Connection to Programmer
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU (see Figure 3).
This port provides a serial connection to a Work Station
Interface board installed in the programming computer.
The serial connection can also be made from the serial
port on the CPU to the serial port on the programming
computer, or other serial device, through the
RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or
RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This
connection can be made with available cables or you
may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application. See reference 3 for more information on
serial communications.
For more detailed information on configuration of TMR
systems and communications between PLCs in the
27-4
system, refer to the Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple
Modular Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual.
Programmer Connection, Ethernet TCP/IP
Connecting your programmer via an Ethernet TCP/IP
network requires installation of an Ethernet Interface
module in the PLC. This can be either the Ethernet
Controller, IC697CMM741, or Ethernet Interface (Type
2), IC697CMM742. Before connecting your
programmer and PLC to the Ethernet TCP/IP network
you must set the IP address in the Ethernet Interface.
After setting the IP address, connect the PLC and the
programmer running Windows software to the
Ethernet Interface.
For more detailed information on Ethernet TCP/IP,
refer to the TCP/IP Ethernet Communications (Type 2)
User’s Manual, and the Windows programming
manual, GFK-1295.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
GFK-1215B
November 1999
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
MS-DOS or Windows based programming software.
There are no DIP switches or jumpers used to
configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual
module and rack configuration at power-up and
periodically during operation. The actual
configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU
alarm processor function for configured fault
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
configuration functions.
Battery
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected, the MODULE
OK LED (top LED) will not stay on. Specific
indication of a low battery state is detailed in
Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
Table 1. References
Reference
t
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
IC660/IC661 Modular Redundancy Flexible Triple Modular
Redundant (TMR) System User’s Manual
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
27-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-1215B
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit,
1 Mbyte Memory, for IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CPM790 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.3 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 40_C (32_F to 104_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory
For IC66* Triple Modular Redundancy Systems
IC697CPM790
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please
consult the factory for price and availability.
27-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CPU780
28
GFK-0837C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit
for Hot Standby CPU Applications
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot Standby CPU Applications
(IC697CPU780)
datasheet GFK-0837C
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Requiredfor Hot Standby CPU applications
cy Communications Module
Supports floating point calculation
a47003
Single slot CPU
12K inputs and outputs (any mix)
Up to 8K analog I/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts
Programmed by MS-DOSr (IC641) based software products
Supports up to 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
memory in the same slot
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Keyswitch memory protection
Four status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to set)
Reference information inside front door.
Redundancy Features
In addition to the above features, the CPU 780 supports
the redundancy features listed below.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D CommonI/OonIC660/IC661bus
D Manual switching with pushbutton switch on Redundan-
Bumplessswitching between redundancy PLCs
Synchronization of CPUs
Redundant backupcommunications
20 ms scan extension(nominal)
One scan switching (in most cases)
Configurablebackup data size
On-lineprogramming
On-line repair
No single point of failure
Same or different program in Primary and Secondary PLCs
Program control switching
Symptom status bits and fault tables
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
UNIT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 780
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
FOR HOT STANDBY
CPU APPLICATIONS
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU 780
LABEL
44A726758-130R03
Memory parity and checksums
r MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
28-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-0837C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
Standby CPU Applications
Functions
The CPU 780 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which allows floating point calculations and is required for Hot Standby CPU applications. The CPU 780
is programmed and configured by IC641 programming
software to perform real time control of machines, processes and material handling systems.
The CPU 780 communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 790, 791) by way of the VME C.1 Standard format.
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules,
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
Program and data memory for the CPU 780 is available
by the attachment of an expansion memory board with
either 128 Kbytes, 256 Kbytes or 512 Kbytes of batterybacked CMOS RAM, or 256 Kbytes with 256 Kbytes of
non-volatile flash memory. These memory boards pro-
vide error checking through a CPU checksum routine
with detected parity errors being reported to the CPU
as they occur.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an attached programmer and IC641 software. Program and
configuration data can be locked through software
passwords or manually by the memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position, program and configuration data can only be changed by a
programmer connected through parallel communications (i.e., via the Bus Transmitter module). The status
of the CPU is indicated by the four green LEDs on the
front of the module.
The CPU 780 is used as the CPU in a Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system. Two CPUs are required in a Hot Standby CPU redundancy system; one in the Primary PLC and
one in the Secondary PLC. Each of the CPUs must be configured separately, with one configured as the Primary
unit and one configured as the Secondary unit. The location of the CPU 780 modules in a typical Hot Standby CPU
Redundancy system is shown in Figure 1.
PRIMARY UNIT
SECONDARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
31
P C
S P
U
B R G
T C B
M M C
or
N
B
C
30
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
PS
CPU
BTM
RCM
GBC or NBC
BLOCK
SCANNER
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Power Supply
Central Processor Unit
Bus Transmitter Module
Redundancy Communications Module
IC66* Bus Controller
IC66* I/O Block
Remote I/O Scanner
IC697PWRXXX
IC697CPU780
IC697BEM713
IC697RCM711
IC697BEM731/734
IC66*XXXYYY
IC697BEM733/735
Figure 1. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration
28-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
GFK-0837C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
Standby CPU Applications
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
Installation should not be attempted without referring to
the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual
and the Hot Standby CPU Redundancy Manual.
D Align the expansion memory and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the memory board with
the standoffs already installed on the CPU.
D Push the memory board onto the CPU connector
with 256K of non-volatile flash memory, or 512 Kbytes.
These memory boards provide error checking through
a CPU checksum routine. Memory parity errors are reported to the CPU when they occur. The battery which
supports this memory is located on the main CPU
board. (See Figure 2).
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
CPU
STATUS
LEDS
CPU MODE
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
D Screw each memory board screw into the standoffs
with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, and tighten.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module.
Make sure rack power is off.
Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 1)
Turn on power.
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM731
IC697MEM732
IC697MEM733
IC697MEM735
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed. After the
program has been verified the toggle switch may be
moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The
LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch, memory
protection status, and the state of the program.
CPU 780
TOP
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ensuring that the mating screws remain aligned with
their respective standoff.
D
D
D
D
D
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
SERIAL PORT
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
FOR HOT STANDBY
CPU APPLICATIONS
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU 780
LABEL
44A726758-130R03
Expansion Memory
The CPU 780 must have a CMOS RAM expansion
memory board. The CMOS expansion memory board
provides CMOS RAM memory of 128K, 256K, 256K
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Figure 2. CPU 780 - Location of Major Features
28-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-0837C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
Standby CPU Applications
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figures 2 and 3. This port provides a serial connection
to the programming computer.
Installation of a CMOS expansion memory board on the
CPU will require initialization of the CPU with the programmer (See Reference 2).
Programmer Connection, Parallel
The serial connection is made from the Standard Serial
COM port on the CPU to the serial port on the
programming computer, or other serial device, through
the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900)
or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901).
This connection can be made with available cables or
you may build cables to fit the needs of your particular
application.
For more information on serial
communications, see Reference 3.
The programmer connects to the top port on the Bus
Transmitter Module (IC697BEM713) system interface
module for a parallel interface (as shown in Figure 1).
Consult Reference 2 for a description of programming
functions.
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
SERIAL
PRIMARY UNIT
SECONDARY UNIT
P C B R G
S P T C B
U M M C
or
N
B
C
31
P C
S P
U
B R G
T C B
M M C
or
N
B
C
30
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
other IC66* devices
REMOTE DROP
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
B
L
O
C
K
P S I I I I I I I I
S C O O O O O O O O
A
N
N
E
R
Figure 3. Hot Standby CPU Redundancy System Configuration with Serial Connection to Programmer
Note
When configuring a Hot Standby CPU Redundancy system the programmer must be connected
to the CPU in the Primary unit to configure the Primary PLC and then moved to the CPU in the Secondary PLC to configure the Secondary PLC.
28-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
5
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
Standby CPU Applications
GFK-0837C
August 1997
Configuration
Removing a Module
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with MSDOS based programming software. There are no DIP
switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The
CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration
at power-up and periodically during operation. The actual configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU
alarm processor function for configured fault response.
Consult Reference 1 for a description of configuration
functions.
The following instructions should be followed when removing a CPU 780 module from its slot in a rack. If a
fault in the CPU hardware is detected that is logged as
FATAL, the CPU will go to STOP mode and control will
be switched from the active unit (with the failed CPU)
to the backup unit. Power can then be removed from
the rack containing the failed CPU and the CPU replaced. If a failure is detected in the backup unit, you
can simply remove power from the CPU rack and replace the module.
Batteries
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up diagnostics
a low battery is detected the Module OK LED (top) will
not stay on. Specific indication of a low battery state is
detailed in Reference 2.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CPU780 [
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power
Battery Shelf Life
Memory Retention
Current required from 5V Bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
±3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock
±.01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
t
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User ’s Guide
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
28-5
PLC CPUs
6
GFK-0837C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Expandable Central Processing Unit for Hot
Standby CPU Applications
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CPU 780, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandable, Floating Point
for Hot Standby CPU Redundancy applications
IC697CPU780
RedundancyCommunicationsModule
IC697RCM711
Bus TransmitterModule
IC697BEM713
128 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM731
256 Kbyte, with 256 KBytes non-volatile flash memory, 32-Bit CMOS
ExpansionMemory
IC697MEM732
256 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM733
512 Kbyte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
28-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CSE784
29
GFK-1035C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic
Central Processing Unit
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE784)
datasheet GFK-1035C
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Supports State Logic control programming
Supports floating point calculations
Single slot CPU
12K inputs and outputs (any mix)
Up to 8K analog I/O
0.4 microseconds per boolean function
16 MHz, 80386DX microprocessor
Supports IC660/IC661 and IC697 I/O products
Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) software products
Provides 512 Kbytes of battery-backed expansion
memory in the same slot
Configurable data and program memory
Battery-backed calendar clock
Three position operation mode switch
Password controlled access
Keyswitch memory protection
Four status LEDs
Software configuration (No DIP switches or
jumpers to set)
Reference information inside front door
Functions
The CSE 784 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which provides State Logic control programming
and floating point calculations. The CSE 784 may be
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and C
to perform real-time control of machines, processes, and
material handling systems. The AD641 software products are used to program the CSE 784 in State Logic; the
IC641 (MS-DOS) software products are used to program
in Relay Ladder Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS)
software is used to perform all configuration functions
for the CSE 784.
Program and data memory for the State Logic CSE 784
is provided by a memory board with 512 Kbytes of battery-backed CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the CSE 784 module and does not need to
be ordered separately.
The CSE 784 communicates with I/O and smart option
modules over the rack mounted backplane
a45154
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
STATE LOGIC
CPU
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CSE 784
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CSE784
LABEL
44A726758-144R01
r MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
29-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1035C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit
Supported option modules include all IC697 LAN interface modules, several Coprocessor modules, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O, Communications modules,
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an attached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
software. Program and configuration data can be
locked through software passwords or manually by the
memory protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected position, program and configuration data cannot
be changed. The status of the CPU is indicated by the
four green LEDs on the front of the module.
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
512 KBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
29-2
CSE 784
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
WITH FLOATING POINT
MATH COPROCESSOR
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connec-
The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the
program.
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
Installation should not be attempted without referring
to the applicable hardware installation manual.
tors on the module.
D Put toggle switch in the STOP position.
D Put keyswitch in Memory Protection OFF position.
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Install in slot 1 of rack 0. (See Figure 2)
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully, the
top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are off.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
Î
MODULE OK
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
a45155
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CSE784
LABEL
44A726758-144R01
CSE 784
Figure 1. CSE 784 - Location of Major Features
The State Logic operating system is provided on a
floppy disk with the CSE 784. The IC641 (MS-DOS)
programming software is used to load the operating
system into the CSE 784 CPU module. For information on loading the operating system, see the State
Logic Control System User’s Manual.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit
GFK-1035C
August 1997
Serial Port
Configuration
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port as shown in Figure 2.
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with
IC641 (MS-DOS) programming software. There are
no DIP switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The CPU verifies the actual module and rack
configuration at power-up and periodically during
operation. The actual configuration must be the same
as the programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of configuration functions.
The serial connection is made from the Standard Serial
COM port on the CPU to the serial port on the
programming computer, or other serial device, through
the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900)
or RS-232 to RS-422 Miniconverter (IC690ACC901).
This serial connection can be made with available cables
or you may build cables to fit the needs of your
particular application. For more information on serial
communications, see Reference 3.
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
SERIAL
a43591g
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial
Connection to Programmer
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 1. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the old battery. If during power-up
diagnostics a low battery is detected the Module OK
LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The following instructions should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
29-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1035C
August 1997
16 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point, State Logic Central Processing Unit
Table 1. Specifications for IC697CSE784 [
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Battery Shelf Life
6 months nominal without applied power
Memory Retention
Current required from 5V Bus
1.6 Amps (includes expansion memory)
Time of Day Clock (internal timing) Accuracy
±3.5 seconds per day
Elapsed Time Clock
±.01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485compatible,Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. References
Reference
Title
1
Programming Software User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
State Logic Control System User ’s Manual
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
CSE 784, 16 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, State Logic
IC697CSE784
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
29-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CSE924
30
GFK-1036B
August 1997
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic
Central Processing Unit
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit (IC697CSE924)
datasheet GFK-1036B
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Supports State Logic control programming
Supports floating point calculations
Single slot CPU.
12K inputs and outputs (any mix).
Up to 8K analog I/O.
0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor.
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts.
Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) software
products.
Provides 512 Kbytes of battery-backed memory in the
same slot.
Configurable data and program memory.
Battery-backed calendar clock.
Three position operation mode switch.
Password controlled access.
Remote programmer keyswitch memory protection
Four status LEDs.
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to
set).
Reference information inside front door.
In-system upgradable firmware.
Functions
The CSE 924 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which provides State Logic control programming
and floating point calculations. The CSE 924 may be
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and
C to perform real-time control of machines, processes,
and material handling systems.
The AD641 software products are used to program
the CSE 924 in State Logic; the IC641 (MS-DOS) software products are used to program in Relay Ladder
Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also
used to perform all configuration functions for the
CSE 924.
The CSE 924 communicates with I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
a45416
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
STATE LOGIC
CPU
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CSE 924
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
MODULE
IC697CSE924
LABEL
44A726758-143R01
r MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
30-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1036B
August 1997
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit
a45417
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CSE 924
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
512 KBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CSE924
LABEL
44A726758–138R01
CSE 924
I/OLink Interface, and all of the IC697 family of discrete
and analog I/O modules.
Program and data memory for the CSE 924 is provided by
a memory board with 512 Kbytes of battery-backed
CMOS RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the
CSE 924 module and does not need to be ordered
separately.
Operation of this module may be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
software. Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the memory
protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected
position, program and configuration data cannot be
changed. The status of a CPU is indicated by the four
green LEDs on the front of the module.
The CSE 924 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40 _C
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should
be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Fan assemblies (IC697ACC 721 and IC697ACC724) can be
ordered for direct mounting on the IC697 rack. Refer to
the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual
for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referFigure 1. CSE 924 - Location of Major Features
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN
Interface modules, Programmable Coprocessor,
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for
IC660/IC661I/O products, Communications modules,
30-2
D
D
D
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual.
Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 1).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF
position.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit
D Make sure that rack power is off.
D Install the CSE 924 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 2).
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top LED should
blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are
off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
After the program has been verified the toggle switch
may be moved to the appropriate operation mode
position. The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle
switch, memory protection status, and the state of the
program.
The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also used to load the
State Logic operating system into the CSE 924 CPU
module. The operating system is provided on a floppy
disk with the CSE 924. For information on loading the
operating system, see the State Logic Control System
User’s Manual.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
a45301
SERIAL
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
PROGRAMMER
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
*
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
50 FEET(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS
MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
* FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GFK-1036B
August 1997
Serial Port
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 1.
The serial connection is made from the serial port on the
CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or
other serial device, through the RS-422/RS-485 to RS-232
Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
the needs of your particular application. See reference 3
for more information on serial communications.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with IC641
(MS-DOS) programming software. There are no DIP
switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The
CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration at
power-up and periodically during operation. The actual
configuration must be the same as the programmed
configuration. Deviations are reported to the CPU alarm
processor function for configured fault response. Consult
Reference 1 for a description of configuration functions.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 1. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before
removing the old battery. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
30-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1036B
August 1997
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point State Logic Central Processing Unit
Table 1. References
Reference
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
State Logic Control System User’s Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CSE924 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.3 Amps nominal
Operating Temperature
0 to 60_C (32_F to 140_F); 70 CFM forced air required
0 to 40_C (32_F to 104_F); without forced air
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit
CSE 924, 64 MHz, 32-Bit, Floating Point, State Logic
IC697CSE924
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
30-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
PLC CPUs
IC697CSE925
31
GFK-1167C
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit
1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit 1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic (IC697CSE925)
datasheet GFK-1167C
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
Supports State Logic control programming
Supports floating point calculations
Single slot CPU.
12K inputs and outputs (any mix).
Up to 8K analog I/O.
0.4 microseconds per boolean function.
64 MHz, 80486DX2 microprocessor.
SupportsIC660/IC661andIC697I/Oproducts.
Programmed by AD641 and IC641 (MS-DOSr) software
products.
Provides 1 Mbyte of battery-backed memory in the same
slot.
Configurable data and program memory.
Battery-backed calendar clock.
Three position operation mode switch.
Password controlled access.
Remote programmer keyswitch memory protection
Four status LEDs.
Software configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers to
set).
Reference information inside front door.
In-system upgradable firmware.
Functions
The CSE 925 is a single slot programmable controller
CPU which provides State Logic control programming
and floating point calculations. The CSE 925 can be
programmed in State Logic, Relay Ladder Logic, and
C to perform real-time control of machines, processes,
and material handling systems.
The AD641 software products are used to program
the CSE 925 in State Logic; the IC641 (MS-DOS) software products are used to program in Relay Ladder
Logic and C. The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also
used to perform all configuration functions for the
CSE 925.
The CSE 925 communicates with I/O and smart option modules over the rack mounted backplane
(IC697CHS750, 782, 783, 790, 791) by way of the VME
C.1 Standard format.
a45242
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î Î ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
OK
RUN
ENABLED
MEM PROTECT
STATE LOGIC
CPU
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CSE 925
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY.
MODULE
IC697CSE925
LABEL
44A726758-148R01
r MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
31-1
PLC CPUs
2
GFK-1167C
November 1999
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit
1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
a45243
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎ
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CSE 925
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
1 MBYTE
MEMORY BOARD
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
64 MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT WITH
FLOATING POINT MATH
COPROCESSOR, IN-SYSTEM
UPGRADABLE FIRMWARE
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CSE925
LABEL
44A726758–148R01
CSE 925
and all of the IC697 family of discrete and analog I/O
modules.
User Memory
Program and data memory for the CSE 925 is provided by
a memory board with 1 Mbyte of battery-backed CMOS
RAM. This memory board is an integral part of the CSE
925 module and does not need to be ordered separately.
Operation, Protection, and Module Status
Operation of this module can be controlled by the
three-position RUN/STOP switch or remotely by an
attached programmer, and AD641 or IC641 (MS-DOS)
software. Program and configuration data can be locked
through software passwords or manually by the memory
protect keyswitch. When the key is in the protected
position, program and configuration data cannot be
changed. The status of a CPU is indicated by the four
green LEDs on the front of the module.
The CSE 925 requires forced air cooling for proper
operation in ambient temperatures greater than 40 _C
(104_F). A fan capable of 70 CFM (including filters) should
be located beneath slot 1 of the rack containing the CPU.
Rack Fan Assemblies (IC697ACC721, IC697ACC724, and
IC697ACC744) can be ordered for direct mounting on the
IC697 rack. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual for detailed information.
Installation
It is the responsibility of the OEM, system integrator, or
end user to properly install the PLC equipment for safe
and reliable operation. Product manuals provide
detailed information about installation, startup, and
proper use of the PLC equipment. The installation
manual, shipped with your PLC programming software,
describes how to properly install the equipment. If the
PLC installation must comply with supported standards,
such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the
Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards,
shipped with the PLC programming software, for
additional guidelines.
D Installation should not be attempted without referFigure 1. CSE 925 - Location of Major Features
Supported option modules include IC697 LAN Interface
modules, Programmable Coprocessor, Alphanumeric
Display Coprocessor, Bus Controller for IC660/IC661 I/O
products, Communications modules, I/O Link Interface,
31-2
D
D
D
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see Figure 1).
Put the toggle switch in the STOP position.
Put the keyswitch in the Memory Protection OFF
position.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
PLC CPUs
3
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit
1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
D Make sure that rack power is off.
Serial Port
D Install the CSE 925 module in slot 1 of rack 0 (see
Figure 2).
D Turn on power.
The module should power up and the top LED should
blink. When the diagnostics have completed successfully,
the top LED stays on and the second and third LEDs are
off. The fourth LED is off if the keyswitch is in the OFF
position. The CPU is now ready to be programmed.
After the program has been verified the toggle switch may
be moved to the appropriate operation mode position.
The LEDs indicate the position of the toggle switch,
memory protection status, and the state of the program.
The IC641 (MS-DOS) software is also used to load the State
Logic operating system into the CSE 925 CPU module.
The operating system is provided on a floppy disk with
the CSE 925. The operating system is stored in flash
memory on the module. For information on loading the
operating system, see the State Logic Control System User’s
Manual.
SERIAL
a45301
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
RACK 0
P
S
C
P
U
B
T
M
P G
C B
M C
or
N
B
C
*
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
RACK 1
B
R
M
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
RACK 7
NOTE
The 15-pin D-connector provides the connection to an
RS-485 compatible serial port on the CPU as shown in
Figure 2.
The serial connection is made from the serial port on the
CPU to the serial port on the programming computer, or
other serial device, through the RS-422/RS-485 to
RS-232 Converter (IC690ACC900) or RS-232 to RS-422
Miniconverter (IC690ACC901). This connection can be
made with available cables or you may build cables to fit
the needs of your particular application. See reference
3 for more information on serial communications.
Configuration
The IC697 CPU and I/O system is configured with IC641
(MS-DOS) programming software. There are no DIP
switches or jumpers used to configure the system. The
CPU verifies the actual module and rack configuration
at power-up and periodically during operation. The
actual configuration must be the same as the
programmed configuration. Deviations are reported to
the CPU alarm processor function for configured fault
response. Consult Reference 1 for a description of
configuration functions.
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 1. This battery maintains program and data
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock. Be sure to install the new battery before
removing the old battery. Specific indication of a low
battery state is detailed in Reference 2.
Removing a Module
The instructions below should be followed when
removing a module from its slot in a rack.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS
50 FEET(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS
MUST BE AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
B
R
M
TERMINATOR PLUG (IC697ACC702)
* FORCED AIR COOLING REQUIRED FOR
PROPER OPERATION. REFER TO TEXT.
RACK FAN ASSEMBLY IC697ACC721/724
AVAILABLE FOR DIRECT MOUNTING ON
RACK.
Figure 2. System Configuration, Serial Connection to
Programmer
t
GFK-1167C
November 1999
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
31-3
PLC CPUs
4
GFK-1167C
November 1999
64 MHz, 32-Bit Floating Point Central Processing Unit
1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
Table 1. References
Reference
Title
1
Programming Software User’s Manual
2
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
State Logic Control System User’s Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC697CSE925 [
Battery
Shelf life
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
3.3 Amps nominal
Time of Day Clock accuracy
Elapsed Time Clock (internal timing) accuracy
" 3.5 seconds per day maximum
" .01% maximum
Serial Port
RS422/485 compatible
Programmer Serial Attachment
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Central Processing Unit - 64 MHz, 32-Bit,
Floating Point, 1 Mbyte Memory, State Logic
IC697CSE925
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Rack Fan Assembly, 120 VAC
Rack Fan Assembly, 240 VAC
Rack fan Assembly, 24 VDC
IC697ACC721
IC697ACC724
IC697ACC744
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please
consult the factory for price and availability.
31-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
32
GFK-0160F
August 1997
Expansion Memory
IC697MEM713/715/717/719
CMOS Expansion Memory
Expansion Memory
CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM713/715/717/719)
datasheet GFK-0160F
Features
D Available in 64, 128, 256 and 512 Kbytes
a44742
D For expansion of CPU 771, CPU 772, or PCM
D Memory retained by battery on CPU or PCM
D Does not require additional slot
D Configurable for data and program storage
D Error checking by CPU checksum routine
D No tools required for installation
D Field Installable
Functions
This CMOS Expansion Memory is available in four
versions; 64, 128, 256 and 512 Kbytes. This memory
may be used to expand logic and data memory in either the CPU 771 (IC697CPU771) and CPU 772
(IC697CPU772) modules, or the Programmable Coprocessor Module (IC697PCM711). It is installed as a
daughter board and resides in the same slot as the
module it serves. Memory on this board supplements
memory available on the base board.
Memory is retained in the event of power loss by the
battery on the base board housing.
Logic program memory is continually error-checked
by the PLC CPU as a background task.
The PCM error checks storage memory when power
is cycled and on hard or soft resets.
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
32-1
Expansion Memory
2
GFK-0160F
August 1997
CMOS Expansion Memory
Installation
a42711
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual (See reference 4).
D Make sure rack power is off.
D Plug the 64 pin connector into the connector on
the base board, and engage snaps.
D Place module in rack.
D Turn power on.
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CPU Installation:
D Clear memory using either MS-DOSr or
Windowsr programming software following
instructions in the Programming Software User’s
Manual (See reference 1).
PCM Installation:
D For the PCM follow the instructions in the Programmable Coprocessor Module Support Software
User’s Manual (See reference 3).
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CPU 771
MODULE OK
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
ON = OK, ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
12MHZ CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS–422
COMPATIBLE
Batteries
The Lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as
shown in figure 1. This battery maintains user
memory when power is removed and operates the
calendar clock on the PLC CPU. Be sure to install the
new battery before removing the old battery. Specific
indication of a low battery state is detailed in References 3 and 4.
32-2
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU771
LABEL
44A726758–106
CPU 771
Figure 1. Location of Expansion Memory and Battery
on CPU771/772 and PCM
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Expansion Memory
3
GFK-0160F
August 1997
CMOS Expansion Memory
Table 1. References
Reference
1
2
3
4
Title
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User ”s Manual
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Table 2. Specifications for IC697MEM713/715/717/719 [
Battery
Shelflife
10 years at 20_ C (68_ F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
VME
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
64 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
128 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
256 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
512 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
Lithium Battery
Catalog Number
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
32-3
1
33
GFK-0531E
August 1997
Expansion Memory
IC697MEM731/732/733/735
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory (IC697MEM731/732/733/735)
datasheet GFK-0531E
Features
a44437
D Available in 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes
non-volatile flash memory, 256 KBytes and 512
Kbytes.
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
For expansionofCPU780/781/782/788/789.
Memory retained by battery on CPU.
Does not require additional slot.
Configurable for data and program storage.
Error checking by CPU checksum routine.
Installation requires only a #1 Phillips screwdriver.
Field Installable.
Parity generation and checking for each byte of
SRAM.
Functions
CMOS Expansion Memory is available in four versions; 128 KBytes, 256 KBytes w/256 KBytes non-volatile flash memory, 256 KBytes and 512 Kbytes. This
memory must be used to provide logic and data
memory in the PLC CPU 780/781/782/788/789 Central
Processor Unit modules. It is installed as a daughter
board and resides in the same slot as the module it
serves. This board is required for proper operation of
these CPUs since the base board contains no RAM
memory.
Memory is retained in the event of power loss by the
battery on the base board housing. Flash memory is
retained in the event of a power loss with or without the
battery connected.
Figure 1. Example of 32-Bit CMOS Expansion
Memory Board
Logic program memory is continually error-checked
by the PLC CPU as a background task. Memory parity errors are reported to the PLC CPU when they occur.
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
33-1
Expansion Memory
2
GFK-0531E
August 1997
Installation
D Installation should not be attempted without referring to the Programmable Controller Installation
Manual and applicable data sheets (Refer to References 3, 4, 5 and 6).
D Align the expansion memory board and CPU connectors.
D Align the captive screws on the expansion memory
board with the standoffs already installed on the
CPU.
D Push the expansion memory board onto the CPU
connector ensuring that the mating screws remain
aligned with their respective standoff.
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
MEMORY
PROTECT
KEY
SWITCH
LED
STATUS
INDICATORS
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
D Screw each expansion memory board screw into
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
CPU 781
TOP
OFF
ON
REMOTE PROGRAMMER
MEMORY PROTECT
KEY POSITION
FRONT
RUN
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
MEMORY
PROTECT
REMOTE
PROGRAMMER
ONLY
ON = OK, ENABLED,
PROTECTED
D Make sure rack power is off before installing the
CPU module. Place module in rack.
D Turn power on.
D Clear memory with MS-DOSr or Windowsr pro-
Batteries
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎÎÎ
MODULE OK
the standoffs with a #1 Phillips screwdriver, firmly
tightening each screw.
gramming software following instructions in the
Programming Software User’s Manual (Refer to Reference 1).
a45157
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM731
IC697MEM732
IC697MEM733
IC697MEM735
The Lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in Figure 2. This battery maintains user memory when power is removed and operates the calendar clock on the PLC
CPU. Be sure to install the new battery before removing the
old battery. Specific indication of a low battery state is detailed in References 3, 4 and 5.
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
ENABLED
RUN WITH
OUTPUTS
DISABLED
STOP
BATTERY
CONNECTORS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
MODULE FUNCTION
16MHz 32 BIT CENTRAL
PROCESSING UNIT
SERIAL PORT
RS-485
COMPATIBLE
USE THIS MODULE
IN SLOT 1 ONLY
MODULE
IC697CPU781
LABEL
44A726758-128R01
CPU 781
Figure 2. Example of Location of Expansion Memory and
Battery on CPU 780/781/782/788/789 (CPU781 Shown)
33-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Expansion Memory
3
GFK-0531E
August 1997
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
Table 1. References
Reference
Title
1
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
2
Programmable Logic Controller Reference Manual
3
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
4
Data Sheet for IC697CPU781, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale
5
Data Sheet for IC697CPU782, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale, Floating Point
6
Data Sheet for IC697CPU780, 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale, Floating Point, for Redundancy Applications
7
Data Sheet for IC697CPU788/789 32-Bit, 16 MHz, Expandabale for Genius Triple Redundancy Systems
Table 2. Specifications for CMOS Expansion Memory Modules [
Battery
Shelf life:
Memory retention:
10 years at 20_C (68_ F)
6 months nominal without applied power
Current required form 5V bus:
2.25 amps (includes expansionmemory board and CPU module)
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
128 KByte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM731
256 KByte w/256 KByte Non-Volatile Flash memory,
32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM732
256 KByte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM733
512 KByte, 32-Bit CMOS Expansion Memory
IC697MEM735
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
33-3
1
Coprocessor Modules
IC697PCM711
34
Programmable Coprocessor Module
GFK-0164G
August 1997
Coprocessor Modules
Programmable Coprocessor Module (IC697PCM711)
datasheet GFK-0164G
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
a44716
Single slot Coprocessor
Dual Tasking
MegaBasic
CCM2 Protocol
12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor
90% of an IBMr AT performance
Up to 96 Kbytes battery-backed CMOS logic and
data memory on board
Supports up to 512 Kbytes optional expansion
memory
Programmed by IC647, IC640 or IBM-compatible
Personal Computer
Two RS-422/RS-485 or RS-232 serial ports
High performance access to PLC memory
Real time calendar clock synchronized to PLC
Reset pushbutton
Three Status LEDs
Soft Configuration (No dip switches or jumpers)
with MS-DOSr or Windowsr based programming
software configuration function
t
• Simultaneous communications on both ports at up
to 9.6 Kbaud, or up to 19.2 Kbaud individually.
Functions
OK
USER 1
USER 2
PCM 711
COPROCESSOR
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
PCM 711
MODULE OK
USER 1
USER 2
ON = OK, ACTIVE
OR USER
PUSH TO RESTART
APPLICATION
PUSH AND HOLD TO
STOP AND RESET
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
PORT 1
RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
COMPATIBLE
MODULE FUNCTION
PROGRAMMABLE
COPROCESSOR,
COMMUNICA TIONS
OPTIONAL MEMORY
USE IC697MEM71
PORT 2
The Programmable Coprocessor Module (PCM) is a
Coprocessor to the PLC CPU. It can be programmed
to perform operator interface, real time computations,
data storage, data acquisition and data communications functions. It communicates with the PLC CPU
over the backplane and can access user and system
data using extensions to the powerful MegaBasic language. No application program support is required in
the PLC CPU.
Many PCMs can be supported in a single IC697 PLC
system and each can accommodate an optional expansion memory up to 512 Kbytes.
RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
COMPATIBLE
MODULE
IC697PCM711
LABEL
44A726758–203
Dual tasking allows running a MegaBasic program at
the same time the PCM is used as a communications
interface. Operation of the module may be initialized
by a pushbutton or by an attached PCM development
system. The status of the PCM is indicated by three
green LEDs on the front of the module.
tMegaBasic is a trademark of Christopher Cochran; rIBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
34-1
Coprocessor Modules
2
GFK-0164G
August 1997
Programmable Coprocessor Module
Installation
Expansion Memory
• Installation should not be attempted without referring to the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual (see reference 5).
The PCM can operate with or without an expansion
memory daughter board. The base memory on the
PCM board has up to 95 Kbytes user memory. The expansion memory daughter board permits expansion of
program/data memory by 64, 128, 256 or 512 Kbytes.
The battery which supports this memory is located on
the base board housing as shown in figure 2.
• Make sure rack power is off.
• Install expansion memory if required.
• Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module. (See figure 2)
• Install in the rack. (See figure 1)
• Turn on power.
The module should power up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the
top LED stays on.
PARALLEL
a42786g
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
É
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÉÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
É
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
É
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÉÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
a42759
PROGRAMMER
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
ONE
METER
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
RACK 6
NOTE
EXPANSION
MEMORY
BOARD
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
OPTIONAL MEMORY
USE IC697MEM71
RACK 7
PORT 2
B
R
M
CPU BRM BTM GBC/NBC PCM PS -
RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
COMPATIBLE
MODULE
IC697PCM711
LABEL
44A726758–203
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM731/734
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration (PCM
Shown in Rack 1)
34-2
RS–232 OR
RS–422/485
COMPATIBLE
PROGRAMMABLE
COPROCESSOR,
COMMUNICATIONS
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
PORT 1
MODULE FUNCTION
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET (2285 METERS) MAXIMUM)
ONE
METER
P
S
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(15 METERS) MAXIMUM. ALL RACKS MUST BE
AT SAME GROUND POTENTIAL
(8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
USER 2
ON = OK, ACTIVE
OR USER
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
IC66*
I/O BLOCK
G
B
C
or
N
B
C
MODULE OK
PUSH TO RESTART
APPLICATION.
PUSH AND HOLD TO
STOP AND RESET.
P
C
M
B
R
M
PCM 711
USER 1
RACK 1
B
R
M
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î Î
ÎÎ
Î
PCM 711
Figure 2. Programmable Coprocessor Module - User
Details
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Coprocessor Modules
3
GFK-0164G
August 1997
Programmable Coprocessor Module
Table 1. Port 1 or 2 - RS-232
Programming and Configuration
An IC647 or IC640 computer, or IBM-compatible PC,
XT, or AT computer with PCM Development Software
installed is connected to the top port of the PCM. The
default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM Development
Software is used to configure the serial port parameters, to define the interface to the PLC CPU, to select
task functions and to program MegaBasic applications. The PCM parameters can also be configured
using MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming software. Consult reference 3 for details of operation.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Programmer
IC697CBL705
RS-232
(DEFAULT PORT)
Î
Î
GND
3PL
4PL
PIN
PIN
2
3
4
5
8
20
7
3
2
5
20
8
1
7
IC647 AND
IBM PS/2
25-PIN CONNECTOR
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
20
FUNCTION
Shield
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
RXD
TXD
CTS
DTR
SHLD
GND
PCM
25-PIN
CONNECTOR
Figure 3. PCM Development System Connection to PCM
Serial Ports
Both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485 compatible.
Both ports acting simultaneously can each support up
to 9.6 Kbaud full duplex data communications, or they
can support up to 19.2 Kbaud individually.
SIGNAL
NAME
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
0V
DCD
DTR
I/O
Output
Input
Output
Input
Input
Output
Table 2. Port 1 or 2 - RS-422/RS-485
a43735
PCM
PCM
PROGRAMMING S/W
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
PIN
PIN
9
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
FUNCTION
Send Data (A)
Request to Send (A)
Clear to Send (A)
Termination for pin 13
Receive Data (A)
Send Data (B)
Request to Send (B)
Clear to Send (B)
Termination for pin 23
Receive Data (B)
SIGNAL
NAME
I/O
SD (A)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
RD (A)
SD (B)
RST (B)
CTS (B)
RD (B)
Output
Output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Input
Input
Configuration
There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this
board for configuration. However, the board must be
configured before operation using PCM Development
Software (See reference 3).
Status Indication
Three Status LEDs are available as shown in Figure 2.
The top LED indicates the condition of the module, the
bottom two LEDs may be assigned to a configured
function.
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL)
Controls
Connectors 3PL and 4PL contain signals for both RS-232
and RS-422/RS-485 types of communication circuits. The
pin-out for the RS-232 signals are per the RS-232 specification with an exception that pins not normally used for
RS-232 are used for RS-422/RS-485 signals. Details are
shown in tables 1 and 2.
One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold for less
than 5 seconds will restart an application. Push and
hold for more than 5 seconds and the module factory
default configuration will be installed (this action will
not clear memory but will permit communication with
the programmer using factory default settings).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
34-3
Coprocessor Modules
4
GFK-0164G
August 1997
Programmable Coprocessor Module
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in figure 2. This battery maintains user memory when
power is removed. Be sure to install the new battery
before removing the old battery.
If during power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected
the Module OK LED (top) will not stay on. Specific indication of a low battery state is detailed in the PCM
Support Software User’s Manual.
Table 3. References
Reference
1
2
3
4
5
Title
ProgramingSoftware User ’s Manual
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
PCM Support Software User ’s Manual
MegaBasic Programming Language Reference Manual
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Table 4. Specifications for IC697PCM711 [
Battery
Shelf life
Memory retention
10 years at 20°C (68°F)
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current required from 5V bus
1.0 amp
Serial Ports
RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 compatible
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC programming software, for additional guidelines.
Table 5. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
PCM, 12 Mhz, 20 Kbyte, Expandable
64 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
128 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
256 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
512 Kbyte CMOS Expansion Memory
Lithium Battery
IC697PCM711
IC697MEM713
IC697MEM715
IC697MEM717
IC697MEM719
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
34-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Coprocessor Modules
IC697ADC701
35
GFK-0521E
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC) (IC697ADC701)
datasheet GFK-0521E
Features
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
a44517
Single slot Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor
Runs Alphanumeric Display System software
12 Mhz, 80C186 microprocessor
High performance access to PLC memory
Reset pushbutton; three status LEDs
Soft Configuration (No DIP switches or jumpers)
with MS-DOSr or Windowsr based programming
software configuration function
Easy fill-in-the-blank system building
Pop-up windows; pull down menus
15 User definable function keys per screen
Printer logging to a serial printer
Functions
The Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor Module is a
coprocessor to the IC697 PLC CPU. It is programmed
to perform Alphanumeric Display System display, report, and alarm functions through an Operator Interface Terminal, which can be an OIT or Mini OIT, a
VT100 compatible terminal, or an IC647 industrial
computer or IBMr compatible personal computer
running TERMF. It communicates with the IC697
CPU over the system backplane.
Up to 63 Alphanumeric Display Coprocessors can be
supported in a single IC697 PLC system and can be
located in either the main rack or expansion racks.
Operation of the module may be initialized by depressing a pushbutton on the module or by an attached ADS (PCOP) development system. The status
of the ADC is indicated by three green LEDs on the
front of the module.
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
OK
PORT 1
PORT 2
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
COPROCESSOR
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
ADC 701
MODULE OK
PORT 1 ACTIVE
PORT 2 ACTIVE
ON = OK, ACTIVE
PUSH TO RESTART
APPLICATION.
PUSH AND HOLD TO
STOP AND RESET.
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
PORT 1
RS-232 OR
RS-422/485
PRINTER
(PCOP)
MODULE FUNCTION
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
COPROCESSOR
PORT 2
RS-232
RS-422/485
TERMINAL
MODULE
IC697ADC701
LABEL
44A726758-205R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
35-1
Coprocessor Modules
2
GFK-0521E
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
Installation
D Installation should not be attempted without refer-
ring to the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual , the ADS User’s Manual, and the
ADS Reference Manual.
D Make sure rack power is off before installing the
A44518
Aphanumetic Display Coprocessor module.
D Connect the battery to either of the battery connectors on the module (see figure 2).
D Install in the rack (see figure 1).
D Turn on power.
The module should power-up and blink the top LED.
When the diagnostics have completed successfully the
top LED stays on.
OPEN
REPLACEMENT
BATTERY
CONNECTOR
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ADC 701
MODULE OK
PORT 1 ACTIVE
PORT 2 ACTIVE
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
PARALLEL
a44525
COM1
RACK 0
P
S
C B
P T
U M
CURRENTLY
INSTALLED
BATTERY
CONNECOR1.
PROGRAMMER
INSTALL NEW
BATTERY BEFORE
UNPLUGGING OLD
BATTERY. USE
IC697ACC701
ONE
METER
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
PORT 1
OIT
RS-232 OR
RS-422/485
PRINTER
(PCOP)
P
C
M
B
R
M
MODULE FUNCTION
ALPHANUMERIC
DISPLAY
COPROCESSOR
RACK 6
G
B
C
B
R
M
P
S
NOTE
IC66* I/O BUS (7500 FEET MAXIMUM)
RACK 7
B
R
M
I/O TERMINATOR
(LAST RACK)
LEGEND
CPU
BRM
BTM
GBC/NBC
ADC
PCM
PS
-
SELECTED CPU MODEL
BUS RECEIVER MODULE, BEM 711
BUS TRANSMITTER MODULE, BEM 713
BUS CONTROLLER, BEM 731/734
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY COPROCESSOR, ADC 701
PROGRAMMABLE COPROCESSOR MODULE, PCM 711
POWER SUPPLY, PWR710/711/724/748
Î
Î
Î
Î
RS-232
RS-422/485
TERMINAL
MODULE
IC697ADC701
LABEL
44A726758-205R01
ADC 701
IC66*
BLOCK
Figure 1. Typical PLC System Configuration
35-2
PORT 2
TOTAL LENGTH OF ALL INTERCONNECTING
CABLES FROM BTM TO LAST BRM IS 50 FEET
(MAXIMUM). ALL RACKS MUST BE AT SAME
GROUND POTENTIAL (8 RACKS MAXIMUM).
ONE
METER
PUSH TO RESTART
APPLICATION.
PUSH AND HOLD TO
STOP AND RESET.
BATTERY
CONNECTIONS
A
D
C
RACK 1
ON = OK, ACTIVE
Figure 2. Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor
Module - User Details
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Coprocessor Modules
3
GFK-0521E
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
Programming and Configuration
Port 1 (3PL) and Port 2 (4PL)
An IC647, IC640, or an IBM-compatible PC, XT, AT, or
PS/2r computer with PCM Development Software
(PCOP) installed connects to the top port as shown in
figure 3. The default setting is 19,200 bps. The PCM
Development Software is used to configure the serial
port parameters and to install the Alphanumeric Display System software onto the ADC. Refer to the the
ADS User’s Manual, for details of operation.
Port 1 (3PL) is normally connected to an RS-232 serial
COM port of a host computer for communications to
PCOP at 19.2 Kilobaud. Alternately, port 1 may be connected to a serial RS-232 printer (see the Alphanumeruc
Display System User’s Manual to reconfigure Port 1). Figure 3 shows typical cable connections for this purpose
and Table 1 shows the details of the RS-232 signals.
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
PROGRAMMER
RS-232
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
a44697
ADC
3PL
4PL
PCM
PROGRAMMING S/W
IC647 PROGRAMMER
(IC690CBL702)
PIN
PIN
TD 2
RD 3
RTS 4
CTS 5
DCD 8
DTR 20
GND 7
3
2
5
20
8
1
7
25-PIN
RD
TD
CTS
DTR
DCD
SHLD
GND
ADC
25-PIN
CONNECTOR
CD
RD
TD
DTR
RTS
CTS
GND
PIN
PIN
1
2
3
4
7
8
5
1
2
3
8
5
20
7
AT
9-PIN
CONNECTOR
SHLD
TD
RD
DCD
CTS
DTR
GND
ADC
25-PIN
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Figure 3. Example of PCM Development System
Connection to ADC
Serial Ports
Although both ports are RS-232 and RS-422/RS-485
compatible and the signals shown in both Table 1 and
Table 2 are available at each connector, the use of each
port is dedicated for ADC operation.
t
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
20
FUNCTION
Shield
Transmitted Data
Received Data
Request To Send
Clear To Send
Signal Ground
Data Carrier Detect
Data Terminal Ready
SIGNAL
NAME
I/O
TD
RD
RTS
CTS
GND
DCD
DTR
Output
Input
Output
Input
Input
Output
AT CABLE
(IC690CBL705)
IC647
AND IBM PS/2
Table 1. Port 1 and 2 – RS-232 Signals
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Port 2 (4PL) is configured as a 19.2 Kbaud RS-232 port
and interfaces to the OIT or other terminal’s RS-232
port for keyboard input and screen output. Figure 4
shows appropriate cable connections and Table 2
shows usable RS-422 signal details.
Table 2. Port 1 and 2 – RS-422/485 Signals
PIN
7
9
10
11
12
13
21
22
23
24
25
FUNCTION
Signal Ground
Send Data (A)
Request To Send (A)
Clear To Send (A)
Termination for pin 11
Receive Data (A)
Send Data (B)
Request To Send (B)
Clear To Send (B)
Termination for pin 25
Receive Data (B)
SIGNAL
NAME6
I/O
SG
SD (A)
RTS (A)
CTS (A)
RD (A)
SD (B)
RTS (B)
CTS (B)
RD (B)
Output
Output
Input
Input
Output
Output
Input
Input
35-3
Coprocessor Modules
4
GFK-0521E
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
OIT
PRIMARY
PORT 1
25- PIN
MALE
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
GND
DTR
DCD
PIN
PIN
1
3
2
5
20
7
8
2
3
4
5
7
20
8
25- PIN
FEMALE
SHLD
RXD
TXD
CTS
DTR
GND
DCD
25- PIN
MALE
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a44698
IC693
OR
IC697
ADC
PORT 1
OR
PORT 2
25- PIN
FEMALE
Figure 4. ADC Port 2 Connection to an OIT
Configuration
Controls
There are no user DIP switches or jumpers on this
board for configuration. However, the Alphanumeric
Display System software must be loaded using PCM
Development Software (refer to the Alphanumeric Display System User’s Manual for details). The ADC must
be configured with the MS-DOS or Windows based
programming software configuration function prior to
use.
Status Indication
Three Status LEDs are available as shown in figure 2.
The top LED indicates the condition of the ADC module, the bottom two LEDs indicate serial port activity.
One pushbutton is provided. Push and hold for less
than 5 seconds will restart the Alphanumeric Display
System software. Push and hold for more than 5 seconds and the module factory default configuration
will be installed (this action will not clear memory but
will permit communications with the programmer
using factory default settings).
Batteries
A lithium battery (IC697ACC701) is installed as shown
in figure 2. This battery maintains user memory
when power is removed. Be sure to install the new
battery in the unused battery connector before removing and discarding the old battery. If during
power-up diagnostics a low battery is detected, the
Module OK LED (top) will not stay on.
Table 3. References
Reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
35-4
Title
ProgrammingSoftware User ’s Manual
Programmable Controller Reference Manual
Programmable Coprocessor Module and Support Software User ’s Manual
Programmable Controller Installation Manual
Alphanumeric Display System User ’s Manual
Alphanumeric Display System Reference Manual
Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
Mini Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
IC600 Operator Interface Terminal User ’s Manual
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Coprocessor Modules
5
GFK-0521E
August 1997
Alphanumeric Display Coprocessor (ADC)
Table 4. Specifications for IC697ADC701 [
Battery
Shelflife
10 years at 20_C (68_F)
Memory retention
6 months nominal without applied power.
Current Required from 5V Bus
1.0 amp
Serial Ports
RS-232andRS-422/RS-485compatible
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. If the PLC installation must comply with
supported standards, such as FCC or CE Directives, please refer to the Installation Requirements for Conformance to Standards, shipped with the PLC programming software, for additional guidelines.
Table 5. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
AlphanumericDisplay Coprocessor Module
IC697ADC701
Lithium Battery
IC697ACC701
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
35-5
1
Discrete Input Modules
36
IC697MDL252
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
GFK-0756D
August 1997
Discrete Input Modules
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL252)
datasheet GFK-0756D
Features
a45146
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Functions
The 12 volt AC Input module provides 32 input points
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows
each group of eight points to be used on a different
phase of the AC supply.
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input characteristics are compatible with a large range of available
proximity switches.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included
at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers
or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming
Software configuration function is installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
INPUT
12VAC
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
10MA/PT
50/60 HZ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
H
~
N
10
11
B1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
H
~
N
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
H
~
N
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
D1
D2
D3
D4 H
D5
D6 N
D7
D8
~
40
MODULE IC697MDL252
LABEL 44A726758–027R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
36-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0756D
August 1997
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Operation of the 12 VOLT AC Input Module
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
H
a45148
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
~
N
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL252
Input Characteristics
The 12 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide
variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
Two-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and the
OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire devices.
This module is designed to be compatible with many of these
two–wire devices; however each device type must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF
states.
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state without turning on.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity switch,
find the ON state characteristics of the switch in the diagram
shown below in Figure 2. If that point falls to the left of the
input load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible
proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown below.
Three-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage
current in the OFF State.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 2.5
volts or less.
3-wire
a44138
10
15V SUPPLY
8
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
6
OPERATIONAL
NON–OPERATIONAL
4
10V SUPPLY
2
0
0
2
4
6
I LOAD (mA)
8
10
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
36-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0756D
August 1997
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Module Power
The 12 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from
the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
a42143
TERMINALS
1
3
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
the backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types.
5
A4
H
~
A5
6
7
A6
N
A7
8
9
10
11
A8
B1
12
B2
13
B3
14
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It
may then be reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost
rack position.
A2
A3
4
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inadvertent substitution of one module type for another
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
the board below the connector. The key is included with
each module.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
A1
2
Module Mechanical Keying
FIELD WIRING
15
B4
H
~
B5
16
17
B6
N
B7
18
19
20
21
B8
C1
22
C2
23
C3
24
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on the
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a wire from the power source to
the power input terminal for each group (terminal
number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2)wires to be routed out through
the terminal board cavity.
25
C4
26
C6
27
~
N
C7
28
29
30
31
C8
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
D4
H
~
D5
36
37
D6
N
D7
38
39
40
H
C5
D8
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board by
passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the lower
corner of the terminal board.
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
36-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0756D
August 1997
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
36-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation
diameter of .135 inch (3.43 mm) not be exceeded. To
ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if both wires are the
same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2)wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0756D
August 1997
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
36-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0756D
August 1997
12 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL252 [
Rated Voltage:
12 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
10mA (typical) at rated voltage
1.12K ohms typical
Input Current:
InputImpedance:
Input Characteristics On-state Voltage:
7.5 to 15 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage:
0 to 2.5 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Current:
0 to 2.5mA (2mA minimum at 2.5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.3 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module : 12 Volt AC, 32 Points
IC697MDL252
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
36-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL253
37
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL253)
datasheet GFK-0757C
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
Functions
The 24 volt AC Input module provides 32 input points
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows
each group of eight points to be used on a different
phase of the AC supply.
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input characteristics are compatible with a large range of available
proximity switches.
a45147
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
INPUT
24VAC
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included
at the top of the module.
A8
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers
or DIP switches on the module.
B4
Configuration is done using the configuration function
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming
Software configuration function is installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B1
B2
B3
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
10MA/PT
50/60 HZ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A1
A2
A3
A4 H
A5
A6 N
A7
A8
~
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B1
B2
B3
B4 H
B5
B6 N
B7
B8
~
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
C1
C2
C3
C4 H
C5
C6 N
C7
C8
~
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
D1
D2
D3
D4 H
D5
D6 N
D7
D8
~
40
MODULE IC697MDL253
LABEL 44A726758–026R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
37-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Operation of the 24 VOLT AC Input Module
LED
a45148
H
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
~
N
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL253
Input Characteristics
Two-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and the
OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire devices.
This module is designed to be compatible with many such
two-wire devices; however each device type must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF
states.
The 24 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide
variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state without turning on.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity switch,
find the ON state characteristics of the switch in the diagram
shown below in Figure 2. If that point falls to the left of the
input load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible
proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown below.
Three–wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage
current in the OFF State.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 5
volts or less.
3-wire
a42231
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
11
10
24V SUPPLY
8
20V SUPPLY
NON–OPERATIONAL
6
4
OPERATIONAL
2
0
0
2
4
6
I LOAD (mA)
8
10
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
37-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Module Power
a42143
TERMINALS
The 24 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from
the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
1
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inadvertent substitution of one module type for another
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
the board below the connector. The key is included with
each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
the backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It
may then be reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost
rack position.
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1
2
Module Mechanical Keying
FIELD WIRING
3
A2
A3
4
5
6
7
A4
H
A5
~
A6
N
A7
8
9
10
11
A8
B1
12
B2
13
B3
14
15
16
17
B4
H
B5
~
B6
N
B7
18
19
20
21
B8
C1
22
C2
23
C3
24
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on the
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a wire from the power source to
the power input terminal for each group (terminal
number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2wires to be routed out through
the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board by
passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the lower
corner of the terminal board.
25
26
27
H
C5
~
C6
N
C7
28
29
30
31
C8
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
36
37
D4
H
D5
~
D6
N
D7
38
39
40
C4
D8
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
37-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
37-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
37-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0757C
August 1997
24 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL253 [
Rated Voltage:
24 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
10mA (typical) at rated voltage
2.6K ohms typical
Input Current:
InputImpedance:
Input Characteristics On-state Voltage:
13.5 to 30 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage:
0 to 5 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20ms typical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.3 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module - 24 Volts AC, 32 Points
IC697MDL253
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
37-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL254
38
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL254)
datasheet GFK-0784C
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
Functions
The 48 volt AC Input module provides 32 input points
in four isolated groups of eight points each. This allows
each group of eight points to be used on a different
phase of the AC supply.
a45227
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
INPUT
48VAC
A1
A2
A3
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included
at the top of the module.
A8
Configuration is done using the configuration function
of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming
Software configuration function is installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
The input is resistive with current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 1). The input characteristics are compatible with a large range of available
proximity switches.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers
or DIP switches on the module.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A4
A5
A6
A7
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
Î Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
5MA/PT
50/60 HZ
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A1
A2
A3
A4 H
A5
A6 N
A7
A8
~
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B1
B2
B3
B4 H
B5
B6 N
B7
B8
~
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
C1
C2
C3
C4 H
C5
C6 N
C7
C8
~
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
H
~
N
40
MODULE IC697MDL254
LABEL 44A726758–028R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
38-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Operation of the 48 VOLT AC Input Module
LED
a45148
OPTO
ISOLATOR
H
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
~
N
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL254
Input Characteristics
Two-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and the
OFF state leakage current are higher than for three-wire devices. This module is designed to be compatible with many
such two-wire devices; however each device type must be
carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and
OFF states.
The 48 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a wide
variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity switch,
find the ON state characteristics of the switch in the diagram
shown below in Figure 2. If that point falls to the left of the
input load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible
proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown below.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity switch
leakage is less than 2mA with a module input voltage of 2.5
volts or less.
3-wire
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state without turning on.
Three-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage
current in the OFF State.
a44081
48V SUPPLY
15
14
12
10
NON–OPERATIONAL
8
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
40V SUPPLY
6
4
OPERATIONAL
2
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
38-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Module Power
The 48 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.30 amps from
the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
a42143
TERMINALS
1
Module Mechanical Keying
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
the backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It
may then be reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost
rack position.
5
7
9
10
11
13
15
t
A8
B2
B4
H
~
B5
16
17
B6
N
B7
18
19
20
21
B8
C1
C2
C3
25
C4
H
~
C5
26
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
~
N
B3
14
24
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board by
passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the lower
corner of the terminal board.
A6
B1
12
27
C6
N
C7
28
29
30
31
C8
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
D4
H
~
D5
36
37
D6
N
D7
38
39
40
H
A7
8
23
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a bundle
of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out through
the terminal board cavity.
A4
A5
6
22
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on the
right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a wire from the power source to
the power input terminal for each group (terminal
number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
A2
A3
4
Field Wiring
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1
2
3
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inadvertent substitution of one module type for another
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
the board below the connector. The key is included with
each module.
FIELD WIRING
D8
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
38-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
38-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
1. Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
2. Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
3. Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
38-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0784C
August 1997
48 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL254 [
Rated Voltage:
48 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
4.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
10.3K ohms typical
Input Current:
InputImpedance:
Input Characteristics On–state Voltage:
33 to 56 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off–state Voltage:
0 to 10 volts RMS, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On–state Current:
3mA to 7mA
Off–state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.3 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module: 48 Volt AC, 32 Points
IC697MDL254
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
38-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
39
IC697MDL250
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL250)
datasheet GFK-0084J
Features
a44707
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Functions
The 120 volt AC Input module for the programmable
controller provides 32 input points in four isolated
groups of eight points each. This allows each group of
eight points to be used on a different phase of the AC
supply.
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible
with a large range of available proximity switches.
INPUT
120VAC
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
B1
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
B5
Configuration is done using the configuration function
of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming software
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming
Software configuration function is installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an
IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
B2
B3
B4
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
r
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
50/60 HZ
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
A6
H
~
N
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
B2
B3
14
15
B4
B5
16
17
B6
H
~
N
B7
18
19
B8
20
21
C1
22
23
C2
C3
24
25
C4
C5
26
27
C6
H
~
N
C7
28
29
C8
30
31
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
D4
D5
36
37
D6
H
~
N
D7
38
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL250
LABEL 44A726758–004R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
39-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Operation of the 120 VOLT AC Input Module
a42140
VOLTAGE
ATTENUATOR
~
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
LED
NEUTRAL
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
BACKPLANE
FILTER
MODULE
This module is compatible with a wide range of both
2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustration below.
Input Characteristics
The 120 Volt AC Input Module is compatible with a
wide variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
ON state characteristics are compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is shown.
3-wire
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dissipation and associated high reliability and long life.
In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
2.2mA.
Input current characteristics provide 10mA typically
in the ON state, and can sink up to 2.2mA of leakage
current in the OFF state to the input device.
a42232
120 VOLTS
45
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
100 VOLTS
25
OPERATIONAL
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
39-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Module Power
The 120 Volt AC Input Module requires 0.35 amps
from the 5-volt bus on the backplane.
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
a42143
TERMINALS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on
the right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a wire from the power source to the power input terminal for each group
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power
input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board accepts
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out through
the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
FIELD WIRING
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
A1
A2
A3
A4
H
A5
~
A6
N
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
H
B5
~
B6
N
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
H
C5
~
C6
N
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
H
D5
~
D6
N
D7
D8
39-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 1. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 2.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
39-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 2. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
39-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0084J
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL250 [
Rated Voltage:
120 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
10mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
Input Current:
Input Characteristics On-state Voltage:
75 to 132 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage:
0 to 25 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Current:
0 to 3mA (2.2 minimum at 25V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.35 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module - 120 Volt AC, 32 Points
IC697MDL250
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
39-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL240
40
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL240)
datasheet GFK-0375E
Features
a44322
D 16 Isolated Points
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Functions
The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module provides 16
input points which are isolated. This allows each
point to be used on a different phase of the AC supply.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
50/60 HZ
INPUT
120VAC, ISOL
1
2
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible
with a large range of available proximity switches.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to allow correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
3
A1
4
5
A2
6
7
A3
8
9
~
A2
H
~
A3
~
H
A4
H
~
B1
H
~
B2
H
~
B3
~
N
N
N
N
10
A4
11
12
B1
13
14
15
B2
16
17
B3
18
B4
20
19
H
B4
H
~
C1
H
~
C2
H
~
N
N
N
N
21
22
C1
23
24
25
C2
27
C3
28
29
C4
30
D1
32
N
N
C3
26
~
H
C4
H
~
D1
H
~
D2
H
~
N
N
31
33
34
D2
35
37
D3
38
39
D4
N
N
D3
36
~
H
D4
H
~
N
N
40
SLOT
r
A1
H
MODULE IC697MDL240
LABEL 44A726758-007R03
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
40-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
Operation of the 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module
a42140
VOLTAGE
ATTENUATOR
~
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
LED
NEUTRAL
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
BACKPLANE
FILTER
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL240
This module is compatible with a wide range of both
2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustration below. If that point falls to the left of the input
load line, the ON state characteristics are compatible.
As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is
shown.
Input Characteristics
The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module is compatible
with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
3-wire
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dissipation and associated high reliability and long life.
In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
4mA.
Input current characteristics provide 10mA typically
in the ON state, and can sink up to 4mA of leakage
current in the OFF state to the input device.
120 VOLTS
45
a42232
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
100 VOLTS
25
OPERATIONAL
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. On-State Characteristics Compatibility
40-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
Module Power
a44321
The 120 Volt AC Isolated Input Module requires .25
amp from the 5-volt bus on the backplane.
TERMINALS
1
FIELD WIRING
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
A1
2
Module Mechanical Keying
3
A2
4
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
5
H
A3
6
7
H
A4
8
9
10
11
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
H
B1
12
13
H
B2
14
15
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note: Only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
H
H
B3
16
17
H
B4
18
19
20
21
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
H
C1
22
23
H
C2
24
25
H
C3
Field Wiring
26
27
C4
28
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each
input is isolated (separate) from each of the other inputs, each input can be powered by a separate power
source.
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires
to be routed out through the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
H
29
30
31
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
H
D1
32
33
H
D2
34
35
H
D3
36
37
D4
38
39
40
H
H
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
40-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
40-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
40-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0375E
August 1997
120 Volt AC, Isolated, 16-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL240 [
Rated Voltage
120 volts AC, 60 Hz sinusoidal
Inputs per Module
16individuallyisolated
Isolation
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between inputs
10mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
Input Current
InputCharacteristics
On-state Voltage
75 volts to 132 volts, 60 Hz sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage
0 to 20 volts, 60 Hz sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent
8mA to 15 mA
Off-state Current
0 to 4mA (2.2mA minimum at 25V input)
Filter Delay Time
20mstypical
Current Req. from 5V Bus
0.25 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module - 120 Volt AC, 16 Points, Isolated
IC697MDL240
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
40-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL251
41
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL251)
datasheet GFK-0718C
Features
a45225
D 16 Points - Four isolated groups of 4 points each
D 20 ms input filter
D Proximity switch compatible
Functions
This 120 volt AC Input module provides 16 input
points in four isolated groups of four points each.
This allows each group of four points to be used on a
different phase of the AC supply.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
FUSE
INPUT
120 VAC
A1
A2
A3
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible
with a large range of available proximity switches.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
r
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
10MA/PT
50/60 HZ
1
2
3
4
5
A1
A2
A3
A4
6
H
~
N
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B1
B2
B3
B4
16
H
~
N
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
C1
C2
C3
C4
26
H
~
N
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
D1
D2
D3
D4
H
~
N
38
39
40
MODULE IC697MDL251
LABEL 44A726758–025R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
41-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
Operation of the 120 VOLT AC16 Point Input Module
LED
a45226
H
OPTO
ISOLATOR
VOLTAGE
ATTENUATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
Y
N
USER COMMON (4 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL251
This module is compatible with a wide range of both
2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustration below.
Input Characteristics
The 120 Volt AC 16 Point Input Module is compatible
with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
ON state characteristics are compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is shown.
3-wire
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dissipation and associated high reliability and long life.
In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
2.2mA.
Input current characteristics provide 10mA typically
in the ON state, and can sink up to 2.2mA of leakage
current in the OFF state to the input device.
a42232
120 VOLTS
45
NON-OPERATIONAL
ON-STATE
VOLTAGE 25
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
100 VOLTS
OPERATIONAL
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
41-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
Module Power
The 120 Volt AC 16 Point Input Module requires 0.35
amps from the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
a45224
TERMINALS
1
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
FIELD WIRING
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
A4
H
~
N
B1
12
B2
13
B3
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
B4
H
~
N
C1
22
C2
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on
the right of this page. Since each group of four inputs
is isolated from the others, a wire from the power
source to the power input terminal for each group
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power
input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
23
C3
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
33
~
N
D2
D3
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
H
D1
32
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
C4
D4
H
~
N
41-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 2.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
41-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
41-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0718C
August 1997
120 Volt AC, 16-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL251 [
Rated Voltage:
120 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
16 (four groups of four inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
10mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
Input Current:
Input Characteristics On–state Voltage:
75 to 132 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
Off–state Voltage:
0 to 25 volts AC, 47 to 63 Hz Sinusoidal
On–state Current:
6mA to 15mA
Off–state Current:
0 to 3mA (2.2 minimum at 25V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.35 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module: 120 Volt AC, 16 Points
IC697MDL251
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
41-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL241
42
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL241)
datasheet GFK-0376G
Features
a44320
D 16 individually isolated points
D 20 ms input filter
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D Proximity switch compatible
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
Functions
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
50/60 HZ
INPUT
240VAC, ISOL
1
2
This 240 volt AC Isolated Input module for use with a
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 16
isolated input points. This allows each point to be
used on a different phase of the AC supply.
The input is reactive (resistor/capacitor input) with
current-voltage characteristics which meet IEC standard (type 2). The input characteristics are compatible
with a large range of available proximity switches.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
3
A1
4
5
A2
6
7
A3
8
9
A2
H
A3
H
A4
H
11
12
13
B1
14
15
B2
16
17
B3
18
B4
20
19
B1
H
B2
H
B3
H
B4
H
21
22
C1
23
25
C2
26
27
C3
28
29
C4
C1
H
C2
H
C3
H
C4
H
r
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
~N
30
31
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT,PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
~N
~N
10
A4
24
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
A1
H
32
D1
33
34
35
D2
36
37
D3
38
39
D4
D1
H
D2
H
D3
H
D4
H
~N
~N
~N
~N
40
SLOT
MODULE IC697MDL241
LABEL 44A726758–008R03
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
42-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
Operation of the 240 VOLT AC 16 Point Input Module
a42140
VOLTAGE
ATTENUATOR
~
NEUTRAL
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
BACKPLANE
FILTER
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL241
Input Characteristics
This module is compatible with a wide range of both
2-wire and 3-wire proximity switches. To determine
compatibility with a specific proximity switch, find the
ON state characteristics of the switch in the illustration below.
The 240 Volt AC Isolated Input Module is compatible
with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
If that point falls to the left of the input load line, the
ON state characteristics are compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 5mA at 20 volts drop is shown.
3-wire
The input circuitry is capacitive to give low heat dissipation and associated high reliability and long life.
In addition, the OFF-state current must be less than
5mA.
Input current characteristics provide 10mA typically
in the ON state, and can sink up to 5mA of leakage
current in the OFF state to the input device.
a44341
240 VOLTS
45
NON–OPERATIONAL
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 25
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
100 VOLTS
OPERATIONAL
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. On-State Characteristics Compatibility
42-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
Module Power
The 240 Volt AC 16 Isolated Input Module requires
0.25 amps from the 5 volt bus on the backplane.
a44321
TERMINALS
1
FIELD WIRING
ÎÎÎ ~
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ~~
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
~
ÎÎÎ
A1
2
Module Mechanical Keying
3
4
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. This
key is included with each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
5
6
7
9
10
11
N
H
N
H
N
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ~~
ÎÎÎ ~
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ~
ÎÎÎ
B1
12
13
H
N
H
N
H
N
H
N
B2
14
15
B3
16
17
B4
18
19
20
21
ÎÎÎ ~~
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ~
ÎÎÎ ~
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
C1
22
H
N
H
N
H
N
H
N
C2
25
C3
26
27
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
H
A4
8
24
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on
the right of this page. Since each input is isolated
from the other inputs, a wire from the power source
to the power input terminal for each input is required
(power input terminals for each input are not connected inside the module).
N
A3
23
Field Wiring
H
A2
C4
28
29
30
31
ÎÎÎ ~
ÎÎÎ ~~
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ ~
D1
32
33
H
N
H
N
H
N
H
N
D2
34
35
D3
36
37
D4
38
39
40
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL241
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
42-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 2.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
42-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
D
D
theboard cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
42-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0376G
August 1997
240 Volt AC, Isolated 16-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL241 [
Rated Voltage:
240 VAC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal
Inputs per Module:
16individuallyisolated
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
20mA (typical) at rated voltage (reactive)
Input Current:
Input Characteristics On-state Voltage:
160 to 264 volts AC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal
Off-state Voltage:
0 to 40 volts AC, 60 Hz Sinusoidal
On-stateCurrent:
10mA to 15mA
Off-state Current:
0 to 5mA (2.2 mimimum at 40V input)
Filter Delay Time:
20mstypical
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.25 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module: 240 Volt AC, Isolated, 16 Points
IC697MDL241
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
42-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL653
43
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL653)
datasheet GFK-0379F
a44082
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
D Proximity switch compatible
D Input filter selectable* - 1mS or 10mS
D One input configurable as interrupt*
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
INPUT
24 VDC, P/N
A1
* These features are available for all IC697 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be
available when this module is used with other types
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controllers
Reference Manual for details.
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
Functions
B2
B3
B4
The 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Module
provides 32 input points in four isolated groups of
eight points each. The input current-voltage characteristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
G7
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
r
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
INPUT
24 VDC, P/N
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
DC
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
B2
B3
14
15
B4
B5
16
17
DC
B6
B7
18
19
B8
20
21
C1
22
23
C2
C3
24
25
C4
C5
26
27
DC
C6
C7
28
29
C8
30
31
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
D4
D5
36
37
DC
D6
D7
38
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL653
LABEL 44A726758–011R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
43-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Operation - 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Module
LED
a44080
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
DC
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL653
Input Characteristics
This input module is designed to have both positive
and negative logic characteristics in that it sinks or
sources current from the input device to the user common. The input device is connected between the
power bus and the module input as shown above.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
3-wire.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module.
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input
current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state
without turning on.
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since
they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and
low leakage current in the OFF State.
patible with many such 2-wire devices; however each
device type must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF states.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
in the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the
left of the input load line, the ON state characteristics
are compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5
volts drop are shown below.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 5 volts or less.
24V SUPPLY
8
20V SUPPLY
a42231
NON–OPERATIONAL
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 6
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
4
SWITCH
OPERATIONAL
2
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be com-
43-2
11
10
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Input Filter Selection
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options,
this module may be configured to have either a 1mS
or 10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module,
not per point basis; all points have the same filter
time. See the applicable Programmable Controllers Reference Manual for detailed information.
er input terminals for each group are not connected
inside the module).
TERMINALS
1
2
3
Interrupt
4
5
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by input filter time selection. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controllers
Reference Manual for detailed information.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Module Mechanical Keying
14
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
16
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module (in an expansion rack).
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Field Wiring
38
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each
group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a
wire from the power source to the power input terminal (10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (pow-
40
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
39
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
a43986
FIELD WIRING
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
+
DC
+
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
+
DC
+
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
+
DC
+
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
+
DC
+
D7
D8
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL653
43-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
43-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the wire
bundle and tightly secured through the cable tie
cleat located at the lower right corner of the terminal
board. For extremely large wire bundles, additional
cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red:
high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting
the terminal board strap (attached to each module)
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a
way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be allowed
above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
43-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0379F
August 1997
24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL653 [
Rated Voltage:
24 volts DC
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any input to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs):
-3 to +30 volts DC
Input Current:
10mA (typical) at rated voltage
Input Impedance:
2.6K ohm, typical
Input Characteristics
On-state Voltage:
13.5 volts to 30 volts
On-state Current:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Voltage:
0 volts to 5 volts
Off-state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
1mS or 10mS configurable
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.30 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module, 24 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points
IC697MDL653
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory
for price and availability.
43-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL652
44
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL652)
datasheet GFK-0378F
Features
D
D
D
D
D
a44142
32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
Proximity switch compatible
Input filter selectable* - 1mS or 10mS
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
One input configurable as interrupt*
* These features are available for all IC697
Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not
be available when this module is used with other types
of PLCs. See the applicable Programming Software User’s
Manual for details.
B1
C1
B2
C2
B3
C3
B4
C4
B5
C5
B6
C6
B7
C7
B8
C8
FUSE
INPUT
12VDC, P/N
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
Functions
The 12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Input Module provides 32 input points in four isolated groups
of eight points each. The input current-voltage characteristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications.
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are
included at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of
jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
r
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
C1
B2
C2
B3
C3
B4
C4
B5
C5
B6
C6
B7
C7
B8
C8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
INPUT
12 VDC, P/N
1
2
3
A1
A2
A3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A4
A5
A6
DC
A7
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
DC
B8
20
21
C1
22
23
C2
C3
24
25
C4
27
C5
C6
26
28
29
DC
C7
C8
30
31
D1
32
33
35
Î
Î
D2
D3
34
D4
D5
36
37
DC
D6
D7
38
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL652
LABEL 44A726758–010R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
44-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Operation - 12 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module
LED
a44080
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
DC
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL652
Input Characteristics
This input module is designed to have both positive
and negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources
current from the input device to the user common.
The input device is connected between the power bus
and the module input as shown above.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D
Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
D
Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
3-wire.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
in the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the
left of the input load line, the ON state characteristics
are compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5
volts drop are shown below.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 2.5 volts or less.
a44138
10
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 programmabale controller voltage compatible output module.
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input
current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state
without turning on.
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since
they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and
low leakage current in the OFF State.
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be compatible with many such 2-wire devices; however each
device type must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF states.
44-2
15V SUPPLY
8
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
6
OPERATIONAL
NON-OPERATIONAL
4
10V SUPPLY
2
0
0
2
4
6
I LOAD (mA)
8
10
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
Input Filter Selection
With the IC697 programmable controller and certain
other CPU options, this module may be configured to
have either a 1mS or 10mS input filter. Configuration
is on a module, not per point basis; all points have the
same filter time. See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Interrupt
TERMINALS
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by input filter time selection. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller
Reference Manual for detailed information.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module (in an expansion rack).
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Field Wiring
32
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each
group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a
wire from the power source to the power input terminal (10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (power input terminals for each group are not connected
inside the module).
34
33
35
36
37
38
39
40
a43986
FIELD WIRING
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
+
DC
+
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
+
DC
+
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
+
DC
+
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
+
D5
D6
DC
+
D7
D8
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
44-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
44-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
44-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0378F
August 1997
12 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL652 [
Rated Voltage:
12 volts DC
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any input to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs):
–2.5 to +15 volts DC
Input Current:
4.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
Input Impedance:
1.12K ohm, typical
InputCharacteristics
On-state Voltage:
7.5 volts to 15 volts
On-stateCurrent:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Voltage:
0 volts to 2.5 volts
Off-state Current:
0 to 2.5mA (2mA minimum at 2.5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
1mS or 10mS configurable
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.30 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module, 12 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points
IC697MDL652
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
44-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
45
GFK-0380G
August 1997
IC697MDL654
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL654)
datasheet GFK-0380G
Features
a44079
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
D Proximity switch compatible
D Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
D One input configurable as interrupt*
* These features are available for all IC697 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be
available when this module is used with other types
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controller
Reference Manual for details.
B1 C1
B2 C2
B3 C3
B4 C4
B5 C5
B6 C6
B7 C7
B8 C8
FUSE
INPUT
48 VDC, P/N
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
Functions
B3
B4
B5
The 48 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module provides 32
input points in four isolated groups of eight points
each. The input current-voltage characteristics meet
IEC standard (type 1) specifications.
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
C4
C5
C6
G7
C8
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1 C1
B2 C2
B3 C3
B4 C4
B5 C5
B6 C6
B7 C7
B8 C8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
INPUT
48 VDC, P/N
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
+ –
A5
6
7
DC
A6
– +
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
14
15
16
17
B2
B3
B4
+ –
B5
DC
B6
– +
B7
18
19
B8
20
21
C1
22
23
24
25
C2
C3
C4
+ –
C5
DC
27
C6
C7
– +
29
C8
26
28
30
31
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
36
37
D4
+ –
D5
DC
D6
– +
D7
38
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL654
LABEL 44A726758–012
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
45-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0380G
August 1997
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Operation - 48 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module
a44080
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
DC
USER COMMON (8 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL654
Input Characteristics
This input module is designed to have both positive
and negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources
current from the input device to the user common.
The input device is connected between the power bus
and the module input as shown above.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
characteristics of the switch in the diagram shown
below. If that point falls to the left of the input load
line, the ON state characteristics are compatible. As
an example, the ON state requirements of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop are
shown below.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 5 volts or less.
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
48V SUPPLY
a44081
15
14
3-wire.
12
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module.
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure reliable operation of the switching device. Input
current is typically 4.7mA in the ON state, and can
accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state
without turning on.
NON–OPERATIONAL
10
8
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state
45-2
4
OPERATIONAL
2
0
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since
they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and
low leakage current in the OFF State.
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be compatible with many such 2-wire devices; however each
device type must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the ON and OFF states.
40V SUPPLY
6
0
1
2
I LOAD (mA)
3
4
5
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
Input Filter Selection
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options,
this module may be configured to have either a 1mS
or 10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module,
not per point basis; all points have the same filter
time. See the applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual for detailed information.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0380G
August 1997
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Interrupt
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by input filter time
selection. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual for detailed information.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
TERMINALS
1
3
5
7
9
10
11
B3
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
25
DC
B6
+
B8
C2
C4
+
C5
DC
+
C6
C7
29
30
t
B5
C3
24
28
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
+
C1
22
31
C8
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
D4
D5
36
37
D6
+
DC
+
D7
38
39
40
B4
B7
27
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes ranging from #22 (0.36 mm2 ) through #14
(2.10 mm2 ). Two wires may be terminated on a given
lug if both wires are the same size. There is room for
a bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires to be routed
out through the terminal board cavity.
A8
B2
26
The module is wired as shown in the illustration on
the right of this page. Since each group of eight inputs is isolated from the others, a wire from the power source to the power input terminal for each group
(terminal number 10, 20, 30, or 40) is required (power
input terminals for each group are not connected inside the module).
DC
+
B1
13
Field Wiring
A6
+
A7
8
17
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
A4
A5
12
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
A2
A3
4
6
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1
2
Module Mechanical Keying
a43986
FIELD WIRING
D8
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections
45-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0380G
August 1997
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 5.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
45-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
ranging from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2 ) through AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2 ). It is important that when using
AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wire for wiring all points,
that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2 ) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0380G
August 1997
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
45-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0380G
August 1997
48 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL654 [
Rated Voltage:
48 volts DC
Inputs per Module:
32 (four groups of eight inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs)
–3 to +56 volts DC
Input Current:
4.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
InputImpedance:
10.3K ohm, typical
Input Characteristics On-state Voltage:
33 volts to 56 volts
Off-state Current
3mA to 7mA
Off-state Voltage:
0 volts to 10 volts
Off-state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
1 ms or 10 ms configurable
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.30 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module: 48 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,32Points
IC697MDL654
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
45-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
46
GFK-0719D
August 1997
IC697MDL640
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module (IC697MDL640)
datasheet GFK-0719D
Features
a45223
D 16 Points - Four isolated groups of four points each
D Positive/NegativeLogicCompatibility
D Proximity switch compatible
D Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
INPUT
125VDC, P/N
A1
A2
A3
A4
Functions
B1
B2
The 125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Input Module provides 16 input points in four isolated groups of four
points each. The input current-voltage characteristics
meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included
at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers
or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
D One input configurable as interrupt*
* These features are available for all IC697 Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC). They may not be available when this module is used with other types of PLCs.
See the applicable Programmable Controller Reference
Manual for details.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
D1
D2
D3
D4
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î Î
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
5MA/PT
1
2
3
4
5
A1
A2
A3
A4
+ –
6
DC
– +
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
B1
B2
B3
B4
+ –
DC
– +
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
C1
C2
C3
C4
+ –
DC
– +
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
D1
D2
D3
D4
+ –
DC
– +
39
40
MODULE IC697MDL640
LABEL 44A726758–024R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
46-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0719D
August 1997
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
Operation of the 125 Volt DC Pos/Neg Input Module
LED
VOLTAGE
ATTENUATOR
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
a44080
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
DC
USER COMMON (4 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL640
Input Characteristics
the proximity switch leakage is less than 2mA with a
module input voltage of 35 volts or less.
This input module is designed to have both positive and
negative logic characteristics - it sinks or sources current
from the input device to the user common. The input
device is connected between the power bus and the
module input as shown above.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input
devices, such as:
D Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
D Electronic proximity switches, both 2 and 3-wire.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly driven
by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output module.
a45221
125V SUPPLY
35
30
NON–OPERATIONAL
25
20
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
SWITCH
15
10
97V SUPPLY
5
OPERATIONAL
0
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to ensure
reliable operation of the switching device. Input current is typically 5mA in the ON state, and can accept up
to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF state without turning on.
Thermal Derating
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since they
provide low voltage drop in the ON state and low leakage current in the OFF State.
If this input module is operated above the normal input
voltage of 125 VDC, it may be necessary to derate the
number of input points used per group as shown below.
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage and
the OFF state leakage current are higher than for 3-wire
devices. This module is designed to be compatible with
many such 2-wire devices; however each device type
must be carefully evaluated for compatibility in both the
ON and OFF states.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch in
the diagram shown below. If that point falls to the left
of the input load line, the ON state characteristics are
compatible. As an example, the ON state requirements
of a compatible proximity switch of 3mA at 5 volts drop
are shown below. OFF state compatibility is assured if
46-2
0
1
2
I LOAD (mA)
3
4
5
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
130V SUPPLY
4
NUMBER
OF
INPUTS
ON PER
GROUP
a45222
135V, 145V
SUPPLY
3
2
1
0
10°C 20°C 30°C 40°C 50°C 60°C
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (°C)
Figure 3. Input Points vs. Temperature
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0719D
August 1997
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
For example, if an input voltage of 130 volts DC or less
is used to activate the input module, no derating is required. However, if input voltages greater than or equal
to 135 volts DC are used, no more than 3 inputs per
group should be simultaneously activated at ambient
temperatures greater than 50°C (122°F).
Input Filter Selection
a47014
TERMINALS
1
3
5
6
7
Interrupt
14
8
9
11
13
17
18
19
20
21
23
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inadvertent substitution of one module type for another
in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on
the board below the connector. The key is included with
each module.
26
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
the backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It
may then be reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into the rack in the desired location. Note
that only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost
rack position.
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in the following illustration. Since each group of four inputs is isolated from the
others, a wire from the power source to the power input
terminal for each group (terminal number 10, 20, 30, or
40) is required (power input terminals for each group
are not connected inside the module).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
B4
DC
C2
C3
25
27
28
29
30
31
C4
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
DC
D1
32
33
D2
D3
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
B2
C1
22
24
DC
B3
16
Module Mechanical Keying
A4
B1
12
15
When used with the IC697 CPU, input point A1 may be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the
CPU to be interrupted on either the rising or falling edge of
the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by input filter time selection. Refer to the applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual for detailed information.
A2
A3
4
10
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1
2
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options, this
module may be configured to have either a 1mS or
10mS input filter. Configuration is on a module, not per
point basis; all points have the same filter time. See the
applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual for
detailed information.
FIELD WIRING
D4
DC
Figure 4. Field Wiring Connections
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10 mm2).
Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if both wires
are the same size. There is room for a bundle of forty #14
(2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out through the terminal
board cavity. The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at
the lower corner of the terminal board.
46-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0719D
August 1997
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all I/O modules for the IC697
PLC are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 5. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminals boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 6.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
46-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0719D
August 1997
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 6. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance
be allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
46-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0719D
August 1997
125 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic, 16-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL640 [
Rated Voltage:
125 volts DC
Inputs per Module ]:
16 (four groups of four inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts RMS - any input to backplane
500 volts RMS between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs)
–35 to +145 volts DC
Input Current:
5mA (typical) at rated voltage
InputImpedance:
24.5K ohm, typical
Input Characteristics Positive: 90 volts to 145 volts
Negative: –20 volts to Vs –90 volts
3mA to 7mA
On-state Voltage:
On-stateCurrent:
Off-state Voltage:
Positive: –35 volts to +35 volts
Negative: Vs –35 volts to 56 volts
Off-state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA mimimum at 125V input)
Filter Delay Time:
1 ms or 10 ms configurable
Current Required from 5VDC backplane bus:
0.30 amps
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
]Number of inputs on is dependent upon ambient temperature as shown in Figure 3.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module: 125 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,16Points
IC697MDL640
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
46-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL651
47
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module (IC697MDL651)
datasheet GFK-0377D
Features
D
32 TTL compatible Input points
D
No user power required
D
Each Input has pullup resistor
D
Input filter selectable* - 1 ms or 10 ms
D
One input configurable as interrupt*
* These features are available for all IC697
programmable controllers (PLCs). They may not be
available when this module is used with other types
of PLCs. See the applicable Programmable Controller
Installation Manual for details.
a44723
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
INPUT
TTL
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
Functions
B2
B3
The TTL Input Module for the IC697 programmable
controller provides 32 TTL compatible input points
which are configured as one group.
No user power is required and the use of open-collector drivers is simplified since each input has an internal pullup.
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are included at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
5V, 3MA/PT
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
B2
B3
14
15
B4
B5
16
17
B6
B7
18
19
B8
COM 1
20
21
C1
22
23
C2
C3
24
25
C4
C5
26
27
C6
C7
28
29
C8
30
31
D1
32
33
35
D4
D5
36
37
D6
D7
38
39
40
D2
D3
34
D8
COM 2
MODULE IC697MDL651
LABEL 44A726758-009R03
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
47-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Operation - TTL Input Module
a44859
ISOLATED
5V
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
USER COMMON
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL651
Input Characteristics
Interrupt
This input module is designed to have negative logic
characteristics - it sinks current from the input device
to the user common. The input device is connected
between the power bus and the module input as
shown above.
When used with an IC697 CPU, input point A1 may
be configured to cause a CPU interrupt. Configuration allows the CPU to be interrupted on either the
rising or falling edge of the signal transition. Interrupt response is not affected by input filter time selection. Refer to the Programmable Controller Installation Manual for detailed information.
This module is compatible with a wide variety of input devices, such as:
D
Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
D
Counters, BCD outputs, and other TTL compatible outputs.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module.
The module contains an isolated 5V supply and pullup resistors for each input point. This configuration
simplifies the use of open-collector drivers and eliminates the need for a user supplied power source.
Input current is typically 1.7mA in the ON state, and
can accept up to 1.1mA leakage current in the OFF
state without turning on.
Input Filter Selection
With the IC697 PLC and certain other CPU options,
this module may be configured to have either a 1 ms
or 10 ms input filter. Configuration is on a module,
not per point basis; all points have the same filter
time. See the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual and the Programming Software User’s
Manual for detailed information.
47-2
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module (in an expansion rack).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since the
32 points share a common, only one connection is required between user common and the module common (pin 20 or 40). However, two user connections
are provided for wiring convenience.
a44724
TERMINALS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
COM 1
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
FIELD WIRING
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
COM 2
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL651
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
47-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ Î
Î
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 3.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
47-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
47-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0377D
August 1997
TTL, Negative Logic, 32-Point Input Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL651 [
Rated Voltage:
5 volts DC
Inputs per Module:
32
98.4’ (30m) maximum cable length
Isolation:
1500 volts - any input to backplane
Input Voltage Range (Vs):
-3 to +7 volts DC
Input Characteristics
Impedance:
5.9K ohms, ±5%
On-state Voltage:
-3 volts to 0.5 volts
Off-state Voltage:
2 volts to 7 volts
On-state Current:
1.7mA (typical) at rated voltage
Off-state Current:
1.1mA (maximum)
Filter Delay Time:
1 ms or 10 ms configurable
Current Required from 5V Bus:
.53 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Input Module, Negative Logic TTL, 32 Points
IC697MDL651
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price
andavailability.
47-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Input Modules
IC697MDL671
48
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic (IC697MDL671)
datasheet GFK-0880C
a47013
Features
H
16 points total - 4 isolated groups of 4 points each
H
14 interrupt points; 2 configuration points
H
Positive/Negativelogiccompatibility
H
Proximity switch compatible
H
Input filter selectable - 1 ms or 10 ms
H
All 14 interrupts can run at maximum I/O
interrupt rate (See Table 1 for module
specifications).
H
First input configured as interrupt
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
A1
A2
A3
B1
B2
The 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Interrupt Input
Module provides 16 points total in four isolated groups
of four points each. The first 14 points (A1 through D2)
are interrupt inputs and the last 2, D3 and D4 are
configuration inputs. The input current-voltage
characteristics meet IEC standard (type 1) specifications.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point are located at the top of the module.
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O
references are user configurable without the use of
jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
D1
D2
EDGE SELECT
D3
Configuration is done using the configuration
function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr
programming software running on Windowsr 95 or
Windows NTr over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the
SNP port. The Programming Software configuration
function is installed on the programming device. The
programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2
or compatible Personal Computer.
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
INTERRUPT
–––
24 VDC, P/N
A4
Functions
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
RISING=N/C
–––
FALLING = 24 VDC
FILTER SELECT
D4
1ms=N/C
10ms=24
SLOT
–––
VDC
10 MA/PT
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
4
A4
5
DC
6
7
8
9
10
11
B1
12
13
B2
B3
14
15
B4
DC
16
17
18
19
20
21
C1
22
23
C2
C3
24
25
C4
DC
26
27
28
29
30
31
D1
32
33
34
35
D2
* D3
* D4
DC
36
37
38
39
40
*CONFIGURA TION
MODULE IC697MDL671
LABEL 44A726758–029R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
48-1
Discrete Input Modules
2
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Operation - 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic Interrupt Module
Operation of the Interrupt module is described
following the illustration of a block diagram of the
module.
a47022
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
FILTER
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
DC
USER COMMON (4 CIRCUITS)
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL671
This interrupt module will generate an interrupt to
the PLC, allowing the execution of an interrupt block,
when any or all of its 14 interrupt inputs satisfy its
configured edge and filter selection. All interrupts are
reported as one word at the module’s selected
reference address. The PLC reads the interrupt word
and acknowledges the interrupt. The module is then
ready to generate the next PLC interrupt.
Note
If you are using CPU software earlier than Release 6.00 this module requires a ladder diagram
to perform the above functions The ladder diagram is provided as Attachment A at the
end of this data sheet.
available configuration option is to select the %I
reference address.
Module Configuration
The configuration inputs D3 and D4 configure all 14
interrupt inputs at power-up. The module will default
to rising edge trigger and 1 ms interrupt filter with no
configuration input connection. Configuration inputs
D3 and D4 are read only at system power-up.
Activating input D3 will reconfigure the module (after a
power cycle) for falling edge detection. Activating input
D4 will reconfigure the module (after a power cycle) for
a 10 ms interrupt filter. The module configuration
cannot change after power-up.
I/O Triggered Interrupt Block
Interrupts are edge triggered and require a minimum
pulse width (as configured) for the trigger to occur.
Interrupts on a single input may not occur at a
frequency greater than 500 Hz with a model CPM915
CPU (frequency depends on model of CPU, see Table
1 for more information). Within an interrupt module,
interrupts will be reported as they are received which
means that all interrupts have equal priority. Multiple
interrupts may be reported simultaneously.
Each Interrupt module can call one LD (Ladder
Diagram) program block triggered by the first input
address configured for the module (similar to other
IC697 Input modules). This means that an Interrupt
module configured at %I0001 must be programmed
to execute an LD program block triggered by %I0001.
To do this, the program block must first be included in
the program block declarations and then entered in
the interrupt declaration editor.
Software Configuration Requirements
Event Triggered Programs
Release 4.02 or later of IC641 programming software
is required for configuration of the module. When the
module is selected via the Configuration function, the
proper configuration is automatically set. The only
Each interrupt module can cause an event-triggered
program to be scheduled for execution. The trigger
must be the first %I reference configured for this
module.
48-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
3
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Interrupt Word Default
At power-up, configuration dependent default data is
present at the %I reference for the Interrupt module
regardless of the level of each interrupt input. The
default data for rising edge selection is all zeros; the
default data for falling edge selection is all ones. The
level of the configuration bits detected at power-up
will also be present in the default word.
Interrupt Reporting
An interrupt received on any of the 14 interrupt
inputs will cause an interrupt to be sent to the CPU.
The CPU will read the interrupt module and capture
the interrupt conditions at the time the CPU interrupt
was generated. This data will be written to the %I
reference that has been configured for the module.
Current interrupt data is valid within the interrupt
block only. Each interrupt input corresponds to a bit
in the interrupt word. The interrupt word also
contains the module configuration read at power-up.
Modules configured for positive edge trigger will
report a 1 (one) for active interrupts while negative
edge interrupts will report a 0 (zero) for active
interrupts. The interrupt handling logic must
reference the %I data to determine which subset of
the interrupt points are active (see Interrupt Handling
Logic below).
Interrupt Word
Two examples of interrupt reports are shown below.
RISING EDGE
D4 D3
1 0
D2 D1 C4 C3 C2 C1 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
D4 = 10 ms Filter Select
D3 = Rising Edge Select
A2 = Positive Interrupt
FALLING EDGE
D4 D3
0 1
D2 D1 C4 C3 C2 C1 B4 B3 B2 B1 A4 A3 A2 A1
1 1 1 1 1 1
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D4 = 1 ms Filter Select
D3 = Falling Edge Select
B4 = Negative Interrupt
Interrupt Handling Logic
Any user application logic you have developed for an
interrupt module should be contained in the interrupt
handling logic associated with that module. Logic
outside of the interrupt handling logic will have no
meaningful data to act upon. The interrupt bits and
associated transitions are undefined outside of the interrupt
handling logic.
If the interrupt handling logic is an interrupt block
within the RLD program, then the global %I contacts
and/or %I transition contacts can be referenced to
determine which interrupt points are active.
If the interrupt handling logic is an event-triggered
standalone C program, then the %I word should be
included in the program’s input specification list. This
data can then be referenced using the input
specification macros to determine which interrupt
points are active. Refer to the C Programmer’s Toolkit
Reference Manual for more information.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Note
Referencing the global %I data directly
from within a standalone C program is not
recommended since the global data may
not reflect the state of the %I bits at the
time at which the interrupt occurred.
If the interrupt handling logic is an event-triggered
RLD program, then the global %I data can be
referenced to determine which interrupt points are
active. However, this is not recommended since the
global %I data may not reflect the state of the %I bits
at the time that the interrupt occurred.
Refer to the IC697 Programmable Controller Reference
Manual for more information on interrupt handling
logic.
48-3
Discrete Input Modules
4
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
H
Interrupt Buffer
Interrupts received while the CPU is processing a
previous interrupt will be stored in a buffer. When the
CPU acknowledges the previous interrupt, the module
will immediately generate a new CPU interrupt to
report all of the buffered interrupts. For buffered
interrupts, data is not available about the number of
interrupts received on a single input. Information about
the order in which interrupts from different inputs
occurred is also not available for buffered interrupts.
Important Module Information
H
Interrupt modules cannot be used in a Remote I/O
Scanner rack since a remote drop cannot have any
I/O module interrupts.
H
If a DOIO instruction is used with an I/O
interrupt, transition contacts associated with
scanned inputs may not operate as expected.
H
When using the Mask/Unmask I/O Interrupt
Service Request #17 (SVCREQ #17), the mask
applies to all interrupts on the module. When
entering the address of the interrupt to mask, use
the first %I reference of the module.
Caution
Caution should be exercised since an I/O
interrupt can interrupt the execution of a
function block in the main block or any
program block. This means that unexpected results may occur if the interrupt
block and a program block access the
same data.
Electronic proximity switches, both 2-wire and
3-wire.
In addition, inputs on this module may be directly
driven by any IC697 PLC voltage compatible output
module.
The input circuitry provides sufficient current to
ensure reliable operation of the switching device.
Input current is typically 10mA in the ON state, and
can accept up to 2 mA leakage current in the OFF
state without turning on.
3-wire proximity switches are easily applied, since
they provide low voltage drop in the ON state and
low leakage current in the OFF State.
2-wire proximity switches derive their power from the
signal connections; thus both the ON state voltage
and the OFF state leakage current are higher than for
3-wire devices. This module is designed to be
compatible with many such 2-wire devices; however
each device type must be carefully evaluated for
compatibility in both the ON and OFF states.
To determine compatibility with a specific proximity
switch, find the ON state characteristics of the switch
in the diagram shown in Figure 2. If that point falls to
the left of the input load line, the ON state
characteristics are compatible. As an example, the ON
state requirements of a compatible proximity switch
of 3mA at 5 volts drop are shown in Figure 2.
OFF state compatibility is assured if the proximity
switch leakage is less than 2mA with a module input
voltage of 5 volts or less.
a42231
Input Characteristics
This input module is designed to have both positive and
negative logic characteristics in that it sinks or sources
current from the input device to the user common. The
input device is connected between the power bus and
the module input as shown in Figure 1.
8
20V SUPPLY
NON–OPERATIONAL
OPERATIONAL
2
0
0
2
4
6
8
10
I LOAD (mA)
Figure 2. Proximity Switch Compatibility
Pushbuttons, limit switches, selector switches;
48-4
24V SUPPLY
ON–STATE
VOLTAGE 6
ACROSS
PROXIMITY
4
SWITCH
This module is compatible with a wide variety of
input devices, such as:
H
11
10
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
5
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto
the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring
the slot to accept only identical module types.
a47014
TERMINALS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it
upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that in an IC697 PLC rack only the power supply
can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1
(adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a
CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module (in an expansion rack).
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Field Wiring
22
The module is wired as shown in Figure 3. Since each
group of four inputs is isolated from the others, a wire
from the power source to the power input terminal
(10, 20, 30, or 40) for each group is required (power
input terminals for each group are not connected
inside the module). Each group can be powered to
operate as either positive logic or negative logic.
24
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
FIELD WIRING
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
A1
A2
A3
A4
+
DC
+
B1
B2
B3
B4
+
DC
+
C1
C2
C3
C4
+
DC
+
D1
D2
D3
D4
+
DC
+
Figure 3. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL671
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
48-5
Discrete Input Modules
6
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features
referenced in the following procedures which are
common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the
following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 4. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing
terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the
module to access a jackscrew which holds the
terminal board securely in place. The detachable
field wiring terminal board can now be removed
from the module by turning the jackscrew
counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
48-6
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43
mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper
connection, two wires may be terminated on any
one terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a
maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If
AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then
wire markers should be placed at least 8 inches
(203 mm) from termination end to provide
sufficient space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
7
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 5. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is
recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around
the wire bundle and tightly secured through the
cable tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red:
high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting
the terminal board strap (attached to each module)
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures
the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
that at least a 6 inch (152 mm) clearance be allowed
above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when
removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
H
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
H
Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
H
Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
48-7
Discrete Input Modules
8
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Attachment A - Using CPU Software Earlier Than Release 6.00
IC641 Programming Software Support Ladder Logic
Unsupported CPU Interface to Module
The following logic is required for each Interrupt
module used without the availability of full PLC CPU
support. This logic contains the following required
operations:
H First scan interrupt acknowledge to clear
interrupts occurring during the PLC CPU STOP
mode.
H Reads the interrupt word at slot address +92H
using a VME READ instruction.
H Interrupt acknowledge: two VME WRITE
instructions using inputs 1DH (Hexadecimal) and
15H (Hexadecimal) at slot address +81H
(Hexadecimal).
H Toggle module’s %I reference for transition
contacts.
Full CPU support for this module was not available
with CPU software prior to Release 6.00. The
Interrupt module requires IC641 programming
software ladder logic when using CPU software
earlier than Release 6.00. This logic is available on the
PLC Bulletin Board with a file name of gfk671.zip. For
information on how to use the Bulletin board, contact
your local authorized PLC distributor or sales office.
Also, the following rules must be followed when
using the module:
H
The Interrupt module will only function when
installed in Rack 0.
H
Calls to other program blocks and external blocks
are not allowed inside an interrupt block.
H
The Mask/Unmask I/O Interrupt Service Request
#17 (SVCREQ #17) cannot be used.
H
Event triggered programs are not supported.
|[
PROGRAM BLOCK DECLARATIONS
+–––––––+
| INT3 |
+–––––––+
|[
INTERRUPTS
Note
Do not use this ladder logic with CPU software Release 6.00, or later. It is only intended to be used with CPU software prior
to Release 6.00
]
LANG: LD
(* Interrupt bd slot 3
*)
]
(*************************************************************************)
(* Interrupt Block I/O triggered by first %I reference address for the
*)
(* module.
*)
(*************************************************************************)
+–––––––––––––+
+––––––––>[%I00001]––––>|CALL
INT3 |
+–––––––––––––+
[
START OF PROGRAM LOGIC – MAIN BLOCK
]
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* First scan call resets board and clears interrupts which may have *)
| (* occurred during PLC stop mode. Should be the first rung in main.
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 5 >>
|
|FST_SCN +–––––––––––––+
+––] [–––+CALL
INT3 +
|
+–––––––––––––+
|
[
END OF PROGRAM LOGIC
]
48-8
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
9
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
+[
|
|[
START
OF
LD
BLOCK
INT3
]
VARIABLE DECLARATIONS
]
V A R I A B L E
REFERENCE
–––––––––
%I00001
%L00001
%L00010
%L00011
%L00012
%L00013
%L00014
%L00015
%L00016
%L00017
%L00018
|
|
|
|
GFK-0880C
August 1997
NICKNAME
––––––––
ITABLE3
SLOTTAB
SLOT#
INTADD
HINT
MODEADD
HMODE
INTWD3
TIME1
DELAYT
TIME2
D E C L A R A T I O N
T A B L E
REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Interrupt Table
Slot Address Table
Slot number
Interrupt word address.
High Interrupt Address. (0)
Mode register Address.
High Mode Address (0).
Interrupt Word
Time from start of sweep.
Time1 + delay time.
Time after delay elapse.
(**********************************************************************)
(* Data Init below is look–up table for Rack 0 slot addressing.
*)
(* %L12 and %L14 clear upper address for INTADD and MODEADD.
*)
(**********************************************************************)
_____________________________________________________________________________
|
|
|
D A T A _ I N I T
F U N C T I O N
|
|
|
|
New Value >
Element: 00001
Length: 00009
|
|
|
|
(Ordered left to right)
|
|
1
+00000
+04096
+06144
+08192
+10240
|
|
6
+12288
+14336
+16384
+18432
|
|_____________________________________________________________________________|
| << RUNG 4 >>
|
|FST_EXE +–––––+
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––] [–––+DATA_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
|
|INIT_|
| INT |
| INT |
|
| INT |
|
|
|
|
|
|
Q+–SLOTTAB CONST –+IN Q+– HINT
CONST –+IN Q+– HMODE
|
| LEN |
+00000 | LEN |
+00000 | LEN |
|
|00009|
|00001|
|00001|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+–––––+
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
t
(*************************************************************************)
(* User to provide slot# for Interrupt board at constant 3 example below.*)
(* INTADD = Interrupt word address; slot + 92h
*)
(* MODEADD = Reset address; slot + 81h.
*)
(*************************************************************************)
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
48-9
Discrete Input Modules
10
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
| << RUNG 6 >>
|
|FST_EXE +–––––+
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––] [–––+MOVE_+–––––––––––––––––+ ADD_+–––––––––––––––––+ ADD_+–
|
| INT |
| INT |
| INT |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST –+IN Q+– SLOT#
CONST –+I1 Q+–INTADD
CONST –+I1 Q+–MODEADD
| +00003 | LEN |
+00146 |
|
+00129 |
|
|
|00001|
(92h) |
|
(81h) |
|
|
+–––––+
@SLOT# –+I2
|
@SLOT# –+I2
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
|
£| << RUNG 7 >>
|
|FST_EXE
+––]/[––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> SKPFST
|
| (*********************************************************************)
| (* First scan logic clears interrupts which may have occurred while *)
| (* PLC–CPU was in stop mode.
*)
| (*********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 9 >>
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
|
| WRT_|
| WRT_|
|
| BYTE|
| BYTE|
|
CONST –+IN
|
CONST –+IN
|
|
001C | LEN |
0014 | LEN |
|
|00001|
|00001|
|
CONST –+AM
|
CONST –+AM
|
|
0029 |
|
0029 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MODEADD–+ADR |
MODEADD–+ADR |
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
|
| << RUNG 10 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––+ SVC_+–––––––––+ ADD_+–
|
| REQ |
| UINT|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST –+FNC | TIME1 –+I1 Q+–DELAYT
| 00009 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| TIME1 –+PARM | CONST –+I2
|
|
+–––––+
00002 +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 11 >>
|
| DELAY :
|
48-10
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
11
GFK-0880C
August 1997
| << RUNG 12 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––+ SVC_+–––––––––+ LT_ +–
|
| REQ |
| UINT|
|
|
|
|
|
| CONST –+FNC | TIME2 –+I1 Q+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> DELAY
| 00009 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
| TIME2 –+PARM | DELAYT –+I2
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
|
| << RUNG 13 >>
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
|
| WRT_|
| WRT_|
|
| BYTE|
| BYTE|
|
CONST –+IN
|
CONST –+IN
|
|
001C | LEN |
0015 | LEN |
|
|00001|
|00001|
|
CONST –+AM
|
CONST –+AM
|
|
0029 |
|
0029 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MODEADD–+ADR |
MODEADD–+ADR |
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
| << RUNG 14 >>
|
+–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> EXIT
|
| << RUNG 15 >>
|
|SKPFST :
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Read interrupt word at slot address + 92h.
*)
| (* Length must be two bytes.
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 17 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
|
| RD_|
|
| BYTE|
|
CONST –+AM
|
|
0029 | LEN |
|
|00002|
|
INTADD –+ADR Q+–INTWD3
|
+–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Interrupt board reset (HSI toggle for interrupt acknowledge = slot *)
| (* address + 81h).
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
48-11
Discrete Input Modules
12
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
| << RUNG 19 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–––––––––––––––––+ VME_+–
|
| WRT_|
| WRT_|
|
| BYTE|
| BYTE|
|
CONST –+IN
|
CONST –+IN
|
|
001D | LEN |
0015 | LEN |
|
|00001|
|00001|
|
CONST –+AM
|
CONST –+AM
|
|
0029 |
|
0029 |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
MODEADD–+ADR |
MODEADD–+ADR |
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Tests for falling edge configuration from config input D3.
*)
| (* Bit test Interrupt word (INTWD3) bit 15.
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 21 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+––––––––+ BIT_+–
|
|TEST_|
|
| WORD|
|INTWD3 –+IN Q+––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––>> FALLEDG
|
| LEN |
|
|00001|
| CONST –+BIT |
| 00015 +–––––+
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Toggles transition table for positive transition contacts/coils
*)
| (* which function within the interrupt block only.
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 23 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––+ AND_+–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
|INTWD3 –+I1 Q+–ITABLE3 INTWD3 –+IN Q+–ITABLE3
|
| LEN |
| LEN |
|
|00001|
|00001|
| CONST –+I2
|
+–––––+
|
C000 +–––––+
|
| << RUNG 24 >>
|
+--------------------------------------------------------------------->> USER
|
48-12
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Input Modules
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
13
GFK-0880C
August 1997
|
| << RUNG 25 >>
|
|FALLEDG :
|
|
| (**********************************************************************)
| (* Toggles transition table for negative transition contacts/coils
*)
| (* which function within the interrupt block only.
*)
| (**********************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 27 >>
|
|
+–––––+
+–––––+
+––––––––+ OR_ +–––––––––––––––––+MOVE_+–
|
| WORD|
| WORD|
|
|
|
|
|
|INTWD3 –+I1 Q+–ITABLE3 INTWD3 –+IN Q+–ITABLE3
|
| LEN |
| LEN |
|
|00001|
|00001|
| CONST –+I2
|
+–––––+
|
3FFF +–––––+
|
|
| << RUNG 28 >>
|
| USER :
|
| (*************************************************************************)
| (* User logic to be inserted here. A DOIO at the end of user logic on
*)
| (* outputs associated with the interrupts is suggested for best thru–put.*)
| (*************************************************************************)
|
| << RUNG 30 >>
|
+ EXIT :
|
+[
END OF BLOCK LOGIC
]
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
48-13
Discrete Input Modules
14
GFK-0880C
August 1997
Interrupt Module, 14 Point, 24 Volt DC Positive/Negative Logic
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL671 [
Rated Voltage:
24 volts DC
Inputs per Module:
14 interrupts (total of 16 inputs with four groups of four inputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any input to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Input Voltage Range (Vs):
–3 to +30 volts DC
Input Current:
10mA (typical) at rated voltage
InputImpedance:
2.6K ohm, typical
InputCharacteristics
On-state Voltage:
Positive: 13.5 volts to 30 volts
Negative: –3 volts to Vs –13.5 volts
On-stateCurrent:
6mA to 15mA
Off-state Voltage:
Positive: –3 volts to 5 volts
Negative: Vs –5 volts to 30 volts
Off-state Current:
0 to 2mA (2mA minimum at 5V input)
Filter Delay Time:
1 ms or 10 ms configurable
Minimum Pulse Width
1 ms Filter Select: 1 ms on and off
10 ms Filter Select: 11 ms on and off
Minimum Interrupt Burst (1 ms Filter Selection) [
Single Point:
withIC697CPM915CPU
at 1 second PLC WatchdogSetting
with IC697CPU731 CPU
at 2.5 seconds PLC WatchdogSetting
Minimum Through-Put *
Interrupt Input to Discrete Output Response
with IC697CPM915 CPU and IC697MDL740
Output Module with DOIO Function
500 Hz
290 Hz
1.5 ms
* Amount of user logic in the interrupt block may affect performance.
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.30 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Interrupt Input Module, 24 Volt DC Positive/NegativeLogic,14interrupt points (16 points total)
IC697MDL671
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the factory for price and availability.
48-14
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL350
49
GFK-0081H
August 1997
Discrete Output Modules
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL350)
datasheet GFK-0081H
a44710
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 0.5 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (20x rated current)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
The 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module provides 32
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each.
This allows each group of 8 points to be used on a different phase of the AC supply. Each group of 8 outputs is individually fused with a 5 amp fuse.
The module provides a high degree of inrush current
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of
inductive and incandescent loads. The module will
pick up most size 2 contactors.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuits as well as
an LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located
together at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
FUSE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
OUTPUT
120VAC
0.5A/PT
PILOT DUTY
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
r
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
50/60 HZ
2A MAX/GRP
1
2
A1
3
A2
5
A4
4
A3
A5
6
7
A6
9
A8
8
H
~
N
A7
10
11
12
B1
13
B2
15
B4
B3
14
16
B5
17
B6
19
B8
18
H
~
N
B7
20
21
22
C1
23
C2
25
C4
27
C6
29
C8
24
C3
26
C5
28
H
~
N
C7
30
31
D1
32
33
D2
35
D4
D3
34
D5
36
37
D6
39
D8
H
~
N
D7
38
40
MODULE IC697MDL350
LABEL 44A726758-005R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
49-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0081H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Operation of the 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OPEN FUSE
DETECTOR
ÎÎ Î
a42138
~
FUSE
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
COMMON
ÎÎÎ
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL350
Output Characteristics
Fault Mode Selection
The 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D Solenoids and motor starters
D Indicators
The rating of 0.5 amps per point applies to the longterm current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current capacity for each group of 8 outputs is limited
at higher temperatures (refer to the specifications on
the last page of this data sheet).
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating.
The rate at which such surges can be repeated depends on the current rating of the device and the
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON). For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty
cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
Steady-state
Current (mA)
100
250
500
49-2
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to certain operating or default conditions.
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
This is explained in more detail in the applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Fusing
Each group of 8 outputs is fused with a 5 amp fuse.
Replaces with a 5 amp fuses. Replace with either of
the following types:
D 3AG - 5 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 5 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
5
1
0.1
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0081H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
a42146
TERMINALS
1
A1
2
3
4
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling if off the rail.
It may then be reinstated onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note: only the power supply can be placed in he leftmost rack position.
A2
A3
5
6
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
FIELD WIRING
H
A4
7
~
N
A5
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
12
B1
13
14
B2
B3
15
16
H
B4
17
18
~
N
B5
B6
B7
19
B8
20
21
22
C1
23
Field Wiring
24
25
26
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of
eight outputs is isolated from the others, a wire from
the power source to the power input terminals for
each group is required (power input terminals for
each group are not connected inside the module).
C2
C3
27
28
~
N
C5
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 wires to be
routed out through the terminal board cavity.
H
C4
34
D2
D3
36
H
D4
35
D5
D6
37
38
~
N
D7
39
D8
40
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
49-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0081H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 4.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
49-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.1
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.1 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.1 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.1 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0081H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
49-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0081H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL350 [
Rated Voltage:
120 volts AC
Outputs per Module:
32 (four groups of 8 outputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between groups
Output Voltage Range:
85 to 132 volt, 47-63 Hz
Output Current:
0.5 amps maximum per point
2 amps maximum per group
Output Characteristics Inrush Current:
10 amps maximum per point for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop:
3 volts maximum
Response Time-On:
1 ms maximum
Response Time-Off:
1/2cycle
OutputLeakage:
1.5 mA maximum
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.5 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module - 120 Volt AC 0.5 Amp, 32 Points
IC697MDL350
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
49-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL340
50
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module (IC697MDL340)
datasheet GFK-0082H
Features
a44711
D 16 Points - Four isolated groups of 4 points each
D 2 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
OUTPUT
Functions
120VAC
2A/PT
PILOT DUTY
A1
The 120 Volt AC 2 Amp Output Module provides 16
output points in four isolated groups of four points
each. This allows each group of four points to be used
on different phases of the AC supply. Each group of
four outputs is individually fused with a 10 amp fuse.
The module provides a high degree of inrush current
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of
inductive and incandescent loads. The module will
pick up most size 4 contactors.
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
LED indicators which give the ON/OFF status of each
point on the logic(PLC) side of the circuit as well as an
LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located together at the top of the module.
C1
C2
C3
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of DIP
switches or jumpers on the module.
C4
D1
D2
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowse programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
r
D3
D4
SLOT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
50/60 HZ
4A MAX/GRP
1
2
3
A1
5
A2
H
7
A3
N
9
A4
4
~
6
8
10
11
12
13
B1
15
B2
H
17
B3
N
19
B4
14
~
16
18
20
21
22
23
C1
25
C2
H
27
C3
N
29
C4
24
~
26
28
30
31
32
33
D1
35
D2
H
37
D3
N
39
D4
34
~
36
38
40
MODULE IC697MDL340
LABEL 44A726758–006R01
IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
50-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
Operation of the 120 Volt AC 2 AMP Output Module
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ Î
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OPEN FUSE
DETECTOR
a42138
~
FUSE
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
COMMON
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL340
Output Characteristics
Fault Mode Selection
The 120 Volt AC 2 Amp Output Module is compatible
with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to certain operating or default conditions.
D Solenoids and motor starters
D Indicators
D Maintain existing output state
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the longterm capacity of each point. Because of overall heat
dissipation within the module, the maximum current
capacity for each group of four outputs is limited to 4
amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating.
The rate at which such surges can be repeated depends on the current rating of the device and the
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON).For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty
cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
Steady-state
Current (mA)
0.5
1
2
50-2
D Turn outputs OFF
This is explained in more detail in the programming
manual.
Fusing
Each group of 4 outputs is fused with a 10 amp fuse.
Replace with either of the following types:
D 3AG - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
5
1
0.1
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
a42145
TERMINALS
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
FIELD WIRING
1
2
3
A1
5
A2
4
H
~
N
6
7
A3
9
A4
8
10
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note: only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost rack position.
11
12
13
B1
15
B2
14
H
16
~
N
17
B3
19
B4
18
20
21
Field Wiring
22
23
C1
25
C2
24
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of
four outputs is isolated from the others, a wire from
the power source to the power input terminals for
each group is required (power input terminals for
each group are not connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is
room for a bundle of forty AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)
wires to be routed out through the terminal board
cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
H
~
N
26
27
C3
29
C4
28
30
31
32
33
D1
35
D2
34
H
36
~
N
37
D3
39
D4
38
40
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
50-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 4.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
50-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
50-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0082H
August 1997
120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL340 [
Rated Voltage:
120 volts AC
Outputs per Module:
16 (four groups of four outputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between groups
Output VoltageRange:
85 to 132 volts, 47 to 63 Hz
Output Current:
2 amps maximum per point
4 amps maximum per group
Output Characteristics Inrush Current:
20 amps maximum for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop:
3 volts maximum
Response Time-On:
1 ms maximum
Response Time-Off:
1/2cycle
OutputLeakage:
1.5 mA maximum
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.25 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module - 120 Volt AC 2 Amp, 16 Points
IC697MDL340
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
50-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL341
51
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module (IC697MDL341)
datasheet GFK-0382J
Features
D
D
D
a44139
12 individually isolated points
2 amp capacity per point
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
High inrush capacity (10x rated current)
Functions
The 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module for use
with a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 12
isolated output points. This allows each point to be used on
different phases of the AC supply. Each output point is individually fused with a 3.15 amp replaceable fuse.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
OUTPUT
120/240V AC
2A/PT
PILOT DUTY
50/60 HZ
16A MAX/MODULE
1
3
A1
4
5
LED indicators which give the ON - OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit as well as an
LED to indicate the status of the fuses are located at the
top of the module. If one or more of the fuses should
blow, this LED will turn ON.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar module type in the field. I/O
references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowse programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
A1
H
~N
~N
A2
6
A2
The module provides a high degree of inrush current
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of inductive and incandescent loads. The module will operate
most size 4 contactors.
H
2
7
H
8
9
A3
~N
10
A3
11
H
12
13
B1
14
15
H
~N
~N
B2
16
B2
B1
17
H
18
19
B3
B3
~N
20
21
H
22
23
C1
24
25
H
~N
~N
C2
26
C2
C1
27
H
28
29
C3
C3
~N
30
31
H
32
33
D1
34
35
H
~N
~N
D2
36
D2
D1
37
H
38
39
D3
D3
~N
40
SLOT
MODULE IC697MDL341
LABEL 44A726758–013R02
Although this module is configured as a 16 point output, only outputs 1 through 12 are available to be referenced in your program. For example, if the starting
reference is Q0017, then valid references are Q0017
through Q0028.
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
51-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
Operation - 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module
OPTO
ISOLATOR
BACKPLANE
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
OPEN FUSE
DETECTOR
a44140
ÎÎÎÎ
H
FUSE
3.15A
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
~
N
ÎÎÎ
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL341
Output Characteristics
The 120/240 Volt AC 2 Amp Isolated Output Module is
compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D
D
D
Solenoids
Fusing
Motor starters
Indicators
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the long-term
current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat
dissipation within the module, the maximum current for
the module is limited to 16 amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently conducting a surge current which is much greater than its longterm current rating. The rate at which such surges can be
repeated depends on the current rating of the device and the
duty cycle (percent of time the device is ON).
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50% duty
cycle, the following repetition rates apply to this module.
Steady-State Current (mA)
Repitition Rate (Hz)
0.5
5
1
1
2
0.1
Fault Mode Selection
This output module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to
certain operating or default conditions. These states are:
D
D
For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the Programming Software User’s Manual for
IC641 software products.
Maintain existing output state
Turn outputs OFF
51-2
Each output is fused with a replaceable 3.15 amp fuse.
Replace with the following type:
D
Metric 5 x 20 mm - 3.15 amp, 250V, Slo-blo
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents inadvertent substitution of one module type for another in a
given slot. The key fits a uniquely shaped area on the
board below the connector. Each module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches onto the
backplane center rail. When the module is extracted, the
key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the rack
after the key has been latched onto the center rail of the
rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail. It may then be
reinserted onto the module and the module inserted into
the rack in the desired location.
Note that on;y a power supply can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU
rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion rack).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each
output is isolated from the other outputs, a wire from the
power source to the power input terminal for each output
is required (power input terminals for each output are not
connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
a43985
TERMINALS
FIELD WIRING
1
2
3
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
H
~
N
A1
4
5
6
A2
7
8
9
A3
10
11
12
13
B1
14
15
16
B2
17
18
19
B3
20
21
22
23
C1
24
25
26
C2
27
28
29
C3
30
31
32
33
D1
34
35
36
D2
37
38
39
D3
40
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
51-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 4.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
51-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43) not be
exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires
may be terminated on any one terminal only if
both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
51-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0382J
August 1997
120/240 Volt AC, 2 Amp Isolated 12-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL341 [
Rated Voltage:
120/240 volts AC
Outputs per Module:
Isolation:
12 individually isolated
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between points
Output Voltage Range:
85 to 264 volts AC, 47-63 Hz
Output Current:
2 amps maximum per point
16 amps maximum per module
Output Characteristics
Inrush Current:
20 amps maximum for one cycle (20 ms)
Output Voltage Drop:
1.5 volts maximum
Response Time-On:
1 ms maximum
Response Time-Off:
1/2 cycle maximum
Output Leakage:
3 mA maximum at 120 volts AC
Current Required from 5 V Bus:
6 mA maximum at 240 volts AC
.25 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
OutputModule, 120/240 VAC, 2 Amp Isolated, 12 Points
IC697MDL341
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
51-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
52
GFK-0383F
August 1997
IC697MDL753
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL753)
datasheet GFK-0383F
Features
a44141
D 32 Points - Two isolated groups of 16 points each
D 0.5 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
OUTPUT
Functions
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
This is a wide range module in that the rated voltage
can be 5 volts DC or 10 to 60 volts DC. It provides a
high degree of inrush current at 10 volts to 60 volts
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of
loads which have such characteristics. It also operates
at TTL levels.
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
LED indicators which give the ON - OFF status of
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are
located at the top of the module.
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar module type in the field.
I/O references are user configurable without the use
of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windows programming software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBM XT, AT, PS/2 or compatible Personal Computer.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
4A MAX/GRP
5/48 VDC NEG
0.5A/PT
PILOT DUTY
The 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output
Module provides 32 output points in two isolated
groups with 16 points in each group.
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
Î
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
A6
7
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
12
B1
13
14
B2
B3
15
16
B4
B5
17
18
B6
B7
19
B8
20
21
22
C1
23
24
C2
C3
25
C4
C5
26
27
28
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
34
D2
D3
35
36
D4
D5
37
D6
D7
38
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL753
44A726758–015R03
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
52-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0383F
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
Operation - 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output Module
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
LED
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
a44177
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
COMMON
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL753
Output Characteristics
Fault Mode Selection
The 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output
Module is compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D Solenoids
D Motor starters
D Indicators
D TTL interface
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the longterm current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current for each group of 16 outputs is limited to 4
amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which
such surges can be repeated depends on the current
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of
time the device is ON).
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50%
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply to this
module.
This output module can be configured from the programmer so that output points assume one of two
states in response to certain operating or default
conditions. These states are:
52-2
Steady-state
Current (mA)
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
100
250
500
5.0
1.0
0.1
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the applicable Programming Software User’s
Manual.
Fusing
The 5/48 VDC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic Output Module has no replaceable fuses. If protection is required,
a fuse as specified below may be externally connected
to each output point by the user.
D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt), Fast Acting
D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt), Fast Acting
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0383F
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only a power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the
CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion
rack).
TERMINALS
a43984
FIELD WIRING
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
14
B2
B3
15
16
B4
B5
17
18
B6
B7
19
B8
20
21
Field Wiring
22
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each
group of 16 outputs is isolated from the other group, a
wire from the power source to the power input terminals for each group is required (power input terminals
for each group are not connected inside the module).
24
C1
23
C2
C3
25
26
C4
C5
27
28
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
34
D2
D3
D4
35
36
D5
D6
37
38
D7
39
D8
40
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
52-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0383F
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 4.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
52-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0383F
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
52-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0383F
August 1997
5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL753
5 volts DC (" 5%)
10 to 60 volts DC
32 (two groups of 16 outputs each)
Rated Voltage:
Outputs per Module:
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Output Voltage Range:
Output Current
5 volts DC
10 to 60 volts DC
5 volts or 10 to 60 volts
16 mA maximum per point
0.5 amps maximum per point
4 amps maximum per group
OutputCharacteristics
Inrush Current
10 to 60 volts DC:
Output Voltage Drop:
5 volts DC:
10 to 60 volts DC:
Response Time-On:
Response Time-Off:
OutputLeakage:
5 volts DC:
10 to 60 volts DC:
5 amps maximum for 20 ms
0.5 volts maximum (16 mA)
1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
1 ms typical
1 ms typical
250 µAmaximum
1 mA maximum
Current Required from 5 V Bus:
.25 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module, 5/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Negative Logic, 32 Points
IC697MDL753
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
52-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL752
53
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL752)
datasheet GFK-0381E
Features
a44083
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 0.5 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (20x rated current)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Functions
The 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module provides 32
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each.
The module provides a high degree of inrush current
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of
loads which have such characteristics.
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are located
together at the top of the module.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar module type in the field.
I/O references are user configurable without the use
of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
OUTPUT
12VDC
0.5A/PT
PILOT DUTY
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
G7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î ÎÎ
ÎÎ
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
2A MAX/GRP
1
A1
2
A2
3
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
A6
7
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
12
B1
13
B2
B3
14
15
16
B4
B5
17
18
B6
B7
19
B8
20
21
22
C1
23
24
C2
C3
25
26
C4
C5
27
28
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
34
D2
D3
35
36
D4
D5
37
38
D6
D7
39
D8
40
MODULE IC697MDL752
LABEL 44A726758–014R02
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
53-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Operation - 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
LED
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
BACKPLANE
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
a42136
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
COMMON
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL752
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of
time the device is ON).
Output Characteristics
The 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compatible
with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D Solenoids
D Motor starters
D Indicators
Fault Mode Selection
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the longterm current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current for each group of 8 outputs is limited to 2 amperes.
Steady-state
Current (mA)
100
250
500
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
5.0
1.0
0.1
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which
such surges can be repeated depends on the current
53-2
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50%
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to certain operating or default conditions.
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the applicable Programming Software User’s
Manual.
Fusing
The 12 VDC 0.5 Amp Output Module has no fuses. If
protection is required, a fuse as specified below may
be externally connected to each output point by the
user.
D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
a42142
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that only a power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the
CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion
rack).
TERMINALS
FIELD WIRING
1
A1
2
3
A2
A3
4
5
A4
A5
6
7
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
B1
12
13
14
B2
B3
15
16
B4
B5
17
18
B6
B7
19
B8
20
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each
group of eight outputs is isolated from the others, a
wire from the power source to the power input terminals for each group is required (power input terminals
for each group are not connected inside the module).
21
22
C1
23
24
C2
C3
25
26
C4
C5
27
28
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
34
D2
D3
D4
35
36
D5
D6
37
38
D7
39
D8
40
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
53-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward as shown in
Figure 4.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
53-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.1
mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.1 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.1 mm2) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.1 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
53-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0381E
August 1997
12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL752 [
Rated Voltage:
12 volts DC
Outputs per Module:
32 (four groups of 8 outputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Output Voltage Range:
10 to 15 volts
Output Current:
0.5 amps maximum per point
2 amps maximum per group
OutputCharacteristics
Inrush Current:
10 amps maximum for 20 ms
Output Voltage Drop:
1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
Response Time-On:
1 ms typical
Response Time-Off:
1 ms typical
OutputLeakage:
1 mA maximum
Current Required from 5 V Bus:
.25 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module, 12 Volt DC 0.5 Amp 32 Points
IC697MDL752
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
53-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL750
54
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module (IC697MDL750)
datasheet GFK-0085G
Features
D 32 Points - Four isolated groups of 8 points each
D 0.5 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (20x rated current)
a44709
Functions
The 24/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module for the
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) provides 32
output points in four isolated groups of 8 points each.
A1
B1
C1
A2
B2
C2
A3
B3
C3
A4
B4
C4
A5
B5
C5
A6
B6
C6
A7
B7
C7
A8
B8
C8
FUSE
OUTPUT
24/48 VDC
0.5A/PT
PILOT DUTY
A1
This output module provides a high degree of inrush
current which makes the outputs suitable for a wide
range of loads which have such characteristics.
A2
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are located
together at the top of the module.
A6
A3
A4
A5
A7
A8
B1
B2
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
D1
A1
B1
C1
D1
D2
A2
B2
C2
D2
D3
A3
B3
C3
D3
D4
A4
B4
C4
D4
D5
A5
B5
C5
D5
D6
A6
B6
C6
D6
D7
A7
B7
C7
D7
D8
A8
B8
C8
D8
FUSE
2A MAX/GRP
1
2
A1
3
A2
5
A4
4
A3
A5
6
7
A6
9
A8
A7
8
10
11
B1
12
13
B2
15
B4
17
B6
19
B8
B3
14
B5
16
B7
18
20
21
22
C1
23
C2
25
C4
27
C6
29
C8
24
C3
26
C5
28
C7
30
31
D1
32
33
D2
35
D4
37
D6
39
D8
D3
34
36
Î
Î
D5
D7
38
40
MODULE IC697MDL750
LABEL44A726758–002R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
54-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Operation of the 24/48 Volt DC
0.5 Amp Output Module
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
a42136
LED
BACKPLANE
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
COMMON
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL750
Output Characteristics
Fault Mode Selection
The 24/48 Volt DC 0.5 Amp Output Module is compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to certain operating or default conditions.
D Solenoids
D Motor starters
D Indicators
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
The rating of 0.5 amp per point applies to the longterm current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current for each group of 8 outputs is limited to 2 amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which
such surges can be repeated depends on the current
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of
time the device is ON).
For typical incandescent devices operating at a 50%
duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
Steady-State
Current (mA)
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
100
250
500
5
1
0.1
54-2
This is explained in more detail in the Programmable
Controllers Reference Manual.
Fusing
The 24/48 VDC 0.5 Amp Output Module has no fuses.
If protection is required, a fuse as specified below may
be externally connected to each output point by the
user.
D Littlefuse 312.750 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
D Bussmann AGC-3/4 (3/4 amp, 250 volt) Fast Acting
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
a42142
TERMINALS
1
2
A1
3
4
A2
A3
5
6
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
FIELD WIRING
A4
A5
7
A6
A7
8
9
A8
10
11
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note: Only the power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position.
12
B1
13
14
B2
B3
15
16
B4
B5
17
18
B6
B7
19
B8
20
21
22
Field Wiring
C1
23
24
C2
C3
25
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. Since each
group of eight outputs is isolated from the others, a
wire from the power source to the power input terminals for each group is required (power input terminals
for each group are not connected inside the module).
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from #22 (0.36 mm2) through #14 (2.10
mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a given lug if
both wires are the same size. There is room for a
bundle of forty #14 (2.10 mm2) wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
26
C4
C5
27
28
C6
C7
29
C8
30
31
32
D1
33
34
D2
D3
35
36
D4
D5
37
38
D6
D7
39
D8
40
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections for IC697MDL750
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
54-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
54-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14
(2.10 mm2). It is important that when using AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a
maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch
(3.43mm) not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two wires may be terminated on any one
terminal only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the wire
bundle and tightly secured through the cable tie
cleat located at the lower right corner of the terminal
board. For extremely large wire bundles, additional
cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide space
to record user circuit wiring identification. A slot is
provided on the hinged door to allow for insertion
of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease
the scored edge before insertion. The outside label
has a color coded stripe to allow quick identification
of the module voltage type (blue: low voltage; red:
high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting
the terminal board strap (attached to each module)
into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card
guide grill on the rack. This strap not only secures
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
the terminal board to the rack, it also provides a
way of identifying the wired terminal board with its
correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended
that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be allowed
above and below the rack grill. Wire bundles should
not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O modulefrom its slot in a rack.
D
Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of the
board cover with your thumbs on the front of the
cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on the
back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover with
your fingers to disengage the clip from the rack rail
and pull the board firmly to remove it from the
backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
54-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0085G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 0.5 Amp, 32-Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL750 [
Rated Voltage:
24 or 48 volts DC
Outputs per Module:
32 (four groups of 8 outputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Output Voltage Range:
20 to 60 volts
Output Current:
0.5 amps maximum per point
2 amps maximum per group
Output Characteristics
Inrush Current:
10 amps maximum for 20 ms
Output Voltage Drop:
1 volt (2 ohms) maximum
Response Time-On:
1 ms maximum
Response Time-Off:
1 ms maximum
Output Leakage:
1 mA maximum
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.25 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module, 24/48 VDC 0.5 Amp, 32 points
IC697MDL750
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
54-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
55
GFK-0086G
August 1997
IC697MDL740
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module (IC697MDL740)
datasheet GFK-0086G
Features
a44712
D 16 Points - Four isolated groups of 4 points each
D 2 amp capacity per point
D High inrush capacity (10x rated current)
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
Functions
The 24/48 Volt DC 2 Amp Output Module provides
16 output points in four isolated groups of 4 points
each. Each group of four outputs is individually fused
with a 10 amp fuse.
OUTPUT
24/48VDC
2A/PT
PILOT DUTY
A1
LED indicators which give the ON-OFF status of each
point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit as well as
an LED to indicate the status of the fuse are located
together at the top of the module.
A3
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsr programming
software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr
over Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The
Programming Software configuration function is
installed on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
The module provides a high degree of inrush current
which makes the outputs suitable for a wide range of
loads which have such characteristics.
The module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct
replacement with a similar type in the field. I/O references are user configurable without the use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
A2
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
C1
C2
C3
C4
D1
D2
D3
D4
SLOT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
FUSE
4A MAX/GRP
1
2
3
A1
5
A2
7
A3
9
A4
4
6
8
10
11
12
13
B1
15
B2
17
B3
19
B4
14
16
18
20
21
22
23
C1
25
C2
27
C3
29
C4
24
26
28
30
31
32
33
D1
35
D2
37
D3
39
D4
34
36
38
40
MODULE IC697MDL740
LABEL 44A726758–003R01
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
55-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0086G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
Operation of the 24/48 Volt DC 2 AMP Output Module
Î ÎÎ
TO OTHER OUTPUTS
OPTO
ISOLATOR
BACKPLANE
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
OPEN FUSE
DETECTOR
a42137
FUSE
COMMON
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
LED
OPTO
ISOLATOR
OUTPUT
DRIVER
LOAD
FIELD
CONNECTIONS
MODULE
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL740
Output Characteristics
Steady-state
Current (mA)
Repetition Rate
(Hz)
0.5
1
2
The 24/48 Volt DC 2 Amp Output Module is compatible with a wide variety of load devices, such as:
D Solenoids
5
1
0.1
D Motor starters
Fault Mode Selection
D Indicators
The module can be configured from the programmer
so that output points assume one of two states in response to certain operating or default conditions.
The rating of 2 amps per point applies to the longterm current capacity of each point. Because of overall heat dissipation within the module, the maximum
current for each group of four outputs is limited to 4
amperes.
Each output on this module is capable of transiently
conducting a surge current which is much greater
than its long-term current rating. The rate at which
such surges can be repeated depends on the current
rating of the device and the duty cycle (percent of
time the device is ON). For typical incandescant devices operating at a 50% duty cycle, the following repetition rates apply.
55-2
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
This is explained in more detail in the programming
manual.
Fusing
Each group of 4 outputs is fused with a 10 amp fuse.
Replace with either of the following types:
D 3AG - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 10 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0086G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
Module Mechanical Keying
a42141
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. The
key is included with each module.
TERMINALS
FIELD WIRING
1
2
3
A1
4
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
5
7
A3
8
9
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note: only the power supply can be placed in the leftmost rack position.
A2
6
A4
10
11
12
13
B1
14
15
B2
16
17
B3
18
19
Field Wiring
B4
20
21
22
The module is wired as shown. Since each group of
eight outputs isisolated from the others, a wire from
the power source to the power input terminals for
each group is required (power input terminals for
each group are not connected inside the module).
23
C1
24
25
C2
26
27
C3
28
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG
#14 (2.1mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is
room for a bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
29
C4
30
31
32
33
D1
34
35
D2
37
D3
39
D4
36
38
40
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
55-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0086G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal board on this input
module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 2. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
55-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.1
mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.1 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.1 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.1 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0086G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 3. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
55-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0086G
August 1997
24/48 Volt DC, 2 Amp, 16 Point Output Module
Table 1. Specifications for IC697MDL740 [
Rated Voltage:
24 or 48 volts DC
Outputs per Module:
16 (four groups of 4 outputs each)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between input groups
Output Voltage Range:
20 to 60 volts
Output Current:
2 amps maximum per point
4 amps maximum per group
Output Characteristics Inrush Current:
20 amps maximum for 20 ms
Output Voltage Drop:
0.8 volt (0.4 ohm) maximum
Response Time-On:
2 ms maximum
Response Time-Off:
2 ms maximum
OutputLeakage:
1 mA maximum
Current Required from 5V Bus:
0.15 amp
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
Table 2. Ordering Information
Description
Catalog Number
Output Module - 24/48 VDC 2 Amp 16 Pt
IC697MDL740
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
55-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
1
Discrete Output Modules
IC697MDL940
56
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
GFK-0384E
August 1997
]]]Relay Output, 16 Point Module (IC697MDL940)
datasheet GFK-0384E
Features
a44323
D 16 points - 8 isolated Form C
- 2 groups of 4 Form A
D
D
D
D
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
2 amp per point switching capacity
RC snubber and fuse protection per point
No user power required
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
FUSE
Removable field wiring terminal
OUTPUT
RELAY, 16PT
2A PILOT DUTY
16A MAX/MODULE
A1
Functions
The 16 point Relay Output Module is versatile,
rugged, and easy to use. It will switch a variety of
low to medium power loads such as relays, contactors,
and lamps.
The resistive rating of the module is 2 amps per point
at 120/240 VAC or 24 VDC and 0.2 amps per point for
125 VDC. Power to energize the relay coils is supplied
by the module and each output is individually fused
and suppressed with an RC snubber.
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
B3
B4
LED indicators which display the ON - OFF status of
each point on the logic (PLC) side of the circuit are
located at the top of the module.
C1
Field wiring is made to a removable terminal board
and the module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar module type in the
field. I/O references are user configurable without the
use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
C3
C2
C4
D1
D2
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming Software configuration function is installed
on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
D3
D4
SLOT
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
C1
B1
C2
B2
C3
B3
C4
B4
C5
B5
C6
B6
C7
B7
C8
B8
FUSE
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
24-240VAC 50/60HZ
5-125VDC
480VA, 60 WATT
NO A1
1
V
2
3
NC
A1
NO
4
5
6
7
A2
V
NC
NO
A3
NC
A3
A2
V
8
9
NO
10
11
A4
V
NC
12
A4
13
NO
14
15
B1
V
17
NC
NO
B2
19
NC
B2
16
B1
18
V
NO
20
21
22
23
B3
V
NC
NO
B3
B4
24
V
25 NC
B4
26
27
NO
28
29
NO
31
NO
NO
30
C1
C2
C3
C4
32
V
33
34
35
NO
36
38
NO
37 NO
NO
D1
D2
D3
D4
39
40
V
MODULE IC697MDL940
LABEL 44A726758-016RO3
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
56-1
Discrete Output Modules
2
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Operation - Relay Output Module
a44515
LED
FORM
C
RELAY
RELAY
DRIVER
BACKPLANE
SNUBBER
FORM
A
RELAY
V
FUSE 3A
SYSTEM
INTERFACE
RELAY
DRIVER
Î ÎÎ
NO
SNUBBER
Î
ÎÎ
Î ÎÎ
NC
NO
FUSE 3A
V
LED
Figure 1. Block Diagram for IC697MDL940
Output Protection
For more detailed information on module configuration,
refer to the Programming Software User’s Manual.
Fusing
Each output is protected with a 3 amp fuse. Replace
with either of the following types:
D 3AG - 3.0 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
D Metric 5 x 20 mm - 3.0 amp, 250V, Fast Acting
Suppression
Each output is suppressed with an RC snubber to reduce high frequency noise transients on the board.
Proper suppression of the switched load is still recommended and will contribute to improved system reliability. Suppression at the load will not only lengthen contact life, but will also reduce noise transients in the control
wiring.
Fault Mode Selection
This output module can be configured from the programmer so that output points assume one of two
states in response to certain operating or default
conditions. These states are:
D Maintain existing output state
D Turn outputs OFF
56-2
Module Mechanical Keying
This module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector. Each
module has a key packaged with it.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains in the center rail, configuring the slot to accept only identical module types.
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pulling it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted onto the module and the
module inserted into the rack in the desired location.
Note that on;y a power supply can be placed in the
leftmost rack position, and slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the
CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver Module (in an expansion
rack).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
3
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Field Wiring
The module is wired as shown in Figure 2. You have
the choice of selecting either a normally open or a
normally closed relay contact (or both) for each of the
eight Form C relays, and four normally open contacts
for each group of Form A relays. A connection is provided at the V terminal for a power source for the
load. Each Form C relay and each group of the Form
A relays can switch either an AC or a DC load.
The detachable field wiring terminal board will accept
wire sizes from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG
#14 (2.1mm2). Two wires may be terminated on a
given lug if both wires are the same size. There is
room for a bundle of forty #14 wires to be routed out
through the terminal board cavity.
The wire bundle can be secured to the terminal board
by passing a cable tie through a cleat located at the
lower corner of the terminal board.
TERMINALS
FIELD WIRING
a44324
1
NO
A1
NC
A1
2
V
3
NO
4
5
6
7
A2
V
NC
NO
A3
NC
A3
A2
V
8
9
NO
10
11
12
A4
V
NC
A4
NO
B1
13
14
15
16
17
V
NC
NO
B2
NC
B2
B1
18
19
V
NO
20
21
22
23
B3
V
NC
NO
B4
NC
B4
B3
24
V
25
26
27
NO
28
29
NO
C1
C2
NO
30
31
NO
C3
C4
32
V
33
34
35
NO
NO
36
37
NO
NO
38
D1
D2
D3
D4
39
40
V
Figure 2. Field Wiring Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
56-3
Discrete Output Modules
4
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on this input module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common
to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 3. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
56-4
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10 mm2)wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10 mm2) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
5
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 4. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 6 inch (152mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D
Slide the board along the card guide and remove
it from the rack.
56-5
Discrete Output Modules
6
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Table 1. Electrical Specifications for IC697MDL940 [
Relay Type:
Fixed coil, moving armature
Outputs per Module:
16
Configuration
8 points - Form C (each point isolated)
8 points - Form A (2 groups with 4 points per group)
Isolation:
1500 volts - any output to backplane
500 volts between Form C circuits or Form A groups
Maximum Load Current (Resistive)
Per Module
16 amps
Per Group (Form A)
4 amps
Output Switching Characteristics
Nominal Voltage Rating
120/240 VAC or 5/24/125 VDC
Maximum Power
480 VA (AC loads) or 60 watts (DC loads)
Maximum Load Current (resistive)
2.0 amps from 5 to 265 VAC (maximum), 47-63 Hz
2.0 amps from 5 to 30 VDC (maximum)
0.2 amps from 31 to 125 VDC (maximum)
0.2 amps from 31 to 150 VDC (maximum, Form A only)
Minimum Load Current
10 mA
Maximum Output leakage
1 mA at 120 VAC
Response Time-On:
10 msec (maximum)
Response Time-Off:
10 msec (maximum)
Switching Frequency
20 cycles/minute (inductive load)
Contact Type
Silver alloy
Contact Resistance
0.2 ohm (maximum)
Contact Life
Mechanical: 20 x 106 operations
Electrical: 105 operations at rated resistive load
Protection (each output)
3 amp fuse
Snubber (R = 47 ohms, C = 0.015 µfd)
Current Required from 5 V Bus:
750 mA
VME
System designed to support the VME standard C.1
[ Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance to more
stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for Conformance to
Standards.
56-6
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Discrete Output Modules
7
GFK-0384E
August 1997
Relay Output, 16 Point Module
Table 2. Typical Contact Life vs. Load Conditions
Operating
Voltage
Maximum Current for Load Type
Resistive
Inductive 1,2
Typical Contact Life
(number of operations)
24 - 120VAC
2.0 amp
1.0 amp
300,000
24 - 120VAC
-
2.0 amp
150,000
24 - 120VAC
1.0 amp
0.5 amp
500,000
24 - 120VAC
0.1 amp
0.05 amp
1,000,000
240VAC
2.0 amp
1.0 amp
150,000
240VAC
-
2.0 amp
50,000
240VAC
1.0 amp
0.5 amp
200,000
240VAC
0.1 amp
0.05 amp
500,000
24VDC
2.0 amp
1.0 amp
300,000
24VDC
-
2.0 amp
100,000
24VDC
1.0 amp
0.5 amp
500,000
24VDC
0.1 amp
0.05 amp
1,000,000
1 Power Factor = 0.4 minimum for AC inductive loads.
2 Time Constant = 7ms for DC inductive loads.
Table 3. Ordering Information
Description
Output Module - Relay, 16 Point
Catalog Number
IC697MDL940
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
56-7
1
Analog Modules
57
Base Converter Module - IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module - IC697ALG440
Voltage Expander Module - IC697ALG441
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Modules
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels Base Converter Module - IC697ALG230, Current Expander Module IC697ALG440
Voltage Expander Module - IC697ALG441
datasheet GFK-0385F
Features
D
Complete Analog subsystem includes Base Converter
and Expander modules
D
Base Converter module has eight differential inputs
individually configurable for voltage or current
D
Accepts unipolar or bipolar Analog Inputs up to " 10
volts full scale
D
D
Accepts 4 to 20 milliamp current loop signals
D
D
D
D
D
Individual user scaling on each input channel on Base
Converter module; scaling on a per module basis for
Expander modules
a44001
OK
EXP ACTIVE
OK
EXP ACTIVE
INPUT
ANALOG
INPUT
ANALOG
HIGH LEVEL
1
2
3
CHANNEL 1
+
5
2
6
Fast update rate for Base Converter module
Voltage and current Expander modules, each with 16
inputs, provides for additional inputs at a lower cost
per point
Complete subsystem can accept up to 120 inputs
1
4
7
CHANNEL 2
GND
9
10
11
+
3
12
13
4
CHANNEL 3
14
15
No jumpers or DIP switches to configure
Easy configuration with MS-DOSror Windowsr
programming software configuration function.
GND
8
GND
GND
16
17
CHANNEL 4
18
19
+
5
20
21
6
22
CHANNEL 5
23
GND
GND
24
25
26
27
CHANNEL 6
+
7
28
29
8
30
31
CHANNEL 7
GND
COM
GND
32
33
COM
35
GND
34
36
CHANNEL 8
3
4
37
E
E
38
39
COM
1
2
40
MODULE IC697ALG230
LABEL 44A726758–017R02
SLOT
Figure 1. Base Converter Module
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-1
Analog Modules
2
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Functions
The High Level Analog Input subsystem for the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) accepts analog inputs of up to Ç 10 volts full scale, or 4 to 20 milliamp
current loop signals. These inputs are converted to
digital form for use by the CPU or other controllers
accessing analog inputs via the VME backplane.
Converted data is presented as 2’s complement (sign
+ 15 bits). The basic converter is 14 bits resolution (1
part in 16384); an oversampling and averaging technique further enhances this resolution. Inputs are
protected against transient and steady-state overvoltage conditions.
Analog inputs use %AI references in the programmable controller. A maximum of 8K words of %AI
memory is currently available in the programmable
controller. Each input channel uses one word (16 bits)
of %AI memory.
Field wiring is made to a removable terminal board
and the module is mechanically keyed to ensure correct replacement with a similar module type in the
field. I/O references are user configurable without the
use of jumpers or DIP switches on the module.
Configuration is done using the configuration function of the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming software running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming Software configuration function is installed
on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
a44002
OK
EXPANDER
ANALOG (V)
HIGH LEVEL
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
CHANNEL 3
CHANNEL 4
CHANNEL 5
CHANNEL 6
CHANNEL 7
CHANNEL 8
CHANNEL 9
CHANNEL 10
CHANNEL 11
CHANNEL 12
CHANNEL 13
CHANNEL 14
CHANNEL 15
CHANNEL 16
SLOT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
OK
EXPANDER
ANALOG ( )
+
1
+
1
2
3
2
4
+
5
+
3
6
4
7
8
+
9
+
5
10
11
6
12
+
13
+
7
14
8
15
16
+
17
+
9
18
19
10
20
21
+
12
+
11
22
23
24
25
+
+
13
26
27
14
28
29
+
+
15
30
31
16
32
GND
33
GND
35
GND
34
36
3
37
E
4
E
38
39
COM
1
2
40
MODULE IC697ALG441
LABEL 44A726758–019R02
Figure 2. Expander Module
57-2
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
3
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
High Level Analog Input System Modules
Three module types are included in the High Level
Analog Input subsystem: a Base Converter module, a
Current Expander module, and a Voltage Expander
module. A typical subsystem will use a Base Converter module and (if required) one or more expander
modules.
D Expander Modules
Up to seven Expander modules can be daisychained off the Base Converter module to increase the number of inputs of the total subsystem up to a maximum of 120.
D Base Converter module - catalog number
The Base Converter module accepts any mix of
the two Expander module types.
IC697ALG230
A common user scaling factor applies to all inputs on each Expander module, however each
Expander module may be individually scaled as
required.
This module has eight differential inputs and
an expansion port. Each input can be individually configured for either voltage or current.
Each of the input channels also has individual
user scaling.
D Current Input Expander module - catalog number
IC697ALG440
On-board load resistors are included for normal
input current ranges up to Ç 40 mA. If other
current ranges or different resolution is required, external resistors may be used.
The Current Expander module has 16 current
inputs each accepting up to Ç 20 mA.
D Voltage Input Expander module - catalog number
IC697ALG441
Standard system configurations for Ç 10 volts
and 4 to 20 mA are available. These, and other
lower input ranges, can be scaled to engineering units with the user scaling feature.
The Voltage Expander module has 16 differential voltage inputs each accepting up to Ç 10V
signals.
a44003g
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
P
S
Î
C
P
U
o
r
B
R
M
B
A
S
E
E
X
P
E
X
P
E
X
P
(I)
(I)
(V)
E
X
P
E
X
P
(V) (I)
E
X
P
E
X
P
(V)
(I)
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
Î
UP TO 7 EXPANDER MODULES PER SUBSYSTEM
Figure 3. Example of High Level Analog Input System
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-3
Analog Modules
4
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
System Operation
The following illustration is a block diagram of the
High Level Analog Input system followed by an example of typical input connections.
a44004
A/D
LOW
PASS
FILTER
IN 1
BASE
CONVERTER
INPUTS
CONTROL
LOW
PASS
FILTER
IN 8
OPTO-ISOLATION
MUX
LOW
PASS
FILTER
IN 1
PLC BACKPLANE
AMP
EXPANDER
INPUTS
CONTROL
LOW
PASS
FILTER
IN 16
EXPANDER
CHANNEL
SIGNAL
MUX
EXPANDER
CHANNEL
ADDRESS
Figure 4. High Level Analog Input System Block Diagram
JMP
IN
Î
Î
Î
a44005
* * 250
10K
* 250
HIGH
IMPEDANCE
.1 µ fd
IN
10K
MUX
COM
(ANLGCOM)
GND
10K
* CURRENT EXPANDER ONLY
SIGNAL
COMMON
TO
EXPANDER
MODULES
** BASE CURRENT ONLY
Figure 5. Example of Input Connections
57-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
5
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
addition to the information in this data sheet, circuit
wiring diagrams are printed on the inside surface of
the label inserted in each module’s hinged door.
User Wiring Connections
The following illustration shows the wiring assignments for the screw terminals on the terminal board
of the Base Converter and Expander modules. In
INPUT
ANALOG
EXPANDER
ANALOG ( )
1
3
+
7
GND
4
GND
11
13
15
8
GND
19
23
32
COM
34
35
3
4
2
40
MODULE IC697ALG230
BASE CONVERTER
GND
35
GND
36
3
4
2
40
37
E
1
E
38
39
COM
33
34
GND
37
E
1
E
39
COM
GND
36
38
31
GND
34
GND
37
E
16
+
15
30
32
33
GND
35
4
29
+
31
COM
36
3
+
32
33
27
14
15
30
16
GND
+
13
26
28
29
+
31
GND
25
+
27
29
23
+
28
30
+
11
22
12
13
26
14
7
28
8
21
+
24
25
+
27
+
+
11
23
25
19
10
24
26
9
18
20
22
12
GND
24
+
17
+
19
21
+
22
GND
+
9
20
21
6
15
16
18
10
5
20
7
14
8
17
+
+
13
+
15
17
+
+
7
16
18
11
12
14
16
5
10
6
13
+
+
9
+
12
14
GND
+
5
11
6
7
8
10
3
12
3
6
4
9
+
+
5
+
7
9
4
+
3
8
10
+
4
6
8
3
2
5
+
6
1
2
4
5
2
+
3
2
+
1
1
2
1
4
+
1
+
2
a44007
EXPANDER
ANALOG ( )
39
COM
1
E
38
2
40
MODULE IC697ALG440
MODULE IC697ALG441
CURRENT EXPANDER
VOLTAGE EXPANDER
JUMPER
CONNECTS AN INTERNAL 250 OHM LOAD FOR CURRENT INPUTS: LEAVE OFF FOR VOLTAGE
INPUTS (BASE CONVERTER ONLY).
GROUND (GND) IS CHASSIS GROUND.
COMMON (COM) IS ANALOG COMMON.
+ AND – SHOW POLARITY FOR DIFFERENTIAL INPUTS REFERENCED TO COM.
PINS 35 THROUGH 40 FORM THE ANALOG EXPANSION BUS.
Figure 6. Field Wiring Connections to I/O Terminal Boards (Base Converter and Expander Modules)
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-5
Analog Modules
6
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on an Analog Input Base Converter or Expander module. Module features referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O
modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
JACKSCREW
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
Î
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 7. I/O Module Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
57-6
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10mm) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43mm)
not be exceeded. To ensure proper connection,
two wires may be terminated on any one terminal
only if both wires are the same size.
4. The terminal board is designed to accept a maximum of (40) AWG #14 (2.10mm) wires. If AWG
#14 (2.10mm) wires are to be used, then wire
markers should be placed at least 8 inches (203
mm) from termination end to provide sufficient
space for the hinged door to close.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
7
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
JACKSCREW
a43747
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎÎÎ
DO NOT
PULL
ON DOOR
WIRE BUNDLE CABLE TIE CLEAT
Figure 8. Removal of I/O Terminal Board
5. After completing connections to all modules in a
rack, the wire bundle must be secured. To ensure
that the wire bundle is secured properly, it is recommended that a cable tie be wrapped around the
wire bundle and tightly secured through the cable
tie cleat located at the lower right corner of the
terminal board. For extremely large wire bundles,
additional cable ties should be used.
6. A door label insert is included with each module to
indicate circuit wiring information and provide
space to record user circuit wiring identification.
A slot is provided on the hinged door to allow for
insertion of this label. If the label is difficult to insert, crease the scored edge before insertion. The
outside label has a color coded stripe to allow
quick identification of the module voltage type
(blue: low voltage; red: high voltage).
7. After field wiring is completed, the terminal board
should be securely fastened to the rack by inserting the terminal board strap (attached to each
module) into the small rectangular slots in the bottom card guide grill on the rack. This strap not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
only secures the terminal board to the rack, it also
provides a way of identifying the wired terminal
board with its correct mating rack slot location.
8. For adequate module ventilation, it is recommended that at least a 5 inch (127mm) clearance be
allowed above and below the rack grill. Wire
bundles should not obstruct the rack grill work.
Removing an I/O Module
The instructions below should be followed when removing an I/O module from its slot in a rack.
D Grasp the board firmly at the top and bottom of
the board cover with your thumbs on the front of
the cover and your fingers on the plastic clips on
the back of the cover.
D Squeeze the rack clips on the back of the cover
with your fingers to disengage the clip from the
rack rail and pull the board firmly to remove it
from the backplane connector.
D Slide the board along the card guide and remove it
from the rack.
57-7
Analog Modules
8
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Field Wiring Considerations
Connections to Base Converter and Expander modules from user devices are made to screw terminals on
the removable 40-terminal connector block mounted
on the front of each module. All field connections to
the inputs should be wired to the I/O terminal board
using a good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation cable.
The internal resistor for 20 mA current inputs on the
Base Converter module is connected by jumpering
the upper two terminals on the group for the desired
channel, for example, JMP 0 to IN 0+ (refer to Figure
5 for signal names for each group).
Ground connections, (GND), on the terminal board
are provided for connecting shields. This ground connection is made directly to the rack, resulting in superior rejection of noise caused by any shield drain currents. Actual selection of ground location may be
influenced by system power and ground considerations. However, best operation will be obtained
when system ground is physically close to the rack
containing the analog circuits. Normally, the shield is
grounded at only one end.
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
arate analog common, or if the system is grounded, a
separate (from power devices) quiet ground. It could
be limited in scope to only the base converter and
associated expander COM. The differential configuration reduces errors from DC or low frequency AC supply and ground currents by separating the signal
wires from the common which may carry these currents. High frequency and higher voltage spike noise
is reduced by filters at the module inputs.
Do not confuse these inputs with Isolated type inputs,
which have no reference to any common. Sources that
have high impedance isolation must not be left floating
since the high input impedance of the module may
allow common mode voltage to drift out of range.
This may cause noisy or erroneous data, possibly affecting other channels as well. The differential input
allows freedom with respect to location where the
signal is referenced to the supply. The differential input can be converted to single ended (referenced to
COM), by connecting IN(–) directly to COM at the
module terminal. Typical connections for differential
inputs are shown in the two figures on the next page.
The best advantage of the superior noise rejection of
the differential inputs is obtained by running both
input lines to the signal source (as shown in Figure 9),
regardless of where ground reference or power supply commons are located.
Current inputs require a connection between JMP and
IN+ terminals to connect the internal shunt. This converts the 4 - 20 MA current to a 1 to 5 volt signal.
Jumpers are arranged on adjacent terminals to permit
use of commercially available jumper strips, which
allows for both jumper and wire in the same terminal.
Isolated current sources should be referenced to COM
by jumpering IN– to COM. Non isolated loops usually should have the return side of the loop supply connected to the analog common. Usually one supply
sources several loops, and it is preferable to locate the
supply near the analog input. The IN(–) side is returned to COM, either at the module, or wired back
to the common side of the loop supply, if the supply is
remote.
Inputs are differential. This means the input converted
value is the result of the difference between the positive input (+) and the negative input (–), each with
respect to COM. Either input can be either polarity
with respect to COM. The voltage between the inputs is called Normal Mode, while the voltage between
inputs and COM is called Common Mode. All input
signals should have a reference to a system common
to ensure that common mode voltages remain within
the input range of the module. This is normally a sep-
Field wiring should be shielded wire. Twisted pair,
triad (3 wire twisted) or multiple pair cable may be
used. Shields are usually grounded at the end nearest
where analog signal ground or common is established. Ground at the module if in doubt. Ground
terminals are provided for convenience on the module. Variations in data caused by high noise environments are often reduced by additional AC bypass of
the shield to ground with a .01 to .1 microfarad capacitor at the ungrounded end.
For additional system grounding information refer to the
discussion on system grounding in chapter 3 of the applicable Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
The module provides electrical isolation of externally
generated noise between the input field wiring and
the backplane through use of optical isolation.
57-8
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
9
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
In extreme noise environments, the shield can be
grounded at both ends, provided the shield is not
used to carry any analog signal or analog supply voltages. For noise or surges conducted from sources outside the control enclosure, you should consider terminating the shield at the incoming location of the
enclosure, either using a ground bar or a collar clamp
which grounds the shield directly to the metallic enclosure. This gives a much lower ground impedance
than possible on the module. The shield is continued
up to the module but does not require connection at
the module.
Voltage Input Examples
{I}
Voltage
Source
(Grounded
at source)
{I}
+
IN
–
+
V
–
+
+
Voltage
Source V
–
(Isolated))
IN
–
GND
GND
{I}
{I}
+
IN
–
+
IN
–
GND
Bridge
Circuit
COM
Slide
wire
GND
ALG230
System analog common or low noise (quiet) Ground
(optional)
Local
System
Ground
Current Input Examples
{I}
I
{I}
+
IN
–
2 wire
loop powered
GND
+
IN
–
I
GND
Isolated
Source
{I}
+
– Out
{I}
+
IN
–
I
+
IN
–
I
GND
GND
3 wire source
Loop
Supply
Multiple
drops
COM
ALG230
System analog common or low noise (quiet) Ground
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
250 ohms max
(optional)
Local
System
Ground
57-9
Analog Modules
10
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
ANLGCOM is the reference level for all signal inputs.
For normal operation when the input signals are referenced to ground, the ANLGCOM terminal may be
left open since it is internally connected to ground
through an RC circuit as shown in Figure 9. Note that
all input signals must be within Ç 13 volts of ANLGCOM to obtain specified performances.
IN
15V
a44008g
IN
V
15V
ON-BOARD
POWER
SUPPLY
INPUT FROM
BACKPLANE
OUTPUT
ANLGCOM
COMMON
60V
TO
EARTH GROUND
ON PLC RACK
GROUND
Figure 9. ANLGCOM Connection to Ground
Note
For applications in which the input signals are
not referenced to ground, an offset voltage
may be introduced between ANLGCOM and
GND as shown in Figure 9 to ensure that the
input is within the common mode limits of
Ç 13 volts. Note that all inputs for a single
Base Converter/Expander subsystem are referenced to ANLGCOM on the Base unit. The
maximum offset voltage for ANLGCOM is Ç
60 VDC with respect to earth ground.
If any of the inputs appear to be fluctuating in values,
ensure that all terminal pairs are connected to COM
or GND.
57-10
Expansion Bus
The bottom six terminals (35 through 40) on the terminal board on the Base Converter and Expander
modules make up an expansion bus for connecting
input Expander modules to the Base Converter module. An analog multiplexer on the Expander module
acts as a switching circuit to connect analog inputs,
one at a time, to the A/D (Analog to Digital) converter
on the Base Converter module.
Input Sampling Techniques
The objective of the input sampling technique for the
analog subsystem is to provide 8 input channels on
the base module that have a fast (approximately 3 ms)
update rate and additional expander channels that are
updated less frequently, but have a lower cost per
channel.
Operation is such that the base module initially updates all eight channels plus one expander channel.
On each successive scan all eight channels of the base
converter are again updated - plus the next expander
channel in sequence. After 16 analog input scans all 16
channels of the first expander have been sampled; on
the next scan, all eight base converter channels plus
the first channel of the next Expander module are
scanned.
This sampling technique continues until all available
expander channels (16 x number of Expander modules) have been scanned, at which time the sequence
starts over. The number of analog scans required to
include sampling of all expander channels is equal to
the total number of Expander modules x 16 (16 channels per Expander module) in the system.
With no Expander modules present, each base converter channel is updated once every 2.4 milliseconds.
With one or more Expander modules present, this
update time increases to 2.8 milliseconds.
Each expander channel is updated every 2.8 x N ms
(where N = total number of Expander channels present). Note that the scan sequence is free running and
it cannot be synchronized with any external event.
Also note that all inputs of an Expander module will be
scanned even if they are not being used.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
11
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Table 1. Analog Input Channel Update Times
Number of Expander
Modules
Base Channel
Update Rate (ms)
Expander Channel
Update Rate (ms)
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2.4
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
2.8
–
45
90
134
179
224
269
314
three-conductor shielded cable can be used, with the
third wire making the EXPSHLD connection, and the
shield connection to GND.
Connecting the Expander Bus
Terminals 36 and 38 connect the selected analog expansion signal to the Base Converter module. Terminal 40
provides the analog common connection between modules. These terminals should be bussed in parallel with
twisted, shielded wire, observing polarity on terminals
36 and 38. The shield must be connected at terminal 40
at both ends of all links between modules in order to
connect COM of all boards together. Alternately, a
NOTE:
Terminals 37 and 39 are the expander differential data
bus. This is a serial communications port which allows
the base converter processor to control the expanders.
They must be connected with twisted pair cable, observing polarity. Shielding is optional; if used, connect
the shield to GROUND at terminal 35.
SHIELDS MUST BE CONNECTED AT EACH END TO TB40
Î
BASE
CONVERTER
35
36
37
38
39
40
Î
Î
a44009
EXPANDER 1
Î
35
36
37
38
39
40
Î
EXPANDER 2
Î
Î
35
36
37
38
39
40
Î
Figure 10. Expander Bus Connections
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-11
Analog Modules
12
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Expander channel numbers are assigned by the system based on the physical location of the Expander
module relative to the base converter module. For
example, the Expander module in the slot to the immediate right of the base converter module is assigned channels 9 through 24, the next expander is
assigned channels 25 through 40, etc., as shown in the
following figure.
Module/R ack Configuration
A high level analog input system for the programmable controller can consist of any combination of
Base Converter modules and Expander modules up to
the I/O module capacity of the rack, or a maximum of
120 inputs for each Base Converter module.
Up to seven Expander modules may be interfaced to a
Base Converter module to attain the maximum of 120
inputs (7 Expander modules x 16 inputs = 112 + 8
inputs on Base Converter). Expander modules must be
physically located in the same rack as the Base Converter module, and must be installed in slots to the
right of the base converter module. These modules must
be adjacent to each other.
Expander modules should be located to the immediate right of the controlling Base Converter module,
with no empty slots or different module types located
between the Base Converter and Expander modules,
or between Expander modules.
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER
P
S
Î
C
P
U
B
A
S
E
E
X
P
E
X
P
a44010g
E
X
P
Î
C
O
N
V
E
R
T
E
R
CHANNEL 41 THROUGH 56
CHANNEL 25 THROUGH 40
CHANNEL 9 THROUGH 24
CHANNEL 1 THROUGH 8
Figure 11. Example of Channel Number Assignments
Module Mechanical Keying
Each module includes a mechanical key that prevents
inadvertent substitution of one module type for
another in a given slot. The key fits a uniquely
shaped area on the board below the connector.
When the module is first installed, the key latches
onto the backplane center rail. When the module is
extracted, the key remains attached to the center rail,
thereby configuring the slot to accept only identical
module types.
57-12
If it is necessary to change the module location in the
rack after the key has been latched onto the center rail
of the rack, the key can be removed by pushing it upward to unhook the latch while pushing it off the rail.
It may then be reinserted into the rack in the desired
location.
Note that in an IC697CHS PLC rack only the power
supply can be placed in the leftmost rack position, and
slot 1 (adjacent to the power supply) must always contain a CPU (in rack 0 - the CPU rack), or a Bus Receiver
Module or Remote I/O Scanner (in expansion racks).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
13
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Configurable Functions
D
The type selected (voltage or current) for each Expander module
You can configure certain functions through the MSDOS or Windows software configurator function using the programming device. These functions include input ranges, user scaling, and the alarm
comparator function. These functions and their definitions are listed in Table 2.
D
The number of channels used for all present Expander
modules
D
The high and low alarm settings for each main input
channel
Module Configuration Data
D
The input type (voltage or current) for each main input channel
When power is initially applied to the analog modules
the CPU will be updated, through backplane and
module software, with the following configuration
data:
D
CPU alarm interrupt, whether enabled or disabled on
a per channel basis (Base Converter module only)
D
CPU fault reporting, whether enabled or disabled on a
per channel basis for Base Converter module and per
board for Expander module
D
Number of main (Base Converter module) input channels used
D
Number of Expander modules present and their slot
location relative to the Base Converter module
After the CPU has been updated with this initial configuration data, the CPU provides the following module configuration data;
Each of the input channel values is checked for overrange, underrange, and open wire if configured for 4,
20 mA.
Table 2. Configurable Features for the Base Converter Module
Feature
Channel or Module
Selections
Default Setting
–10V, +10V
0, +10
Voltage/Current
Channel
–5V, +5V
–10V, +10V
0, +5V
4, 20 mA
t
Report Faults
Channel
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Scaling Points
Channel
User Value
" 32767 µA
+32000, –32000 µA
mV or mA
" 10000 mV
+10000 mV, –10000 mV
Enabled/Disabled
Disabled
Low
" 32767
–32767
High
" 32767
+32767
Report Alarms
Channel
Alarm Values
Channel
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-13
Analog Modules
14
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Features of the Voltage Expander module that can be set-up during configuration are listed below.
Table 3. Configurable Features for the Voltage Expander Module
Feature
Channel or Module
Selections
Default Setting
–10V, +10V
0, +10
Voltage
Module
–5V, +5V
–10V, +10V
0, +5V
Report Faults
Module
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Scaling Points
Module
User Value
" 32767
+32000, –32000
mV
" 32767
+10000 mV, –10000 mV
Features of the Current Expander module that can be set-up during configuration are listed below.
Table 4. Configurable Features for the Current Expander Module
Feature
Channel or Module
Selections
Default Setting
Current
Module
4, 20 mA
4, 20 mA
Report Faults
Module
Enabled/Disabled
Enabled
Scaling Points
Module
User Value
" 32767
+32000, 0
mA
" 32767
+20000 mA, 4000 mA
Note
For detailed information on using the configuration function refer to the Programming
Software User’s Manual.
Input Ranges
The Base Converter input type (voltage or current)
can be individually programmed for each input point.
The range selected should match the input signal.
Current inputs require the use of the built-in or a user supplied external burden resistor. The Expander input
points are all the same on a module, either voltage or
current, determined by the module type.
57-14
User Scaling
The scaling feature allows you to define any linear
relationship between the sensed input voltage or
current and the value in engineering units that is
returned to the PLC. The default configuration, as
shown in Figure 12, provides values of –32000 to
+ 32000 corresponding to a voltage input range of
– 10 to +10 volts. If a channel (or Expander module) is configured for current, default scaling is 0 to
32000 for an input current range of 4 to 20 mA (see
Figure 13).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
15
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
a44011
POINT
32000, 10000
INPUT
VOLTAGE
10000MV
32000
5000MV
30000
POINT
(16000,5000)
10000
0
10000
30000
USER
SCALING
32000
5000MV
10000MV
POINT
32000, 10000
Figure 12. User Scaling for Voltage Input
Scaling can be configured on a per channel basis for
the Base Converter module and on a per module
basis for Expander modules. Scaling is set by entering the desired voltage or current input value and
the corresponding engineering units for each of two
points. Engineering units are a 16-bit signed value
(– 32768 to +32767).
Note
Scaling to engineering units does not increase the resolution of the value, but does
transform it into more convenient units.
Scaling can be used to compensate for differences between actual and theoretical values due to inaccuracies encountered in field
devices.
When configuring scale factors, 0 mV or 0 mA must
correspond to an engineering units number between
+32767 and –32767.
INPUT
CURRENT
POINT 1
32000, 20000
a44012
20000 MA
(16000, 12000)
16000 MA
12000 MA
8000 MA
30000
POINT 2
(0, 4000)
4000 MA
10000
0
8000
10000
4000 MA
30000
USER
SCALING
8000 MA
12000 MA
16000 MA
20000 MA
Figure 13. User Scaling for Current Input
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-15
Analog Modules
16
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Using Data Commands to Modify
Configuration
Communications Request
Function Block Format
The Data Command provides a mechanism which
allows you to modify some of the diagnostic configuration parameters of the Analog Input Base Converter
Module from ladder logic. The Data Command uses
the COMMREQ function block and a small block of
parameters to update certain configuration parameters on the fly.
The ladder logic representation of the COMMREQ
function block is as follows:
Sending Data Commands Using the
COMMREQ Function
The PLC ladder program sends a Data Command using the COMMREQ (Communication Request) function. The COMMREQ requires that all its command
data be placed in the correct order in the CPU
memory before it is executed. It should then be
executed by a by a one-shot to prevent sending the
data to the module multiple times. Successive
COMMREQs must be separated by at least 1 millisecond to guarantee correct processing.
A description of the COMMREQ function and its
command block data follows, along with a ladder example which uses registers %R0001 to %R0009 for the
COMMREQ command block. Refer to the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual for additional
specific information on COMMREQs.
COMMREQ Function Block Description
%Q0200
+——————+
—] [———(enable)+ COMM_+—(ok)—
| REQ |
%Q0201
%R0001——+IN FT+————––––——————( )——
|
|
CONST ——+ SYSID|
0107
|
|
|
|
CONST ——+ TASK |
00001
|
|
+——————+
The Communications Request function block has four
inputs and two outputs. The first input is an enable
input. Generally a one-shot coil is used to enable the
COMMREQ function. This prevents multiple messages from being sent. The second input (IN) is the
starting location of the COMMREQ command block.
The SYSID input is used to indicate which rack and
slot to send the message to (physical location of Analog module). The last input (TASK) is set to the channel number to be configured. In the above example,
channel 1 of rack 1, slot 7 will be configured and the
COMMREQ command block starts at Register 0001.
Power is always passed to the ok output. The fault
output (FT) is enabled if the COMMREQ fails.
The Communications Request (COMMREQ) function
is a conditionally executed function that
communicates a particular request, through the
ladder logic program, to the Analog module.
57-16
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
17
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Command Block
The command block for Data Commands is made
up of nine words (all values in hexadecimal unless
otherwise indicated). Use the block move
command to move these values to the Register
tables (refer to the applicable Programmable
Controller Reference Manual, for information on using
the block move function).
Table 5. Command Block for Data Commands
Location
Data
Description
%R0001
0003
Length of data is three words
%R0002
0000
Not used (Always zero)
%R0003
0000
Not used
%R0004
0000
Not used
%R0005
0000
Not used
%R0006
0000
Not used
%R0007
nnnn
Data Command - Command Word - Word 0
%R0008
nnnn
Data Command - Command Word - Word 1
%R0009
nnnn
Data Command - Command Word - Word 2
Analog Input Data Command Parameters
The Data Command can be used to change the configuration of Fault Reporting, Alarm Interrupts, and Alarm
Thresholds for each channel of the Base Converter.
Each Data Command reconfigures all of the parameters
for the specified channel using the new data.
Table 6. Analog Input Data Command Parameters
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ
Location
Description
Command Word 0
Configuration Word
Data
Bit 8:
Bit 13:
Command Word 1
HighAlarm Threshold
Range +/– 32767 Engineering Units
Command Word 2
Low Alarm Threshold
Range +/– 32767 Engineering Units
Bits in the configuration word are numbered with bit
1 being the least significant bit. Note that changing
the configuration of the Alarm Interrupt will have no
t
0 - Fault Report Enable
1 - Fault Report Disable
0 - Alarm Interrupt Disable
1 - Alarm Interrupt Enable
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
effect unless the channel has Alarm Interrupts enabled in the initial configuration folder created using
the IC641 configuration software.
57-17
Analog Modules
18
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Example - Sending Data Commands
An example of ladder logic for sending a data command to an Analog Input module using COMMREQ
function blocks is shown below. In this example, the
COMMREQ command block is located in registers
%R0001 through %R0009. The command to send the
data is initiated by the conditional input %I0289
which sets output %Q0200 for one sweep. The Analog Input module is located in Rack 1, slot 7 (first expansion rack). This command will disable fault re-
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
porting, enable alarm interrupts, and set the high and
low alarm thresholds to +20000 and –20000, respectively.
If the COMMREQ command data is formatted incorrectly, or has an invalid command, the Analog Input
module will set the Error Status %I bit, and return an
error code in Module Status Code %AI word.
Note that the comments within /* . . . . */ have been included for information purposes only. They are not generated by the programming software.
|
|%I0289
%Q0200
+–—] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%I0290
%Q0201
+——] [————————————————————————————————————————————————————————————(P)——
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+—
/* Move Command block into Registers 1—7 */
|
| WORD|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0001 /* Command block data starts at %R0001
*/
| 0003 |
|
/* Command data length is 3 words
*/
|
|
|
/*
| CONST —+IN2 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Not used (always 0000)
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Not used (always 0000)
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Not used (always 0000)
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Not used (always 0000)
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Not used (always 0000)
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 1080 +—————+
/* First word (Command Word)
*/
|
/* In this case, disable fault reporting */
|
/* and enable alarm interrupts
*/
57-18
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
19
GFK-0385F
August 1997
|
|
|%Q0200 +—————+
+——] [———+BLKMV+—
/* Move data into registers 8 through 14 */
|
|WORD |
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN1 Q+—%R0008
| 4E20 |
|
/* Register 8 sets the High Alarm
*/
|
|
|
/* to 20000 (Hexadecimal 4E20)
*/
| CONST —+IN2 |
| B1E0 |
|
/* Register 9 sets the Low Alarm
*/
|
|
|
/* to –20000 (Hexadecimal B1E0)
*/
| CONST —+IN3 |
| 0000 |
|
/* Remaining registers are not used
*/
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN4 |
| 0000 |
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN5 |
| 0000 |
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN6 |
| 0000 |
|
|
|
|
| CONST —+IN7 |
| 0000 +—————+
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Now call the COMMREQ to send the message */
|
|%Q0200
+—————+
+——] [————————+COMM_+
|
| REQ |
/* COMMREQ will set output %T0051 if failure */
|
|
|
/* detected when sending message.
%T0051 */
|
%R0001 —+IN FT+———————————————————————————————————————————( )——
|
|
|
/* Command block data starts in R0001
*/
|
|
|
|
CONST —+SYSID|
/* Analog Input Module is in rack 1, slot 7 */
|
0107 |
|
|
|
|
|
CONST —+TASK |
/* Task is set to the channel to be
*/
|
00000001 +—————+
/* configured, in this case channel 1
*/
|
|
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-19
Analog Modules
20
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Diagnostics
for Expander module configuration data. The LED is
turned on when the Expander module is configured
Diagnostic capabilities for the analog high level input
system include:
The LED is turned off when a board failure has been
detected.
D
LEDs on modules for system status indication
D
Monitoring health of Base Converter and Expander
modules
D
Detection of configuration errors
D
Monitoring communication between Base Converter
and Expander modules
D
Overrange and underrange detection
Alarm Comparator Function
D
Open wire detection
D
Monitoring of high and low alarm limits
D
Expander channel not responding
The Alarm Comparator Function provides a mechanism to initiate special processing when an input goes
outside a specified operating range. Alarm Thresholds can be set anywhere over the dynamic range of
the signal. Typically, they are set at levels beyond
which the input should not operate or levels beyond
which alternate processing is required. They can also
be set beyond the dynamic range of the signal, ensuring that they will never be activated. The desired operating range is defined by user configurable high and
low thresholds. The alarms do not affect operation of
the module or change the scaled input value. The
Alarm Comparator function is available only on the
Base Converter module.
Module LEDs
There are two LEDs on the Base Converter module
and one LED on each of the Expander modules.
Base Converter Module
The Base Converter module has two LEDs. The upper LED, labeled BOARD OK flashes when the module has powered-up, passed its diagnostic tests, and is
waiting for configuration data from the CPU. After
receiving configuration data, the Board OK LED is
turned on if the data from the CPU is OK; it is turned
off if there is a configuration error.
The lower LED, labeled PORT OK, turns on when
communication is established with one or more Expander modules, and the expansion bus is operating
properly. Once the system is up and operating, this
LED is turned on when any of the configured expansion channels are responding. When none of the
configured expansion channels are responding, the
PORT OK LED is turned off
Expander Modules
There is one LED on an Expander module. This LED
flashes when the Base Converter module is waiting
57-20
Analog Input Diagnostics
Analog input diagnostics, including the Alarm
Comparator Function and I/O fault reporting are described below
Alarm Contacts
When the scaled input value goes outside either of
the configured thresholds, the appropriate high
(–[HIALR]–) or low (–[LOALR]–) alarm contact for
the channel is energized. One alarm is generated each
time an alarm threshold is crossed. The IC697 CPU
supports one –[HIALR]– and one –[LOALR]– contact pair per channel of the Base Converter module.
Alarm Interrupts
In addition, either alarm will also generate a triggered
ladder interrupt, if enabled in the channel configuration. The IC697 CPU supports a separate triggered
interrupt block for each input channel. When an
alarm interrupt occurs, the CPU updates the data for
that channel before activating the interrupt block.
Within the interrupt block, the logic can determine
which alarm occurred by examining the input data.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
21
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Caution
An I/O interrupt can interrupt execution of
any program block, including the _Main
block. Therefore, unexpected results can
occur if the interrupt block and the program block access the same data. When it
is necessary for a program block and an interrupt block to access the same data, a
SVCREQ #17 can be used to temporarily
block the interrupt from executing when
the shared data is being accessed.
reported again until the fault condition is removed
and then occurs again.
Fault Contacts
Any combination of the following faults on a channel
will cause the corresponding fault contact to be energized. The IC697 CPU supports one –[FAULT]– and
–[NOFL T]– contact pair per input channel on both
Base Converter and Expander Modules.
Use of fault contacts requires that Point Faults be enabled in the CPU, as described in the applicable Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
Base Converter Faults
The execution of a block triggered from an interrupt
supersedes the execution of the normal program sequence. Execution of the normal program is suspended, and only resumed after the interrupt block
completes.
Alarm Configuration
Each Base Converter channel can be configured to
have a high and a low threshold value. Maximum
values are " 32767. The high threshold must be greater than the low threshold. Threshold limits are based
on circuit scaling. If scaling is changed, review and
readjust the Alarm Thresholds if necessary.
Note that an alarm threshold of " 32767 disables the
corresponding alarm, thus it is possible to have only a
high or low alarm. By default, the high and low alarm
thresholds are set to + and – 32767, respectively.
The alarm thresholds can be changed dynamically
using the Diagnostic Config Data Command, described elsewhere in this data sheet.
Use of alarm contacts requires that Point Faults be
enabled in the CPU, as described in the applicable
Programmable Controller Reference Manual.
I/O Fault Reporting
The IC697 Analog Input Modules support fault detection which is used to activate fault (–[FAULT]– /
–[NOFL T]–) ladder contacts in the PLC. In addition,
a corresponding fault message is logged in the PLC
I/OFault Table, unless fault reporting has been disabled in the channel configuration.
If fault reporting is enabled in the channel configuration, each fault condition is reported once, and is not
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Overrange
Input overrange occurs when either of the following
conditions is present:
1. The scaled input value is greater than 32767. Under this condition, the value is held at 32767.
2. The actual input voltage or current is greater than
the maximum Analog to Digital converter range
(approximately +10.2 volts or 40.8 mA).
Underrange
Input underrange occurs when either of the following
conditions is present:
1. The scaled input value is less than –32767. Under
this condition, the value is held at –32767.
2. The actual input voltage or current is less than the
minimum Analog to Digital converter range
(approximately –10.2 volts or –40.8 mA).
Open Wire
This diagnostic occurs when a channel is configured
for current mode (4–20 mA) operation and the input
current drops below 2mA.
Expander Faults
Expander Channel Not Responding
This fault is a result of a communications failure on
the expansion bus, or one or more expansion channels
are not responding due to a hardware failure.
Base Converter A/D Communications Fault
This error occurs when certain internal failures occur
on the Base Converter module. When this happens, a
57-21
Analog Modules
22
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
fault message is sent to the CPU by way of a CPU interrupt. The module LEDs are turned off and the
module halts after sending the message to the CPU.
Analog Signal Terms
Configuration Errors
Single-Ended
The following configuration mismatch errors are detected by the Base Converter and reported to the CPU:
Single-ended circuits have the signal measured
relative to a common connection, usually the power
supply. Other analog I/O signals typically share this
common. Single-ended circuits require the fewest
terminal points, giving the highest density and lowest
price, but at the cost of more restrictive wiring and
errors due to voltage drops and currents in the
common connections. Single-ended circuit
connections are most similar to the wiring of discrete
modules.
D
User scaling error (user scaling offset calculation exceeds 16 bit signed data)
D
Expander module Configuration Error, Expander
module current or voltage range, or number of channels not as expected
Note
The system cannot determine if terminal
board resistors or jumpers for current inputs are properly installed. However, this
will often result in overrange faults when
current input signals are applied.
User Scaling Error
This error occurs when the user’s two scaling points
connected on a plot of engineering units versus mV or
mA do not cross the engineering unit’s X-axis between +32767 and –32767. In other words, 0 mV or 0
mA must correspond to an engineering units number
between +32767 and –32767. When this occurs a
fault is logged in the PLC I/O Fault Table. The module
LEDs are turned off and the module halts after reporting the fault to the CPU.
Expander Module Configuration Error
This error occurs when the Expander module configuration range or the number of channels per Expander
module is not as expected. On power-up the Base
Converter module scans the Expander modules connected to the expansion bus to determine their type.
If the actual configuration does not match the configured range or number of channels, an Expander module Configuration error is reported
57-22
This section explains some general terms relating to
measurements at analog I/O terminals.
Signal Common
The term signal common refers to a point in the signal
that may be connected to the corresponding points in
other signal loops. It may or may not be connected to
earth ground.
Differential
Differential signals are measured on two wires which
are separate, but not isolated from the power supply.
Differential inputs allow a greater degree of freedom
in wiring commons and grounds without affecting
accuracy. There is a limited voltage rating (see
Common Mode) between the signal level wires and
the power supply wires. This limitation also applies to
voltage differences among additional I/O on the same
supply.
Differential inputs usually come in groups sharing the
supply common tie point. Some voltage outputs may
have an external return or remote sense which allows the
load common or ground to be different than the
supply of the output module by a small voltage.
Current loop signals are less susceptible to differences
in voltage between circuit components (see
compliance). Differential inputs permit series inputs
with current loops, since the signal can be offset from
common. Do not confuse differential inputs with
isolated inputs; differential requires the common tie
point reference for all inputs of the group, usually
either ground or the supply common.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
23
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Isolated
Isolated inputs are usually two-wire and are
dielectrically insulated from supplies and ground.
Sometimes additional connections are provided for
excitation of transducers such as RTDs, but these
signals are not shared with other I/O points. Isolated
modules allow high voltages to exist between I/O
devices and the PLC. Do not confuse isolated inputs
with the isolation between groups of analog circuits,
or isolation from other components of the system,
such as logic or power supplies.
Normal Mode
This is the actual signal across the signal wires of
differential or isolated I/O. This may also include
unwanted noise such as power line frequency pickup.
Common Mode
This is the voltage between the analog signal wires
and the common point of the power supply of a
differential signal, or to ground in the case of an
isolated signal. It is desirable that all common mode
signals are ignored by the circuit, but in practice there
is some error introduced in the data. This is specified
as Common Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR), usually
expressed in decibels (db). Differential circuits also
have a maximum common mode voltage
specifications, usually stated as a maximum voltage
with respect to circuit common. Exceeding the
common mode voltage rating of differential signals
causes large errors in the data conversion and may
affect several points.
Unipolar
Unipolar signals or ranges do not change polarity
during normal operation; for example 0 to 10 volts, or
4mA to 20mA. Reversed connection to a unipolor
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
input will produce minimum value and, if diagnostics
are available, underrange or open wire faults.
Bipolar
Bipolar signals can reverse polarity in operation.
Reversed signal connections to a bipolar input will
produce data of opposite sign.
Ground Loop
When a conductor is grounded in more than one
place, differences between grounds can induce
currents producing voltage drops in the wire. If the
conductor is also used to carry an analog signal, these
voltage drops produce an accuracy error or noisy
values. If a single point ground is used, the voltage
difference between locations may still appear in series
with the desired signal. This is overcome by using
differential or isolated inputs and running a separate
return from the remote source. This preserves the
integrity of the signal, and the ground voltages
appear as common mode voltage at the receiving end.
Current Loop
This is a standard analog interface defined by the
Instrument Society of America in ANSI/ISA-S50-1. The
signal level is 4mA to 20mA. Three types of signal
sources are defined, Types 2, 3, and 4. These
correspond to the number of wires used. The isolation
of the transmitter may impact the type of PLC input
required. When non-isolated inputs are used, isolation
may be provided by means of a current transducer
that has isolation between the current loop and/or
power supply. The Standard covers only isolated or
common (single-ended) inputs. Differential inputs
often used in PLCs, and connecting several current
loops together, as often occurs with PLCs, are not
covered well in the Standard, and often introduce
additional complication regarding location of
commons and grounds.
57-23
Analog Modules
24
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Table 7. Analog Input Specifications [
Input Ranges:
Voltage: –10 volts to +10 volts
Current: 4 to 20 milliamps
Resolution:
Default Scaling (16 bit)
312.5 microvolts per LSB step on voltage
0.5 microamps per LSB step on 4 to 20 mA
No missing codes over 16 bits on voltage
No missing codes over 14 bits on current
NOTE: User scaling may introduce skipped codes in the lower 2 or 3 bits depending
upon the factors used.
Accuracy: Calibration
Factory set at full scale = 10 volts ±2 millivolts on Base Converter module.
Maximum errors at 25° C (77°F) are:
Base Converter Voltage, ±.01% of full scale, ±.02% of value
Base Converter Current, ±.05% of full scale, ±.1% of value
ExpanderVoltage, ±.03% of full value, ±.02% of value
ExpanderCurrent, ±.07% of full scale, ±.1% of value
Base Converter
Continuallyself-calibrates for zero and positive full scale (before user scaling)
values. Field calibration not normally required; there is no zero adjustment. A
trimpot on the Base Converter adjusts full scale value at 10V input. For critical
applications this can be reset to compensate for ageing of the reference.
Accuracy:
Linearity
Temperature Coefficient
57-24
±.02% of full scale over entire negative to positive range.
±5 PPM per °C typical
±15 PPM per °C maximum, voltage
±30 PPM per °C maximum, current
Input Impedance:
Voltage Inputs:
Greater than 10 megohms at DC
AC impedance, 20K ohms in series with .47 mfd capacitor.
Current Inputs:
250 ohm, 0.1% precision shunt
Common Mode Rejection:
Voltage Range - Peak signal input must be between +13 and –13 volts with
respect to the ANLGCOM terminal.
Sensitivity:
Response to common mode signals within the above limits is typically 70 dB
CMRR, corresponding to a .02% full scale reading for a 0V input at 10 volts
common mode.
NOTE: Continuous input signals beyond the common mode range can result in
abnormal conversions without causing alarms.
Crosstalk:
High-speed inputs on the Base Converter module may show some interaction
between adjacent channels. This is typically .04% of the difference between the
affected input and the adjacent channel input levels. The effect can be
minimized by arranging inputs with similar levels on adjacent channels. There
is no measurable interaction between Expander input channels.
Conversion Rate:
Base Converter inputs updated sequentially about every 2.4 ms to 2.8 ms (maximum) for all 8 channels.
One Expander input updated during each scan of the Base Converter inputs.
Time between Expander updates = 44.8 x N ms (N = number of Expander
modulespresent).
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
25
GFK-0385F
August 1997
Analog Input System, High Level, 16 Channels
Table 5. Analog Input Specifications (continued) [
Response Time:
Each input has a low pass filter with a 100 radian/second (0.01 second) cutoff.
A digital filter on the Base Converter input channels adds a second pole at 450
radians/second. A sample and hold maintains full resolution.
Settling times, to the specified accuracies, for a zero to full scale step input are as
follows:
5.0% 30 milliseconds
1.0% 42 milliseconds
0.5% 51 milliseconds
0.1% 67 milliseconds
Input Protection:
Inputs isolated from VME backplane - but not between input channels. They
are, however, protected from overvoltage to the levels listed below.
Impulse:
Electrostatic Discharge:
ContinuousOvervoltage:
Power Requirements:
RackBackplane
Field Side
[
Inputs normally not affected by common mode damped ringwave of up to
1000 volts peak. Common or transverse mode peaks up to 2500 volts cause no
damage, but may cause occasional bad data if they occur coincidentally with
conversion of the affected channel.
Inputs survive up to 15KV ESD.
Inputs survive common mode or normal mode 120 VAC or 125 VDC fault for at
least 1 minute. Longer times may damage input current limiting resistor.
Damage limited to only the affected input.
+5 volts at 0.8A (4 watts) maximum for Base Converter
+5 volts at 0.4A (2 watts) for each Expander module
No power required for the module; however, current for 4 to 20 mA inputs
must be user supplied.
Refer to GFK-0867B, or later for product standards and general specifications. For installations requiring compliance
to more stringent requirements (for example, FCC or European Union Directives), refer to Installation Requirements for
Conformance to Standards.
Table 8. Ordering Information
Description
Analog Input Base Converter Module
Catalog Number
IC697ALG230
Analog Input Expander Modules
Current, 4 to 20 mA
IC697ALG440
Voltage, –10 to +10 Volts
IC697ALG441
Note: For Conformal Coat option, or Low Temperature Testing option please consult the
factory for price and availability.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
57-25
1
Analog Modules
IC697ALG320
58
GFK-0388G
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module (IC697ALG320)
datasheet GFK-0388G
Features
D
High Level Analog voltage and current outputs on
one module
D
Output module has four outputs individually configurable for voltage or current
D
Provides unipolar or bipolar Analog voltage outputs
up to Ç 10 volts full scale
D
D
D
D
D
Provides 0 to 22.5 milliamp current loop signals
Individual user scaling on each output channel
Fast update rate
a44034
OK
OK
1
3
1I
CHANNEL 1
4
GND
6
N.C.
8
+
10
7
I
11
2I
12
2V
13
CHANNEL 2
GND
14
N.C.
16
+
18
15
GND
17
I
19
3I
20
3V
21
GND
22
N.C.
24
CHANNEL 3
23
GND
25
+
I
26
27
4I
Analog outputs use %AQ references in the PLC. A
maximum of 8K words of %AQ memory is available
in the PLC. Each output channel uses one word (16
bits) of %AQ memory.
GND
9
Functions
The basic converter is 16 bits resolution (1 part in
65536) with 14-bit monotonicity. Outputs are isolated
from the backplane and are protected against transient and steady-state overvoltage conditions.
1V
5
Calibrated at factory with factory calibration data
stored in non-volatile EEPROM memory
The high level Analog Output system for the Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) accepts digital data
from the CPU or other controllers accessing the PLC
backplane. This output data is converted by a Digital
to Analog (D/A) converter to analog outputs of up to
10 volts full scale, or 0 to 22.5 milliamp current loop
signals.
I
2
+
No jumpers or DIP switches for user to configure
Easy configuration using the configuration function of
the MS-DOSr or Windowsrprogramming software
running on Windowsr 95 or Windows NTr over
Ethernet TCP/IP or through the SNP port. The Programming Software configuration function is installed
on the programming device. The programming device can be an IBMr XT, AT,PS/2r or compatible Personal Computer.
OUTPUT
ANALOG (V&I)
OUTPUT
ANALOG (V&I)
HIGH LEVEL
28
4V
29
CHANNEL 4
SLOT
GND
30
N.C.
32
31
GND
33
N.C.
V
34
USER
35
N.C.
COM
36
COM
38
GND
40
37
COM
39
GND
MODULE IC697ALG320
LABEL 44A726758–020R02
Figure 1. High Level Analog Output Module
r IBM and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
r MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 95, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
58-1
Analog Modules
2
GFK-0388G
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
System Operation
A block diagram of the IC697ALG320 High Level Analog Output module and an example of user field wiring connections to the module are shown below.
Î
Î
Î
ÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
ÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎ
VOUT
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
a43970
10V
VLOAD
VRET
CH 1
GND
JUMPER FOR
OUTPUT
REF
PLC
BACKPLANE
OPTO–
ISOLATION
D
V
OUT
A
4–20MA
LOAD
RET
GND
VC
VOUT
VOLTAGE
OUTPUT
VRET
CH 2
GND
REF
V
OUT
RET
GND
PWR +
USER
POWER SUPPLY
PWR
.001
VCM
10K
GND
MODULE
GROUND
USER
GROUND
Figure 2. Block Diagram and User Wiring Information for IC697ALG320
Connections for both voltage and current loads are
shown in the above illustration. Note the following
regarding the illustration:
1. Each output may be configured for either voltage
or current - not both.
2. If used as a current output you must jumper VOUT
to IREF.
58-2
3. Power for the voltage output is derived from the
PLC backplane. Power for the 4 to 20 mA current
output must be supplied by the user. A single connection (PSPOS and PSNEG) serves all four channels.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
3
GFK-0388G
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
Channel-to-Channel Compliance
User Wiring Connections
While it is expected that output loads will be floating
or tied to the same potential (normally ground), the
module is designed to allow up to 0.5 VDC compliance voltage (labeled VC in the previous illustration) difference between outputs and still operate
within specifications. This prevents ground loop currents or errors from occurring due to small differences
in ground potential at different locations. Note that in
addition to this offset, outputs will operate properly in
the presence of a large amount of high frequency
noise (refer to specifications).
As shown in the previous illustration. the output circuitry is isolated from the PLC backplane. This allows
the module to operate within specifications with a
common mode voltage of up to Ç 60V from ground
(shown as VCM in the illustration). It must be observed, however that the entire output section of the
module (all four channels) operates at a singleoffset
voltage from ground potential. Common mode voltage between outputs must be within the specifications
stated in the previous paragraph.
Figure 4 shows the wiring assignments for the screw
terminals on the terminal board on the Analog Output module. In addition to the information in this
data sheet, circuit wiring diagrams are printed on the
inside surface of the label inserted in the module’s
hinged door.
OUTPUT
ANALOG ( V &
IOUT
+
1I
2
3
4
I RET
GND
GND
+
2I
I RET
GND
I OUT
11
12
GND
+
3I
GND
GND GND
16
I REF
18
19
+
a43972
+
4I
I RET
V RET
22
GND GND
24
25
I REF
27
VOUT
26
4V
28
V RET
29
GND
GND
30
22
PWR
19.2
V
USER
COM
36
PWR
COM
38
GND
GND
40
14
12
10
600
800
R
L
Figure 3. User Power vs. Load Impedance
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
GND
33
N.C.
35
N.C.
37
COM
PWR
39
GND
GND
GND
34
MIN
16
31
32
24
PWR
VOUT
3V
23
N.C.
N.C.
t
V RET
21
GND
V OUT
14
MAX
400
+
2V
20
I RET
26
200
I REF
10
17
28.8
18
GND GND
8
13
I OUT
20
VRET
9
I OUT
V OUT
6
7
N.C.
N.C.
This module will accommodate a wide range of load
impedance; up to 800 ohms. The range of allowable
power supply voltage for a given load impedance is
shown in Figure 3. For example, a 24V Ç 20% supply
(19.2 to 28.8 volts) will provide sufficient power with
loads from 200 to 550 ohms.
28
+
1V
5
User Power for Current Loops
30
I REF
1
15
V (USER POWER
SUPPLY)
a43973
)
MODULE IC697ALG320
Figure 4. Field Wiring Connections to Module’s
I/O Terminal Board
58-3
Analog Modules
4
GFK-0388G
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
Connections to User Devices
Connections to the Analog Output module from user
devices are made to screw terminals on a removable
40-terminal connector block mounted on the front of
the module. All field connections to the outputs
should be wired to the I/O terminal board using a
good grade of twisted, shielded instrumentation
cable. Separate connections are provided on the terminal board for both current outputs and voltage outputs for each channel. Actual terminals used are determined by the configuration that has been selected
for each individual channel.
Ground connections for each channel, labeled GND,
on the terminal board are provided for connecting
VOLTAGE:
V OUT
+
V
shields. This ground connection is made directly to
the rack, resulting in superior rejection of noise
caused by any shield drain currents. Actual selection
of ground location may be influenced by system power and ground considerations. However, best operation will be obtained when system ground is physically close to the rack containing the analog circuits.
Normally, the shield is grounded at only one end (see
Figure 5).
For additional system grounding information refer to the
discussion on system grounding in chapter 3 of the Programmable Controller Installation Manual.
The module provides electrical isolation of externally
generated noise between the output field wiring and
the backplane through use of optical isolation.
Î
Î
REF
OUT
USER
DEVICE
V OUT
V RET
GND
a43974
CURRENT:
Î
RET
Î
V RET
NC
GND
SHIELD CONNECTED
AT MODULE END ONLY
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
Î
USER
DEVICE
SHIELD CONNECTED
AT MODULE END ONLY
Figure 5. Cable Connections to Field Devices
58-4
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
Analog Modules
5
GFK-0388G
August 1997
High Level Analog Output System - Voltage/Current Module
Recommended Field Wiring Procedures
The following procedures are recommended when
connecting field wiring to the detachable terminal
board on the Analog Output module. Module features
referenced in the following procedures which are common to all IC697 I/O modules are illustrated in the following figure.
a43855
JACKSCREW
HINGED
DOOR
TERMINAL
BOARD
CORD
TIE
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
ÎÎ
ÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
ÎÎÎÎ
Î
Î
JACKSCREW
Î
CORD
TIE
CLEAT
CORD
TIE
STRAP
CLEAT
Î
Î
Î
Î
STRAP
STRAP
Figure 6. I/O Module Common Features
1. Turn off power before removing or installing terminal boards. Open the hinged door on the module to access a jackscrew which holds the terminal
board securely in place. The Detachable field wiring terminal board can now be removed from the
module by turning the jackscrew counter-clockwise until it is fully disengaged.
2. To remove the terminal board, grasp the top of the
terminal board and swing it outward.
Caution
Do not use the hinged door to remove the
terminal board. The hinged door could
be damaged if this is done.
t
Series 90 -70 Programmable Controller Data Sheet Manual
GFK-0600F
3. The terminal board is designed to accept wire sizes
from AWG #22 (0.36 mm2) through AWG #14 (2.10
mm2). It is important that when using AWG #14
(2.10 mm2) wire for wiring all points, that a maximum insulation diameter of .135 inch (3.43 mm) not
be exceeded. To ensure proper connection, two
wires may be terminated o